InteliLite 4

MRS 16
Controller for single gen-set
applications

SW version 1.6.0
1 Document information 5
2 System overview 11
3 Applications overview 21
4 Installation and wiring 22
5 Controller setup 53
6 Communication 174
7 Technical data 195
8 Appendix 196

Copyright © 2024 ComAp a.s.

Written by Michal Slavata
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: info@[Link], [Link] Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 5 2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC 17
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5 2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1 18
1.2 About this Global Guide 5 2.6.5 Inteli AOUT8 18
1.3 Legal notice 5 2.6.6 InteliSys AIN8 19
1.3.1 General security recommendations 2.6.7 InteliSys BIN16/8 19
and set of measures 6 2.6.8 IGS-PTM 20
1.3.2 Used open source software 7 2.6.9 IGL-RA15 20
1.4 General warnings 7
1.4.1 Remote control and programming 7 3 Applications overview 21

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 7 3.1 MRS – Manual Remote Start 21

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 8

4 Installation and wiring 22
1.4.4 Adjusting the setpoints 8
4.1 Package content 22
1.5 Functions and protections 8
4.2 Controller installation 22
1.6 Certifications and standards 9
4.2.1 Dimensions 22
1.7 Document history 9
4.2.2 Mounting 23
1.8 Symbols in this manual 10
4.3 Terminal Diagram 24

2 System overview 11 4.4 Recommended wiring 25

2.1 General description 11 4.4.1 General 26

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4 11 4.4.2 Example of MRS Wiring 27

2.2 True RMS measurement 11 4.4.3 Grounding 27

2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11 4.4.4 Power supply 27

2.3.1 Supported configuration and 4.4.5 Measurement wiring 28

monitoring tools 11 4.4.6 Magnetic pick-up 40
2.3.2 Configuration parts 12 4.4.7 Binary inputs 41
2.4 PC Tools 13 4.4.8 Binary Outputs 42
2.4.1 InteliConfig 13 4.4.9 E-Stop 43
2.4.2 WebSupervisor 13 4.4.10 Analog inputs 43
2.4.3 WinScope 1000 14 4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 46
2.5 Plug-in Modules 14 4.4.12 USB 50
2.5.1 CM3-Ethernet 14 4.4.13 USB HOST 50
2.5.2 CM2-4G-GPS 14 4.5 Plug-in module installation 50
2.5.3 CM-RS232-485 15 4.5.1 Installation 50
2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP 15 4.6 Maintenance 51
2.6 CAN modules 16 4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 51
2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8 16
5 Controller setup 53
2.6.2 Inteli AIN8 17

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 2

5.1 Default configuration 53 5.5.12 Engine start 100
5.1.1 Binary inputs 53 5.5.13 Exercise timers 105
5.1.2 Binary outputs 53 5.5.14 Extended features 112
5.1.3 Analog inputs 53 5.5.15 Firewall 112
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools 5.5.16 Gen-set operation states 113
connection 54 5.5.17 Geo-fencing 115
5.2.1 USB 54 5.5.18 History log 116
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 55 5.5.19 Hybrid application 117
5.2.3 Ethernet 56 5.5.20 Load shedding 121
5.3 Operator Guide 63 5.5.21 Maintenance Timers 122
5.3.1 Front panel elements 63 5.5.22 Modbus Client (Master) 123
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 65 5.5.23 MRS operation 126
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 70 5.5.24 Multi ECU 127
5.3.4 Login 71 5.5.25 Operating Modes 128
5.3.5 Production mode 73 5.5.26 PLC 129
5.3.6 Information screen 74 5.5.27 Power formats and units 135
5.3.7 Language selection 76 5.5.28 Protections 135
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment 78 5.5.29 Pulse Counters 148
5.4 Remote Display 79 5.5.30 Rental Timers 148
5.4.1 General description 79 5.5.31 RPM Measurement 149
5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation 79 5.5.32 Sensor curves 149
5.4.3 Wiring 80 5.5.33 Stabilization 151
5.4.4 Interconnection variants 80 5.5.34 Start-stop sequence 152
5.4.5 Connection process 82 5.5.35 Universal hours counter 153
5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting 82 5.5.36 USB host 154
5.4.7 Function description 83 5.5.37 User Buttons 158
5.4.8 Firmware compatibility 83 5.5.38 User setpoints 160
5.5 Functions 85 5.5.39 User texts 161
5.5.1 Additional running engine indications 86 5.5.40 Voltage phase sequence detection 161
5.5.2 After-treatment Support 86 5.6 User management and data access control 162
5.5.3 Alternate configuration 91 5.6.1 Types of interfaces 162
5.5.4 Analog switches 92 5.6.2 User accounts 162
5.5.5 Breaker control 92 5.6.3 Managing accounts 164
5.5.6 Connecting to load 95 5.6.4 Account break protection 169
5.5.7 Dual Operation 95 5.6.5 Access to controller data 169
5.5.8 Dummy Load 98 5.6.6 Cybernetic security 170
5.5.9 E-Stop 98
5.5.10 ECU Frequency selection 99 6 Communication 174

5.5.11 Engine cool down and stop 100 6.1 PC 174

6.1.1 Direct communication 174

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 3

 6.1.2 Remote communication 175
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 180
6.2.1 SNMP 180
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 182

7 Technical data 195

8 Appendix 196
8.1 Controller objects 196
8.1.1 List of controller objects types 196
8.1.2 Setpoints 196
8.1.3 Values 542
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 605
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 632
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 683
8.1.7 PLC 691
8.2 Alarms 710
8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller 710
8.2.2 Alarms level 1 710
8.2.3 Alarms level 2 746
8.3 Modules 773
8.3.1 Plug-in modules 773
8.3.2 CAN modules 785
6 back to Table of contents

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 4

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of Notation 5
1.2 About this Global Guide 5
1.3 Legal notice 5
1.4 General warnings 7
1.5 Functions and protections 8
1.6 Certifications and standards 9
1.7 Document history 9
1.8 Symbols in this manual 10

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of Notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls the reader’s attention to a notice or related theme.

IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

WARNING: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

CAUTION: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.

Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.

1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliLite 4 family controllers which must be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliLite 4 controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators of Gen-sets
Gen-set control panel builders
Anyone who is involved with the installation, operation and maintenance of the Gen-set

1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product
and may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the "END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE" (License Agreement) and/or in
the ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services" (Terms) and/or in

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 5

 the Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions" (Conditions) as applicable.
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).
The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any
other purpose.
Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp
reserves the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any
responsibility for its use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly
prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on [Link].
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations
and set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be
considerably reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for
the actions of persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack.
However, ComAp is prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions,
including but not limited to restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other
preventive measures against any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.

1.3.1 General security recommendations and set of measures

1. Production mode
Disable production mode BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation.
2. User accounts
Change password for the existing default administrator account or replace that account with a
completely new one BEFORE the controller is put into regular operation mode.
Do not leave PC tools (e.g. InteliConfig) unattended while a user, especially administrator, is logged in.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 6

 3. AirGate Key
Change the AirGate Key BEFORE the device is connected to the network.
Use a secure AirGate Key – preferably a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase,
uppercase letters and digits.
Use a different AirGate Key for each device.
4. MODBUS/TCP
The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. By it's nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only
in closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using MODBUS/TCP in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).
5. SNMP
The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1 and version 2 are not encrypted. They are intended to be
used only in closed private network infrastructures.
Avoid using SNMP v1 and v2 in unprotected networks (e.g. Internet).

1.3.2 Used open source software

License condition web
Name of software License name
address
Mbed TLS Apache 2.0 license
Aladin MD5 Zlib license
Segger License Agreement v.
EmbOS license
150515
emFile Segger License Agreement license
emUSB Device Segger License Agreement license
emUSB-Host Segger License Agreement license
Tiny Mersenne Twister
BSD 3 license
(tinymt32)

1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programming
Controller can be controlled remotely. In the event that maintenance of a Gen-set needs to be done, or the
controller must be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any
other parts of the system cannot be affected.
Make sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be certain to use the proper combination of SW and HW versions.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 7

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage
Under no circumstances should you touch the terminals for voltage and current
measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
Under no circumstances should you disconnect controller CT terminals!

1.4.4 Adjusting the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints must be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first use of the Gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the Gen-set.

Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW
versions. Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in a controller.
This manual only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.

IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).

The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action
not specified in related guides for product.

1.5 Functions and protections

Support of functions and protections as defined by ANSI (American National Standards Institute):

Description ANSI code Description ANSI code

Voltage unbalance / Negative
Master unit 1 47
sequence voltage
Stopping device 5 Incomplete sequence relay 48
Multi-function device 11 Overcurrent 50/50TD
Overspeed 12 Earth fault** 50G
Underspeed 14 Breaker failure ANSI 50BF
Starting-to-running transition contactor 19 Overcurrent IDMT 51
Thermal relay 26 Overvoltage 59
Undervoltage 27 Aux Over Voltage 59X
Aux Battery Under Voltage 27X Pressure switch 63
Annunciator 30 Liquid level switch 71
Overload (real power) 32P Alarm relay*** 74
Reverse power 32R Reclosing relay 79
Master sequence device 34 Overfrequency 81O
Unit sequence starting* 44 Underfrequency 81U
Current unbalance 46

*Dual-operation **Extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP required *** extension module IGL-RA15 required

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 8

1.6 Certifications and standards
EN 61000-6-2 EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz /
2
EN 61000-6-4 40 m/s )
2
EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s ; T=6 ms)
EN 61010-1
EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours
EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h)
EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)
EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)
UL 6200

Supplier's Declaration of Conformity

47 CFR § 2.1077 Compliance Information

Unique identifier: IL4MRS16BAA, IL4MRS16BLA

Responsible Party:
Kevin Counts
10 N Martingale Rd #400
60173 - Schaumburg, IL
USA

Tel: +1 815 636 2541

E-mail: [Link]@[Link]

FCC Compliance Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

1.7 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
7 1.6.0 13.5.2024 Michal Slavata
6 1.4.0 20.1.2022 Michal Slavata
5 1.3.0 30.4.2022 Jan Liptak
4 1.2.0 12.11.2021 Jan Liptak
3 1.1.1 9.7.2021 Jan Liptak
2 1.1.0 18.6.2021 Jan Liptak
1 1.0.0 28.2.2021 Jan Liptak

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 9

1.8 Symbols in this manual

Connector - Resistor
3 x Phases Grounding
male adjustable

Active Resistive
current Contact GSM sensor
sensor RPTC
GSM RS 232
Contactor
AirGate modem male

Controller RS 232
IG-AVRi
Alternating simplified female
current
Module IG-AVRi
Starter
Analog simplified TRANS
modem
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
measuring
Battery operated

Current Transforme
Load
Binary measuring r
output
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Breaker
contact
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
female provider
Breaker
Passive Wi-fi / WAN
Fuel
current / LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor
Transil

Fuse Pick - up USB-C

Breaker
6 back to Document
Fuse switch information
Relay coil
Capacitor
Relay coil
Generator of slow-
Coil
operating
Generator
Connector - schematic Resistor
female

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 10

2 System overview
2.1 General description 11
2.2 True RMS measurement 11
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 11
2.4 PC Tools 13
2.5 Plug-in Modules 14
2.6 CAN modules 16

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

InteliLite 4 family controller are a comprehensive Gen-set controllers for single Gen-set operating in prime
power source (MRS) ) applications. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity
in order to provide the best solution for various customer applications.

2.1.1 The key features of InteliLite 4

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications.
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
High reliability

2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances, voltage should have a
pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements can produce harmonic waveforms with
frequencies of multiples of the basic frequency and this may result in deformation of the voltage waveforms.
The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values not only for pure sinusoidal
waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.

2.3 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system's high level of adaptability to the needs of each
individual application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the
powerful PC/mobile tools.

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliConfig – complete configuration and single or multiple Gen-sets monitoring
WebSupervisor – web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile – supporting application for smart-phones
WinScope 1000 – special graphical monitoring software
InteliSCADA – monitoring and management of ComAp devices

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 11

 Note: Use the InteliConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.

The firmware of the controller contains a large number of logical binary inputs and outputs needed for all
necessary functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same Gen-set;
also the controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of "logical" firmware inputs and outputs to the "physical" hardware inputs and
outputs.

2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and performing the same functions
(as mentioned above) for them
Selection of ECU type, if an ECU is connected
Changing the language of the controller interface

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration

The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See InteliConfig
documentation for details.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for
backup purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .ail4. An archive contains a full image of
the controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 12

 configuration it also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log
and a copy of the alarm list.
The archive can be easily used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration
and settings.

2.4 PC Tools
2.4.1 InteliConfig
Configuration and monitoring tool for various ComAp controllers. See more in InteliConfig Reference Guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or internet communication with the
controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
Exporting data into an XLS file
Controller language translation

2.4.2 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling of controllers. See more at the WebSupervisor webpage.

This tool provides the following functions:

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
Email notification
Also available as a smart-phone application

WebSupervisor available at: [Link]

Demo account:
Login: comaptest
Password: ComAp123

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 13

2.4.3 WinScope 1000
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and Gen-set troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope 1000 Reference guide.

This tool provides the following functions:

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual / historical trends in controller
On-line change of controller's parameters for
easy regulator setup

2.5 Plug-in Modules

2.5.1 CM3-Ethernet
Internet/Ethernet module.
10/100 Mbit interface over RJ45 socket
Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Modbus TCP support
Full SNMP support including traps (v1, v2c and
v3)
Active e-mail sending
AirGate 2.0 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address

2.5.2 CM2-4G-GPS
GSM/4G module
GSM/4G Internet module and GPS locator
Global 4G (LTE) module with 3G/2G backup
Remote control and monitoring of the controller
via InteliConfig, WebSupervisor
Active e-mail and SMS support
AirGate 2 technology support for easy
connection – no need of public and static IP
address
Tracking via GNSS (GPS,GLONASS) module

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 14

2.5.3 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
Modbus RTU support
Serial connection to InteliConfig

2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Hybrid current input and binary input/output extension module.
One additional AC current (CT) measuring for
Earth Fault Current protection (EFCP)
Wide range of measured current – one input for
1 A and 1 input for 5 A
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs
Note: This protection is active ONLY when Engine
is running.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 15

2.6 CAN modules
2.6.1 Inteli IO8/8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2
analog outputs, or 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller.

Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch
(LSS) or High side switch (HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10 V),
current (0-20 mA) and PWM (5 V, adjustable
frequency 200 Hz-2.4 kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10 V),
current (0-20 mA) and PWM (5 V, adjustable
frequency 200 Hz-2.4 kHz))

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 16

2.6.2 Inteli AIN8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.

Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250 Ω, 0-2400 Ω, 0-
10 kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000,
Ni100, Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20 mA, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Voltage
±1 V, 0-2.4 V, 0-5 V, 0-10 V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, which caused non-support of
thermocouples)
Impulse/RPM sensor:
RPM measuring pulses with frequency 4 Hz-
10 kHz
Impulse
Possibility to measure pulses from
electrometer, flowmeter (measurement of
total consumption, average fuel
consumption)

2.6.3 Inteli AIN8TC

8 Analog Channels Module. The unit offers flexibility to configure 8 thermocouple inputs.
8 analog input channels for measuring
temperature by thermocouples

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 17

2.6.4 Inteli AIO9/1
9 Analog Inputs and 1 Analog Output Module
4× differential voltage inputs for measurement
in range of 0 – 65 V or -65 – 0 V
4× shielded, galvanically separated ±75 mV
inputs
Resistance analog input 0-2500 Ω
One analog output

2.6.5 Inteli AOUT8

The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog outputs via switches inside the
controller.

8 configurable analog outputs

Outputs are configurable to:
0-10 V DC or
0/4-20 mA range or
1200 Hz PWM
Up to four I-AOUT8 can be connected to one
controller
UL certified

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 18

2.6.6 InteliSys AIN8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs via switches inside the
controller.

Configurable 8 analog inputs

Precision of inputs is 1%
Accept 2/3 wire resistive, current, voltage
sensors
Predefined sensor (Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000, thermocouple type J/K/L, 0-20 mA, 0-
10 V)
Up to 10 IS-AIN8 can be connected to the
controller
UL certified

2.6.7 InteliSys BIN16/8

The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 16 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs via
switches inside the controller.

Configurable 16 galvanically separated inputs

Configurable 8 outputs
2 pulse inputs (frequency measurement or
pulse counting)
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs and
outputs
Up to 6 IS-BIN16/8 can be connected to the
controller
UL certified

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 19

2.6.8 IGS-PTM
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog
inputs and 1 analog outputs.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100
sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ω,
voltage range 0-100 mV, current range 0-20 mA
– selectable via jumper)
UL certified

2.6.9 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable
colors red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified

6 back to System overview

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 20

3 Applications overview
3.1 MRS – Manual Remote Start 21

6 back to Table of contents

3.1 MRS – Manual Remote Start

The typical schematic of Manual Remote Start application is shown below. The controller controls one
breaker – a generator breaker. Feedback from the breaker is not necessary. InteliLite 4 controllers can also
work without breaker feedback.

Image 3.1 MRS application overview

6 back to Applications overview

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 21

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 22
4.2 Controller installation 22
4.3 Terminal Diagram 24
4.4 Recommended wiring 25
4.5 Plug-in module installation 50
4.6 Maintenance 51

6 back to Table of contents

4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks

Note: The package does not contain any communication or extension modules. The required modules
should be ordered separately.

4.2 Controller installation

4.2.1 Dimensions

① Plug-in module
Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module

Note: Dimensions are in millimetres.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 22

4.2.2 Mounting
The controller should be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 187 × 132 mm. Use
the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described in pictures below.
Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.

Panel door mounting

Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction – For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 23

4.3 Terminal Diagram
① GENERATOR CURRENT ② GENERATOR VOLTAGE ③ BINARY INPUTS
MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT
T30 COM T38 N T46 BI1
T31 L1 T39 L1 T47 BI2
T32 L2 T40 L2 T48 BI3
T33 L3 T41 L3 T49 BI4
T50 BI5
T51 BI6
T52 BI7
T53 BI8

Image 4.1 Terminal diagram for InteliLite 4 MRS 16

④ CAN1 ⑥ ANALOG INPUTS ⑧ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑩ POWER SUPPLY,

D+
T27 L T12 BO8 T01 BATT -
T28 COM T22 AI4 T11 BO7 T02 D+
T29 H T21 AI3 T10 BO6 T03 BATT +
T20 AI2 T09 BO5 ⑪ RS485
⑤ +5 V T19 AI1 T08 BO4 T56 B
T23 +5 V T18 ACOM T07 BO3 T57 COM
T06 BO2 T58 A
⑦ RPM T05 BO1 ⑫ USB
T17 RPM IN ⑨ E-STOP ⑬ USB HOST
T16 RPM GND T04

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 24

4.4 Recommended wiring

Current inputs 30-33 Current measurement wiring (page 29)

Generator voltage inputs 38-41 Voltage measurement MRS wiring (page 32)

Binary inputs 46-53 Binary inputs (page 41)

CAN1 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 46)

+5 V 23

Analog inputs 18-22 Analog inputs (page 43)

RPM 16,17 Magnetic pick-up (page 40)

Binary outputs 05-12 Binary Outputs (page 42)

E-Stop 04 E-Stop (page 43)

Power supply "+", D, "-" Power supply (page 27)

RS485 A, B, C CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 46)

USB Device USB (page 50)

USB Host USB HOST (page 50)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 25

 2
Note: Wiring terminal markings to included tightening torque: 0.5 N-m (4.5 lb-in)., and wire size: 2 mm (12-
26 AWG).

4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should be wired with shielded cables, especially when the length is more than
3 m.

Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Generator Voltage and Current terminals

Specified tightening torque is 0.56 Nm (5.0 In-lbs)

use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90 °C minimum.

For other controller field wiring terminals

Specified tightening torque 0.79 nm (7.0 In-lb)

Use only diameter 0.5 - 2.0 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 75 °C minimum.

Use copper conductors only

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 26

4.4.2 Example of MRS Wiring

4.4.3 Grounding
2
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min. 2.5 mm .
The negative "–" battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use the shortest possible cable to the
grounding point.

4.4.4 Power supply

To ensure proper function:
2
Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm
Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V. The controller’s power supply terminals are protected
against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected to
conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.
It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery "–"
terminal is maximally ±2 V. Therefore it is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals
together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller's negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 27

 For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes to 0 V
during cranking and after 50 ms it recovers to 4 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.

Note: Recommended fusing is 4 A fuse.

Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after
recovering to 4 V back on.

IMPORTANT: When the controller is powered up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then
the actual statistics can be lost.

Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.

Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.

Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is
12 V, after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V. Diode should be able to withstand at
least 1 kV.

Power supply fusing

The controller should never be connected directly to the starting battery. A 4 A fuse should be connected in-
line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and CAN modules. Fuse value and type depends on the
number of connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type – T4 A. Not fast types are
recommended due to internal capacitors charging during power up.
IMPORTANT: 4 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real
value of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.

4.4.5 Measurement wiring

2 2
Use 1.5 mm cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm for current transformers connection. Adjust
Connection type (page 210), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 212),
Nominal Current (page 208), Gen VT Ratio (page 215) and Gen CT Ratio Prim (page 209) to appropriate
setpoints in the Basic Settings group.
IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed.
Open the primary circuit first.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 28

 Current measurement wiring
The number of CT's is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page
210) [3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement are suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
To ensure proper function:
2
Use cables of 2.5 mm
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

3 phase application

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.2 3 phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.3 3 phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 29

 SplPhL1L2 application

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.4 SplPhL1L2 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.5 SplPhL1L2 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 30

 SplPhL1L3 application

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.6 SplPhL1L3 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.7 SplPhL1L3 application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where the
third phase is normally connected.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 31

 Mono phase application
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.8 Mono phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so ground properly both terminals.

T Phase Terminal
Ta COM T30
Tb L1 T31
Tc L2 T32
Td L3 T33

Image 4.9 Mono phase application

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal
and power supply "–" terminal is maximally ±2 V. To do so interconnect these two terminals.

Note: This wiring is recommended for Indian market.

Voltage measurement MRS wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 210) [3Ph4Wire / High
Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / Mono Ph] options, each type matches to corresponding
generator connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.

The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 210)
setting:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 32

 3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
High Leg D – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
SplPhL1L2 – Ph-N voltage
SplPhL1L3 – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage

Connection Type: 3 Phase 4 Wires

Image 4.10 3 phase application with neutral

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 33

 Image 4.11 Typical 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring, also known as 3ph High Y

Note: Connection type 277/480V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y (page 213).

Image 4.12 3 Phase 4 Wires generator wiring, also known as 3ph Low Y

Note: Connection type 120/208V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y (page 213).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 34

 Connection Type: 3 Phase 3 Wires

Image 4.13 3 phase application without neutral

Image 4.14 Typical 3 Phase 3 Wires generator wiring

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 35

 Connection Type: High Leg D

Image 4.15 High Leg Delta application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.16 Typical High Leg D generator wiring

Note: Connection type 120/240V 3-PHASE, Nominal Voltage High Leg D (page 214).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 36

 Connection Type: SplPhL1L2

Image 4.17 Split phase L1L2 application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.18 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 37

 Image 4.19 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

Note: Connection type 120/240V 1-PHASE, Nominal Voltage SplitPhase (page 214).

Connection Type: SplPhL1L3

Image 4.20 Split phase L1L3 application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where the
third phase is normally connected.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 38

 Image 4.21 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

Image 4.22 Typical Split Phase generator wiring

Note: Connection type 120/240V 1-PHASE, Nominal Voltage SplitPhase (page 214).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 39

 Connection Type: Mono Phase

Image 4.23 Mono phase application

Note: Fuse on "N" wire is not obligatory but recommended.

Image 4.24 Typical Mono Phase generator wiring

4.4.6 Magnetic pick-up

A magnetic speed sensor (pickup) is the most common method of engine speed measurement. To use this
method, mount the pickup opposite the engine flywheel, connect the cable to the controller as shown on the
picture below and adjust the setpoint Gear Teeth (page 216) according to the number of teeth on the
flywheel.
For the details about the pick-up input parameters see Technical data on page 195.
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper function use a shielded cable.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 40

 T Line Terminal
Ta GND T16
Tb IN T17

Note: For more information about Magnetic pick-up terminals see Recommended wiring on page 25.

If engine will not start:

Check ground connection from pick-up to controllers, if the problem continues, disconnect ground
connection from one of them.
Note: In some cases the controller will measure RPM value even though the gen-set is not running: RPM is
measured from the generator voltage (Gear Teeth = 0). Controller is measuring some voltage value on input
terminals due to open fusing. If RPM > 0 the controller will be put into a Not ready state and the engine will not
be allowed to start.

4.4.7 Binary inputs

2
Use minimally 1 mm cables for wiring of Binary inputs.

Image 4.25 Wiring binary inputs

Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input must be assigned during the configuration.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 41

4.4.8 Binary Outputs
2
Use min. 1 mm cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below
for all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc.).
IMPORTANT: Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!

Image 4.26 Binary outputs wiring

Note: Every single low current binary output can provide up to 0.5 A of steady current.

IMPORTANT: Binary output 1 and 2 is power up by E-Stop terminal.

IMPORTANT: When operating temperature is higher than 60 °C it is strongly recommended to

limit output current of high current binary outputs to 4 A (each).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 42

4.4.9 E-Stop
E-Stop has dedicated terminal T04. Power supply of binary output 1 and binary output 2 is internally
connected (in controller) to E-Stop terminal. It means higher security and faster disconnection of these
outputs. More information about E-Stop functions see E-Stop on page 98.
Note: This function has the same behavior as binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 617).

Image 4.27 E-Stop wiring

Note: Recommended fusing is 10 A fuse.

Note: Grey dashed line symbolizes internal connection between E-Stop and binary outputs 1 and 2.

Note: For proper functionality of E-Stop, the terminal T04 must be always wired. Terminal can be connected
to battery+ or to terminal T03 (BATT+)

IMPORTANT: Suppression diodes are not indicated, but required.

4.4.10 Analog inputs

On each analog input, there is the possibility to connect a voltage, current or resistive sensor.
The analog inputs for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON are connected either by one
wire (the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 43

 Image 4.28 Wiring of analog sensor

Note: For more information about analog inputs terminals see Recommended wiring on page 25.

In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to the sensors
as possible.
In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply terminal of the
controller as well as one pole of each sensor.
Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Coolant Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these
parameters are connected with relevant protections.

Image 4.29 Grounded sensors Image 4.30 Isolated sensors

Note: For more information about analog inputs terminals see Recommended wiring on page 25.

Note: Schematics show only analog input connection overview, not actual wiring.

Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 44

 Analog as binary or tristate inputs
Analog inputs can be used also as binary or tri-state, i.e. for contact sensors without or with circuit check. The
threshold level is 750 Ω. In the case of tri-state, values lower than 10 Ω and values over 2400 Ω are evaluated
as sensor failure (short or open circuit). This can be used for example to prevent running the engine with
failed temperature sensor, so it wont be overheated.

Image 4.31 Analog inputs as tristate Image 4.32 Analog inputs as binary

Note: For more information about A-COM terminal see Recommended wiring on page 25.

Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.

Note: Tristate and binary sensors are not suitable for Analog Switch functions.

Curve of tristate sensor is prepared for resistive analog inputs 0 .. 2500 Ω.

Tristate sensor has 3 states:
Fls – fail of sensor
1 – value is in logical 1
0 – value is in logical 0
Curve of sensor:
< 10 Ω – fail of sensor
10 .. 750 Ω – logical 1
750 .. 2500 Ω – logical 0
> 2500 – fail of sensor

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 45

 Analog Voltage sensor
Controller is equipped with +5 V terminal which can be used as power supply for a voltage analog sensor.

T Line Terminal
Ta +5V T23
Tb AIN T19-T22
Tc COM T18

Image 4.33 Analog Voltage sensor

Note: Maximal current of 5V output is 45 mA.

4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps,
which is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU), the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except
on the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 must be used, and shielding must be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails,
no star) is necessary.
The CAN bus must be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends using a cable with following parameters:

Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75 % (delay ≤ 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut ≥ 0.25 mm
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB / 100 m

Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

1Recommended data cables: BELDEN ([Link] - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 46

 Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close
the jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.

Image 4.34 CAN bus topology

For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.35 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances

Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal.

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.36 CAN bus wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1

1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact ([Link] PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-

BE (base element) or Saltek ([Link] DM-012/2 R DJ

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 47

 RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are
observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close
the jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.

Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable1 must be used, and shielding must be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping the line arrangement (no
tails, no star) is necessary.
The line must be terminated by 120Ω resistors at both ends.
For shorter distances (connection within one building)

Image 4.37 RS485 wiring for shorter distances

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)

Image 4.38 RS485 wiring for longer distances

① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST2
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.

1Recommended data cables: BELDEN ([Link] – for shorter distances: 3105A Paired – EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired – EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)
2Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact ([Link] PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek ([Link] DM-006/2 R DJ

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 48

 On board RS485 description

Balancing resistors
The transmission bus into the RS485 port enters an indeterminate state when it is not being transmitted to.
This indeterminate state can cause the receivers to receive invalid data bits from the noise picked up on the
cable. To prevent these data bits, force the transmission line into a known state. By installing two 620Ω
balancing resistors at one node on the transmission line, a voltage divider is created that forces the voltage
between the differential pair to be less than 200 mV, which is the threshold for the receiver. Install these
resistors on only one node. The figure below shows a transmission line using bias resistors. Balancing
resistors are placed directly on the PCB of controller. Use the jumpers PULL UP/PULL DOWN to connect the
balancing resistors.

Image 4.39 Balancing resistors

Image 4.40 RS485 on board

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 49

4.4.12 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A to B cable.

Image 4.41 USB connection

Controller can be also powered by USB (only for service purpose like an uploading firmware, change of
configuration etc.).
IMPORTANT: Power supply by USB is only for service purpose. Binary inputs and outputs are in
logical 0. Also plug-in modules are not working.

4.4.13 USB HOST

USB Flash Drive can be connected into USB A connector.
Note: For more information see USB host on page 154.

6 back to Recommended wiring

4.5 Plug-in module installation

4.5.1 Installation
IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply and USB from the controller!

Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 50

 After removing the back cover insert the plug-in module. The plug-in module must be inserted under holders.
After inserting plug-in module under holders press it down. This locks the module in place.

After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each
plug-in module.

4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
This battery serves to maintain the run of RTC (real time clock) so that controller does not lose information
about time and date when disconnected from power supply.
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If replacement of backup battery is needed, follow
these instructions:
Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but
recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Remove the back cover and all plug-in modules.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.

The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp
screwdriver and push the new battery into the holder using a finger.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 51

 Replace the rear cover. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover
is in correct position and not upside down!
Replace the plug-in modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.

6 back to Installation and wiring

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 52

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 53
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 54
5.3 Operator Guide 63
5.4 Remote Display 79
5.5 Functions 85
5.6 User management and data access control 162

6 back to Table of contents

5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function
BIN1 Remote Start/Stop REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627)
BIN2 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 620)
BIN3 Not used Not Used
BIN4 Access Lock ACCESS LOCK (PAGE 607)
BIN5 Switch controller to OFF mode REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626)
BIN6 Not used Not Used
BIN7 Suppression of alarms SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627)
BIN8 Not used Not Used

5.1.2 Binary outputs

Number Description Function
BOUT1 Starter motor control STARTER 1 (PAGE 675)
BOUT2 Fuel solenoid valve FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654)
BOUT3 Indication of breaker state GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 656)
BOUT4 Activation of any devices before start PRESTART (PAGE 669)
BOUT5 Gen-set can be connected to load READY TO LOAD (PAGE 672)
BOUT6 Alarm ALARM (PAGE 639)
BOUT7 Not used NOT USED (PAGE 669)
BOUT8 Not used NOT USED (PAGE 669)

5.1.3 Analog inputs

Number Configured sensor Function
AIN1 VDO 10 Bar OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 689)
AIN2 VDO40-120°C COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 688)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 53

 AIN3 VDOLevel % FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 688)
AIN4 Not used NOT USED (PAGE 689)

5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools

connection
5.2.1 USB 54
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 55
5.2.3 Ethernet 56

6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload, as well as the
connection of various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use
the included Help in those PC tools or download their Global Guides.

5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller

Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig – select detected controllers

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 54

 Connection using WinScope 1000

Image 5.3 WinScope 1000 screen – select USB connection

Select your controller from the HID Device drop-down list.

Note: Username and password are not mandatory.

5.2.2 RS232/RS485
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 or RS485 direct connection (serial port or USB to
RS232/RS485 converter may be used). The following settings should be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 471) = Direct
Controller Address (page 227) must be set

Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.4 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 55

 Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig – select Serial link

Connection using WinScope 1000

Image 5.6 WinScope 1000 screen – select serial link

Note: Username and password are not mandatory.

5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using Ethernet port either directly or using ComAp's AirGate service.

Direct connection
If you use a direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings
should to be checked in the controller:
Controller Address (page 227) must be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 501) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service available.
Otherwise it should be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 502) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 502) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Gateway IP (page 503) can be set here when it is used

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 56

 Connection using InteliConfig

Image 5.7 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller

Image 5.8 Second screen of InteliConfig – select Internet / Ethernet

Connection using WinScope 1000

Image 5.9 WinScope 1000 screen – select Ethernet

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 57

 Following information has to be filled to establish connection:
IP address
Controller address
User name and Password
Access code is required

AirGate connection
You can use ComAp's AirGate service that allows you to connect to any controller via the internet regardless
of the restrictions of the local network (as long as the controller can connect to the internet AirGate service will
work). The following setpoints must be adjusted:
Controller Address (page 227) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool
IP Address Mode (page 501) must set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service available.
Otherwise it should be set to FIXED
IP Address (page 502) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Subnet Mask (page 502) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value
Gateway IP (page 503) can be set here when it is used
AirGate Connection (page 505) must be set to Enabled
AirGate Address (page 506) currently there is one AirGate server running at URL [Link]
(enter this URL into the setpoint)
IMPORTANT: AirGate Key has to be configured. User with administrator rights has a possibility to
set up or change AirGate Key via InteliConfig using Tools -˃ Access Administration -˃ Change
AirGate Key.

IMPORTANT: Controller has to be connected to the Internet.

Getting started with AirGate

1. Make sure controller has link to Internet
a. CM3-Ethernet is connected to LAN infrastructure, has an IP address and access to Internet
b. CM2-4G-GPS is connected to a mobile operator (preferably to 3G/4G network) and has an IP
address
2. Connect with InteliConfig e.g. via USB and check setpoints as follows:
a. AirGate connection = ENABLED
b. AirGate port = 54440
c. AirGate address = [Link]
3. Adjust AirGate key in InteliConfig – this is your "secret key" that you have to provide always when you
want to connect to the controller via AirGate.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 58

 Image 5.10 Changing AirGate key

4. Wait for approx 2 – 4 minutes until the controller connects to AirGate. You can see the progress by
observing the value AirGate status in InteliConfig
5. When the controller is connected to AirGate it will generate AirGate ID for the controller. This AirGate ID is
the "phone number" of the controller.
Note: If CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS are used simultaneously the assigned AirGate ID will be different
for each module, so the controller will be accessible via two different AirGate ID.

Connecting from InteliConfig via AirGate 2.0

AirGate ID controller addressing ID (see above)

Access Code leave empty
AirGate Key AirGate Key adjusted in controller as per description above
AirGate Server "[Link]"
Username, Password use your credentials

AirGate operational and diagnostic information

Object Description
Indicated while the controller is actually not trying to connect to AirGate. This is initial
Not defined
value of the status.
Wait to Indicated while the controller is waiting the "repetition period" before next attempt to
connect connect to a node is performed.
Indicated while the controller is resolving domain name of the node to which it is
Resolving
attempting to connect.
Connecting Indicated while the controller is attempting to establish TCP link to the node.
Creat sec chan Indicated while CCS encrypted channel is being negotiated.
Indicated when the CCS channel has been established until AirGate sends message
Registering
"setRuntimeParams" (with any registration status).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 59

 Object Description
Conn Indicated when AirGate sent registration status other than "Authorized" until the status
inoperable changed to "Authorized".
Indicated when AirGate sent registration status "Authorized" until the status changed
Conn operable
to any other one.
Indicated when the service is enabled but suspended due to empty AirGate key.
Susp
Note: If you see this status message you have to adjust AirGate Key as per
AGkeyEmpty
instructions above.

Connection using InteliConfig

In order to connect to InteliConfig following information have to be filled out:
AirGate ID (page 589)
AirGate Server → AirGate Address (page 506)
Controller Address (page 227)
User name and Password
AirGate Key

IMPORTANT: AirGate Key has to be configured. User with administrator rights has a possibility to
set up or change AirGate Key via InteliConfig using Tools -˃ Access Administration -˃ Change
AirGate Key.

Image 5.11 First screen of InteliConfig – select connect to controller

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 60

 Image 5.12 Second screen of InteliConfig – AirGate

Connection using WinScope 1000

In order to connect to WinScope 1000 following information have to be filled out:
AirGate ID (page 589)
AirGate Server → AirGate Address (page 506)
Controller Address (page 227)
User name and Password
Device Access Key →AirGate Key
Access code is required

IMPORTANT: AirGate Key has to be configured. User with administrator rights has a possibility to
set up or change AirGate Key via InteliConfig using Tools -˃ Access Administration -˃ Change
AirGate Key.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 61

 Image 5.13 WinScope 1000 screen – select AirGate

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 62

5.3 Operator Guide
5.3.1 Front panel elements 63
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 65
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 70
5.3.4 Login 71
5.3.5 Production mode 73
5.3.6 Information screen 74
5.3.7 Language selection 76
5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment 78

5.3.1 Front panel elements

Image 5.14 Operator interface of InteliLite 4 MRS 16

Control buttons
Position Picture Description
LEFT button. Use this button to move left or to change the mode. The button
can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently
selected mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced
by one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.
RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The
button can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of
currently selected mode is displayed.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 63

 Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced
by one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – "Operating modes"
chapter.

HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.

FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and

deactivate the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and
status of active alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear
as soon as their reasons dismiss.

UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.

PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.

DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.

ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in
the history page.

START button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the
start sequence of the engine.

STOP button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to initiate the stop
sequence of the Gen-set. Repeated pressing of button will cancel current
phase of stop sequence (like cooling) and next phase will continue.

GCB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close
the GCB.

Indicators and others

Position Description
GENERATOR status indicator. There are two states – Gen-set OK (indicator is green)
and Gen-set failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if the generator voltage and
frequency is present and within limits. Red LED starts flashing when Gen-set failure
occurs. After FAULT RESET button is pressed, Red LED goes to steady light (if an alarm
is still active) or is off (if no alarm is active).

Graphic B/W display, 132 × 64 px.

LOAD. Green LED is ON if load is supplied by power source. It means, that Gen-set or
mains is healthy and proper circuit breaker is closed.
Note: Available only for AMF20, AMF25 and MRS16 models.
GCB Status. Green LED is on if GCB is closed. It is driven by GCB CLOSE/OPEN output
or by GCB feedback signal.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 64

5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure
The displayed information is structured into "pages" and "screens". Use the PAGE button to switch over the
pages.
The page Measurement consists of screens which display measured values such as voltages, current, oil
pressure etc.; computed values such as Gen-set power, statistic data and the alarm list on the last screen.
The page setpoints contains all setpoints organized to groups and also a special group for entering a
password.
The page History log shows the history log with the most recent record displayed first.

Main Screen

Symbols
Padlock – active when LBI ACCESS LOCK is active
R – active when there is active remote connection to controller
Exclamation mark – active when there is any alarm in alarm list

Personalization of main screen

Main screen can be personalized by following setpoints:
Main Screen Line 1
Main Screen Line 2
Main Screen Gauge

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 65

 Measurement Screens

Note: Use the Up and Down buttons to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use the Up and Down buttons to move between measurement pages.

Note: Use the Up and Down buttons to move between measurement pages.

Note: There are additional screens. Screen’s visibility depends on actual configuration (usage of extension
or communication modules, ECU, controller model, etc.).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 66

 Note: Use the Up and Down buttons to move between measurement pages.

Note: From all of these pages it is possible to switch seamlessly to the setpoint group page by pressing the
Page button.

Setpoint Screens

Note: From all measurement pages you can easily go to the setpoint group page by pressing the Page
button.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
setpoint group.

Note: Use the Enter button to enter selected setpoint group.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 67

 Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
setpoint.

Note: Use the Left and the Right button to select required setpoint.

Note: Use the Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.

Note: Use the Enter button to confirm adjusted value of setpoint.

Note: Use the Page button to discard changes, to set setpoint to previous value and to return to the list of
setpoints of selected group.

History Log

Note: From all measurement pages you can easily go to the setpoint group page by pressing the Page
button.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 68

 Note: From setpoint group page we can fluently go to the history log pages by pressing the Page button.

Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.

Note: Use the Enter button to move to the next page of history log.

Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
required alarm
reason.

Note: Use Enter button to move to the first page of history log.

Note: There are additional history screens. Screen’s visibility depends on actual configuration (usage of
extension or communication modules, ECU, controller model, etc.).

IMPORTANT: The records are numbered in reverse order, i.e. the latest (newest) record is "0" and
older records have "-1", "-2" etc.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 69

5.3.3 Browsing alarms

Note: Use the Up button to move to alarm list from main measurement screen.

Active alarms are displayed as white text on black background. It means the alarm is still active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are still present.
Inactive alarms are displayed as black text on white background. It means the alarm is not active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are gone.
Unconfirmed alarms are displayed with an asterisk. This means the alarm is still not acknowledged
(confirmed).
ECU alarms: SPN/FMI/OC/SC
SPN – Suspect parameter number
FMI – type of protection
OC – number of errors
SC – source of error

User access management alarms

The controller comes to the customer with Production mode turned on, the default administrator password
installed and with no prefilled email address for password reset. For security purposes, the following user

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 70

 access management alarms will appear. Detailed description of situation when the alarms are active is
provided below:
Wrn Production Mode is present in the alarm list any time the production mode is turned on. To turn off
the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox Production mode or go to
Production Mode display screen and select disable.
Wrn Default Password appears in alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller
might be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is
default administrator password.
Wrn Password reset e-mail address is not set appears in alarm list when there is no email address set
and the administrator password is not the default one. The purpose of alarm is to inform that there is
possibility that the controller might not be accessible by administrator password due to a forgotten
password. The password reset procedure cannot be performed without a filled email address. To fill out
email address, the administrator password is required.

5.3.4 Login

Note: From all measurement pages you can easily go to the setpoint group page by pressing the Page
button.

Note: Use the Up

and the Down
button to select
setpoint group
Login.

Note: Use the Enter button to enter setpoint group Login.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 71

 Note: Use the Up
and the Down
Button to select
Login.

Note: Use the Enter button to enter Login.

Note: Use the Up

and the Down
Button to change
the digit.

Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between digits.

Note: Use the Enter button to confirm the UserID or Page button to cancel entering Login.

Note: In case that invalid UserID or PIN are entered, the controller shows Wrong Credentials screen. Use
the Enter button to enter Login again or the Page Button to go back to menu.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 72

5.3.5 Production mode

Note: From all measurement pages you can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing the Page
button.

Note: Use the Enter button to enter setpoint group Login.

Note: Use the Up

and the Down
Button to select
Production Mode

Note: Use the Enter button to enter the Production Mode.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 73

 Note: Use the Up
and the Down
Button to change
to disabled

Note: Use the Enter button to disable the Production Mode.

Note: Once Disabled is confirmed by the Enter button the option Enabled is no longer on the screen and
therefore it is not possible to enable Production mode by HMI display screen. Use InteliConfig to enable the
Production mode.

5.3.6 Information screen

+
Note: On Main measurement screen press the Enter and the Page button together. The Enter button has to
be pressed first.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 74

 Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use the Up button to move back to main measurement screen.

Note: Use the

Up and the Down
button to select
required
language.

Note: Use the Enter button to confirm the selected language.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 75

 Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use the

Up and the Down
button to select
required
configuration
level.

Note: Use the Enter button to confirm selected configuration level.

Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.

5.3.7 Language selection

+
Note: On Main measurement screen press the Enter and the Page button together. The Enter button has to
be pressed first.

Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 76

 Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use the Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use the

Up and the Down
button to select
required
language.

Note: Use the Enter button to confirm the selected language.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 77

5.3.8 Display contrast adjustment

+
Note: On Main measurement screen press the Enter and the Page button together. The Enter button has to
be pressed first.

+ +
Note: On any measurement screen press the Enter Note: On any measurement screen press the Enter
and the Up button together for higher contrast. and the Down button together for lower contrast.

Note: After setting the contrast, no another action is needed.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 78

5.4 Remote Display
This chapter describes Remote display firmware IL4-RD, which is designed as a remote signalling and control
software for InteliLite 4 family controllers. It is an optional software which is possible to upload into the
controller rather than the controller’s standard firmware.

5.4.1 General description

Remote display software works as "remote display and control" for the Master controller. Gen-set can be
controlled using the Remote display and the Master controller simultaneously and independently. All Remote
display screens (Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log) display the same data as the
Master controller. The front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All remote display LEDs
show the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller.
Note: Some settings are not shared between display and control unit (setpoint Backlight Timeout (page
221), Controller language and Controller user mode).

5.4.2 IL4-RD Firmware installation

The IL4-RD Remote display firmware is installed in the same way as any other InteliLite 4 firmware using the
InteliConfig PC tool. Reverting the Remote display controller back to regular Gen-set controller is carried out
the same way.
Note: InteliConfig shows the most compatible and the most recent firmware as default option. Thus, it is
necessary use "More options" (…) button to pick IL4-RD firmware for uploading to controller. (See details on
picture below.)

Note: IL4-RD consists of firmware only, there is no archive included.

Note: When IL4-RD firmware is uploaded to controller there is only possible connect InteliConfig using USB
connection. InteliConfig serves only for firmware update when connected to Remote display. There is no
Master controller SCADA displayed, no possibility to adjust setpoints, display Values etc.

Note: Please refer to InteliConfig Global Guide for details about firmware uploading to controller.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 79

5.4.3 Wiring
IL4-RD can be connected to master controller via an onboard RS485 communication port or via the external
RS232/RS485communication ports on CM-RS232-485 communication module . It is possible to connect up
to three Remote displays to one Master controller, but each one needs to be using different communication
interface. Connecting two or more remote displays to one communication line (e.g. RS485) is not possible.
Using one Remote display it is possible to monitor only one Master controller at the time.
Note: IL4 AMF8 and AMF9 do not have an onboard RS485 comm port.

5.4.4 Interconnection variants

RS232

It is necessary to use CM-RS232-485 communication module on both the Master controller and the Remote
display. COM 1 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 1 Mode: Direct
COM 1 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 10 m for RS-232 connection. It is
recommended to use standard Null modem cable (crossover cable), although three wire (TxD, RxD, GND)
RS-232 connection is sufficient for communication.

RS485

Any combination of internal RS485 port or external one on CM-RS232-485 communication module can be
used for the Master and Remote Displays.
COM 2 communication channel is used with these settings:
COM 2 Mode: Direct
COM 2 Communication Speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller Address: 1 – 32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 1200 m for RS485 connection. It is
recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables that comply with the EIA RS-485 standard to reduce
interference and to achieve maximal distance.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 80

 Onboard RS485
The remote display can be connected by onboard RS485 communication port on both the Master controller
and CM-RS232-485 Remote Display or a combination of these.
RS485 Mode: Direct
RS485 Communication speed: 57600 or 115200 bps
Controller address: 1-32
The maximal distance between Master controller and Remote display is 1200 m for RS485 connection. It is
recommended to use shielded twisted-pair cables that comply with the EIA RS-485 standard to reduce
interference and to achieve maximal distance.

RS232 + RS485
Master Controller with Two Remote Displays
It is possible to combine two of the previous methods of interconnection and connect two Remote display to
one Master controller concurrently. All parameters and settings are the same as mentioned above.
Note: Onboard RS485 and CM-232-485 communication module can be used to achieve both remote
displays being connected via RS485 for IL4 MRS16 and IL4 AMF25.

Note: IL4 AMF8, IL4 AMF9 and IL4 AMF20 as master controller can only have up to two remote displays at
the same time and will need to use RS232 combined with RS485.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 81

 Master Controller with Three Remote Displays
It is possible to combine all of the previous methods of interconnection and connect three Remote display to
one Master controller concurrently. All parameters and settings are the same as mentioned above.
Note: This is only possible if IL4 MRS16 or IL4 AMF25 is the master controller.

5.4.5 Connection process

After powering up, the Remote Display automatically tries to connect to the last known Master controller (if
such configuration exists in Remote display). Otherwise the Remote display searches for any Master
controller connected. It starts to search on internal RS485 line using Master controller address 1 – 32 and
continues with COM 2 (RS485) and COM 1 (RS232). The Remote Display tries two communication speeds
57600 bps and 115200 bps.
During this autodetection process the message "Trying to connect" is displayed on screen. This process
takes approx. one minute.
When an incompatible configuration type is found in a detected controller, the message "Unknown cfg format
COM x Addr yy" is displayed on screen for 5 seconds. Detecting continues with the next address in the range.
If detecting finishes with no compatible Master controller found, the message "No connection" is displayed on
screen for 5 seconds. The detecting process starts from the beginning and continues until compatible a
Master controller is found.
Unsupported types of controllers or controllers that are not properly communicating are skipped during the
search.

5.4.6 Connection troubleshooting

There are a few reasons why the Remote display may not connect to the Master controller:
An unsupported type of Master controller connected.
Unsupported firmware in Master controller.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 82

 Configuration table error in Master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Mode in master controller.
Wrong settings of setpoint COM x Communication Speed in master controller.
Wrong connection, wiring, or communication failure.

5.4.7 Function description

Remote display software works as "remote display and control" for the Master controller. Gen-set can be
controlled using the Remote display and the Master controller simultaneously and independently. All Remote
display screens (Information screens, Measurement screens, Setpoint screens and History Log) display the
same data as the Master controller. The front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All remote
display LEDs show the same state as corresponding LEDs on Master controller. User can switch screens,
enter or set password, adjust setpoints, change language, change Configuration Level, change display
contrast and view history records. Remote display also mirrors state of master’s binary outputs. When binary
output of master controller is active, also appropriate binary output of remote display is active. It is not
possible to configure logical binary output functions on remote display’s binary outputs.
Note: It is recommended to use the same type and model of controller for Master and for Remote display.
Only in such case is assured the proper function of all buttons, LED diodes and display.

Example: When AMF controller HW type is used as a Master controller and MRS controller HW type is
used for Remote display there is no possibility to control MCB in MAN mode as there is no MCB button on
the MRS controller. Even though all these not recommended combinations may work, all of the limitations
above must be considered.

Master device is always able to function without a connected Remote display. Disconnecting of the serial line
between the Master controller and Remote display has no effect on the Master controller.
When the serial line between the Master controller and Remote display is disconnected, or communication
cannot be established, Remote display shows its own Init screen with the message "Trying to connect" and all
LEDs are off.
Once the Remote display finds compatible Master controller it shows message "Cfg processing" and
downloads configuration table from master controller. After the configuration from Master controller is
downloaded and the Remote display is reinitiated, jump to master controller's Main measurement screen and
regular operation is started.
It is possible to switch to Remote display's own Init screen to check IL4-RD FW version and serial number of
used controller and communication status by pressing and holding the Page button for more than 3 seconds.

5.4.8 Firmware compatibility

Remote Display
IL4-RD FW is able to be uploaded into the following controllers:
InteliLite 4 AMF25
InteliLite 4 AMF20
InteliLite 4 AMF9
InteliLite 4 AMF8
InteliLite 4 MRS16

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 83

 Note: All controllers from IL4 family can act as Remote Display of master controller and will always be
compatible with each other.

Note: If IL4 MRS16 is used as a Remote Display in AMF application, the user won't be able to see
information about mains status and there will be no option to control MCB.

Note: It is not possible to use controllers from InteliGen4 200 and InteliATS 2 families as remote display.

Master controllers
Supported master controllers:
InteliLite4 family
InteliGen4 200 family
InteliATS 2 family

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 84

5.5 Functions
5.5.1 Additional running engine indications 86
5.5.2 After-treatment Support 86
5.5.3 Alternate configuration 91
5.5.4 Analog switches 92
5.5.5 Breaker control 92
5.5.6 Connecting to load 95
5.5.7 Dual Operation 95
5.5.8 Dummy Load 98
5.5.9 E-Stop 98
5.5.10 ECU Frequency selection 99
5.5.11 Engine cool down and stop 100
5.5.12 Engine start 100
5.5.13 Exercise timers 105
5.5.14 Extended features 112
5.5.15 Firewall 112
5.5.16 Gen-set operation states 113
5.5.17 Geo-fencing 115
5.5.18 History log 116
5.5.19 Hybrid application 117
5.5.20 Load shedding 121
5.5.21 Maintenance Timers 122
5.5.22 Modbus Client (Master) 123
5.5.23 MRS operation 126
5.5.24 Multi ECU 127
5.5.25 Operating Modes 128
5.5.26 PLC 129
5.5.27 Power formats and units 135
5.5.28 Protections 135
5.5.29 Pulse Counters 148
5.5.30 Rental Timers 148
5.5.31 RPM Measurement 149
5.5.32 Sensor curves 149
5.5.33 Stabilization 151
5.5.34 Start-stop sequence 152
5.5.35 Universal hours counter 153
5.5.36 USB host 154
5.5.37 User Buttons 158
5.5.38 User setpoints 160
5.5.39 User texts 161
5.5.40 Voltage phase sequence detection 161

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 85

5.5.1 Additional running engine indications
It is helpful to have information other than speed (RPM), whether the engine is rotating or not, especially if
RPM is measured from the generator frequency instead of magnetic pickup. The generator frequency
measurement can be unreliable at very low speeds and/or may have a delayed reaction to sudden and big
changes (i.e. in the moment that the engine has just started…).
The following conditions are evaluated as additional running engine indication:
Voltage on the D+ input is higher than the D+ Threshold (page 249) of battery voltage. Connect this input
to the D+ (L) terminal of the charging alternator and enable the D+ function by the setpoint D+ Threshold
(page 249). If D+ terminal is not available, leave the input unconnected and disable the function.
The pickup is not used and frequency is not detected on the pickup input. Connect the pickup input to the
W terminal of the charging alternator if you do not use pickup and the W terminal is available. If not, leave
the input unconnected.
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 234) setpoint. The oil pressure is evaluated from the analog
input or from the ECU if an ECU is configured.
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 623) is in logical 0.
At least one phase of generator voltage is >25 % of nominal voltage.
These signals are used during start for powering down the starter motor even if no RPM is measured. These
signals are used during stop in order to evaluate if the engine has really stopped.

5.5.2 After-treatment Support

Afer-treatment support generally provides monitoring and control of the after-treatment system installed on
generators engine. The requirements are defined as:
Providing After-Treatment status information by
Displaying universal lamps (icons)
Displaying analog and binary values
Control of After-Treatment regeneration function by
Transmitting commands to the ECU

Providing After-treatment status information

After-Treatment screen
This screen is shown with configured ECU which supports Tier 4 Final / Stage V. The After-Treatment screen
is automatically shown, once any of the selected lamps gets active or change status. Deactivation of the lamp
will not trigger showing the screen. The screen is then shown until the operator switches it to another one.
Alarm list screen has lower priority so even if a new alarm appears, the After-treatment screen is still
displayed. To avoid displaying a blank screen, inactive lamps are represented by "dotted" icons. For no active
lamp the screen shows all dotted icons. Please see examples below:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 86

 Image 5.15 Example of active After-treatment screen

Image 5.16 Example of inactive After-treatment screen

Universal lamps (icons)

Universal lamp icons are shown on the After-Treatment screen. Based on specific value read in specific
frame with specific SPN, every lamp icon is either:
shown
hidden
blinking slow (1 Hz)
blinking fast (2 Hz)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 87

 Inactive
Lamp name Active icon Alarm LBO LBI
icon
ECU YELLOW LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 616)
ECU YELLOW LAMP
ECU Yellow Wrn ECU Yellow ECU YELLOW
FAST BLINK (PAGE
Lamp Lamp (page 726) LAMP (PAGE 648)
617)
ECU YELLOW LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 617)
ECU RED LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 615)
ECU Red Wrn ECU Red ECU RED LAMP ECU RED LAMP FAST
Lamp Lamp (page 726) (PAGE 647) BLINK (PAGE 615)
ECU RED LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 615)
ECU WAIT TO START
BLINK (PAGE 616)
ECU WAIT TO ECU WAIT TO START
ECU Wait To Wrn ECU Wait To
START (PAGE FAST BLINK (PAGE
Start Start (page 727)
648) 616)
ECU WAIT TO START
SOLID (PAGE 616)
ATT DPF LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 608)
ATT DPF Wrn ATT DPF ATT DPF LAMP ATT DPF LAMP FAST
Lamp Lamp (page 727) (PAGE 640) BLINK (PAGE 608)
ATT DPF LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 608)
ATT HEST LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 609)
ATT HEST LAMP
ATT HEST Wrn ATT HEST ATT HEST LAMP
FAST BLINK (PAGE
Lamp Lamp (page 727) (PAGE 640)
609)
ATT HEST LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 610)
ATT SCR ERROR
LAMP BLINK (PAGE
Wrn ATT SCR ATT SCR 611)
ATT SCR
Error Lamp (page ERROR LAMP ATT SCR ERROR
Error Lamp
727) (PAGE 640) LAMP FAST BLINK
(PAGE 611)
ATT SCR ERROR

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 88

 Inactive
Lamp name Active icon Alarm LBO LBI
icon
LAMP SOLID (PAGE
611)
ATT DEF LEVEL
LAMP BLINK (PAGE
607)
Wrn ATT DEF ATT DEF LEVEL
ATT DEF ATT DEF LEVEL
Level Lamp (page LAMP FAST BLINK
Level Lamp LAMP (PAGE 640)
727) (PAGE 608)
ATT DEF LEVEL
LAMP SOLID (PAGE
608)
ATT INHIBITED LAMP
BLINK (PAGE 610)
ATT Wrn ATT ATT INHIBITED LAMP
ATT INHIBITED
Inhibited Inhibited Lamp FAST BLINK (PAGE
LAMP (PAGE 640)
Lamp (page 728) 610)
ATT INHIBITED LAMP
SOLID (PAGE 610)

Note: Lamps can by disabled during prestart phase. Checkbox: Ignore ECU lamps during prestart is located
in InteliConfig -> Controller Configuration -> Modules -> ECU module -> Electronic control unit settings.

Note: Aftertreatment support can be disabled. Aftertreatment HMI Screen is hidden and alarms related to
aftertreatment are not shown. Use the checkbox: Disable aftertreatment support located in InteliConfig ->
Controller Configuration -> Modules -> ECU module -> Electronic control unit settings.

Changing behavior of Aftertreatment lamps using PLC

The behavior of lamps can be changed using PLC logic. For this reason there is group of LBI introduced
which directly controls each lamp state. These LBIs can be used for control of the lamps the way the user
wants. PLC Decomposer block should be used in a case the signal from ECU is analog one.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 89

 Example:

Image 5.17 The lamp state will be solid when signal is value 1, 2 = blink, 5 = blink fast

Control of After-Treatment regeneration function

Control of the non-mission regeneration is dependent on several conditions:
Controller is in MAN mode
State Running
ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 611) = 1 (if configured)
When these conditions are met, user can either switch LBI ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 611) which acts as
acknowledgment for the ECU that everything is prepared for the DPF regeneration, after that user can start
regeneration by closing LBI ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 609) or ATT FORCE REGEN ALT (PAGE 609). Some
ECUs however do not include LBI ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 611) and closing just LBI ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE
609) is enough to start the regeneration process.
The exact process and conditions for each particular engine should be studied carefully from the engine
documentation issued by the manufacturer.
User can force or inhibit regeneration process by activating appropriate binary inputs of the controller. Please
see the list of binary inputs below:
ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 609)
ATT FORCE REGEN ALT (PAGE 609)
ATT INHIBIT REGEN (PAGE 610)
ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 611)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 90

 Force regeneration by the user
User activatesATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 609) by pressing the push-button (generate pulse) to force start of
the automatic regeneration process. Controller immediately change (and holds for 5 seconds) the data part of
the message transmitted to the ECU (SPN 3696) This will generate signal like 5sec pulse command for the
ECU. If input signal is held more than 5 seconds, the output will continue to generate signal as well.
Force regeneration by the user (alternative)
User activatesATT FORCE REGEN ALT (PAGE 609) by by pressing the push-button (generate pulse) to force
start of the automatic regeneration process. Controller immediately change (and holds for 5 seconds) the
data part of the message transmitted to the ECU (SPN 3696) This will generate signal like 5sec pulse
command for the ECU. If input signal is held more than 5 seconds, the output will continue to generate signal
as well.
During this type of regeneration, protections for overvoltage and overfrequency are deactivated. Overspeed
protection level is increased according to setpoint DPF Regeneration RPM (page 246). GCB is prohibited to
close and alarm DPF Regen with protections off is active.
User can also inhibit regeneration process by:
By doing so, the process of regeneration will be postponed until user switches the LBI back to open position.
The Regeneration Inhibit lamp should be usually on solid when the LBI is closed. If the LBI is closed during
regeneration, the process stops and it will have to start over if the ECU allows it.

5.5.3 Alternate configuration

There are 3 sets of alternate configurations in a controller:

Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3

Nominal Power Split Phase 1 Nominal Power Split Phase 2 Nominal Power Split Phase 3
(page 531) (page 536) (page 541)
Nominal Power 1 (page 530) Nominal Power 2 (page 535) Nominal Power 3 (page 540)
Nominal RPM 1 (page 526) Nominal RPM 2 (page 531) Nominal RPM 3 (page 536)
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 527) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 532) Nominal Frequency 3 (page 537)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page
527) 532) 537)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page
527) 532) 537)
Nominal Current 1 (page 528) Nominal Current 2 (page 533) Nominal Current 3 (page 538)
Connection Type 1 (page 528) Connection type 2 (page 533) Connection type 3 (page 538)
ECU Speed Adjustment 1 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 2 (page ECU Speed Adjustment 3 (page
530) 535) 540)

Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary inputs ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) and ALTERNATE
CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607). Configuration set 1 is active when there is no input activated. In the case that the inputs
ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) and ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) are active at the same time,
configuration set 3 is taken in account.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 91

 ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) Active configuration set
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 3

IMPORTANT: Gen-set can not switch to the alternative setpoints when running.

5.5.4 Analog switches

There are logical analog function dedicated for analog switches. Each analog switch has setpoints for level
ON and level OFF and logical binary output.

Analog switch Setpoints Binary output

AIN Switch01 On (page 319)
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 685) AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 635)
AIN Switch01 Off (page 320)
AIN Switch02 On (page 321)
AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 685) AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 635)
AIN Switch02 Off (page 322)
AIN Switch03 On (page 323)
AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 685) AIN SWITCH03 (PAGE 636)
AIN Switch03 Off (page 324)
AIN Switch04 On (page 325)
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 686) AIN SWITCH04 (PAGE 636)
AIN Switch04 Off (page 326)

The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.

Image 5.18 Principle of analog switch

5.5.5 Breaker control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
The generator circuit breaker or contactor – GCB
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be followed to when designing the
wiring of power switches:
The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at
any time.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 92

 The breaker must respond within max. 5 seconds to a close and open command. Special attention should
be paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 5 seconds on some types. In
such cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast opening.
After opening the breaker, there is an internal delay before closing the breaker. Delay is 6 seconds –
5 seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again.
There is no delay when opening a breaker.

Breaker control outputs

An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested
Close/Open by the controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command,
otherwise an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 5 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The
ON coil
output is intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts
OFF coil until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5 seconds. The output is intended for
control of open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the Gen-set is running (not in idle or
cooling). The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the breaker has
UV coil
to be switched off. The output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit
breakers.

Image 5.19 Breaker control outputs

Breaker failure detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 93

 IMPORTANT: If a breaker feedback is configured, it will be required all the time. Otherwise alarms
will be issued.

IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is no check
of breaker real state.

There are three different time delays for breaker failure detection – see following diagrams.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker
failure is detected immediately (no delay).

Image 5.20 Breaker failure – breaker close/open in steady position – open

Image 5.21 Breaker failure – breaker close/open in steady position – close

When binary output breaker close/open opens there is 5 sec delay for breaker failure detection.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 94

 Image 5.22 Breaker failure – breaker close/open opens

When binary output breaker close/open closes there is 5 sec delay for breaker failure detection.

Image 5.23 Breaker failure – breaker close/open closes

5.5.6 Connecting to load

When the Stabilization (page 151) phase is finished, the Gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the Gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUTO mode) or manually
by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
The Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 243) timer has elapsed.
The Gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.

5.5.7 Dual Operation

Dual operation – MRS
Dual operation MRS consists of 2 Gen-sets. The principle of dual operation is in switching the Gen-sets in
supplying of load when REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) is activated on Master controller (on slave controller
this LBI has no function in Dual Operation). Each controller measures its Gen-set. Interlock between all
breakers (GCB1 and GCB2) is required. If there is failure of one Gen-set, the second Gen-set will take the
load.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 95

 IMPORTANT: Dual operation works only in AUTO mode.

IMPORTANT: Dual operation is in fail also during process of adjustment of setpoints.

IMPORTANT: It is not possible to use Auto Run option in Exercise timers with dual operation.

Start/stop events
Event Dual MRS
LBI REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) Evaluated by Master only

Communication
Communication can be established via onboard RS485 or via communication module CM-RS232-485.
Communication line is selected via setpoints RS485 Mode (page 228) (RS485 onboard), COM1 Mode
(page 471) or COM2 Mode (page 473) (CM-RS232-485 module). There are options for DualMaster and
DualSlave. These options adjust, which communication line is selected and which role the controller has in
Dual Operation.
IMPORTANT: For correct communication it is necessary to have one Master and one Slave
controller on the same communication line.

In case of communication failure between controllers, alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 729) is
activated. This alarm is activated on both controllers. Both controllers are switched to normal operation.

Adjustment of COM Modes

COM COM
Mode/RS485 Mode/RS485 Behavior
in controller 1 in controller 2
Master Slave OK – normal dual operation function
Slave Master OK – normal dual operation function
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active
Master Master alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 729). This alarm will be
active on both controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active
Slave Slave alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 729). This alarm will be
active on both controllers. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 96

 COM COM
Mode/RS485 Mode/RS485 Behavior
in controller 1 in controller 2
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active
Disabled Master/Slave alarm AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 729). This alarm will be
active on master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to
normal operation.
There will be communication fail (it is necessary to have master and
slave to establish communication line) – there will be active alarm
Master/Slave Disabled AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 729). This alarm will be active on
master/slave controller. Both controllers will be switched to normal
operation.
Disabled Disabled Both controllers are in normal operation.

Switching of Gen-sets
Switching of Gen-sets is based on their Running Hours (page 574). The time that the Gen-set runs is
adjusted via setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 295). When difference of Running Hours
(page 574) between Gen-sets is bigger than value adjusted in this setpoint, load is transferred from first Gen-
set to second Gen-set. First Gen-set is supplying the load until second Gen-set is in running state. Then the
GCB of first Gen-set is opened. From this moment timer Transfer Delay (page 297) counts down. When it
counts down, GCB of second Gen-set can be closed.
Note: Value of Running Hours (page 574) can be modified by setpoint Running Hours Base (page 295).
This setpoint can add or remove additional running hours to value from statistics. This modified value of
running hours is used in dual operation function.

Note: In case that both Gen-sets have the same running hours, Master controller has higher priority.

Note: Switching of Gen-sets can be inhibit by setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 296) or by binary input DUAL
SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 613).

Note: Priority of Gen-set can be changed by binary input DUAL TOP PRIORITY (PAGE 614). In this case
running hours values are not used to decide, which Gen-set should start.

Dual operation adjustment

Prepare two InteliLite 4 MRS 16 controllers. CM-RS232-485 module is optional.
Adjust setpoints RS485 Mode (page 228) or COM1 Mode (page 471) or COM2 Mode (page 473)
(depending on preferred communication line) to DualMaster on first controller and Dual Slave on second
controller
Copy the identical configurations to both of them
Use wiring with mechanical/electrical interlock between all breakers (mechanical interlock is preferred)
Switch both controllers to OFF mode to prevent automatic or remote start
Interconnect communication terminals on CM-RS232-485 modules
Adjust setpoint Running Hours Max Difference (page 295) on Master controller

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 97

 Adjust setpoints Running Hours Base (page 295) on both controllers if running hours change is needed
for dual operation
Adjust additional function of dual operation – Master Error Protection (page 296), Slave Error
Protection (page 297) and Swap Gen-sets (page 296) setpoints
Change the mode of both controllers to AUTO
System is now ready for dual operation function

Note: Breakers feedbacks are recommended, but not required.

Alarms related to dual operation:

AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 729)
Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail (page 729)
Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail (page 730)
ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version (page 729)

5.5.8 Dummy Load

This function is meant to prevent engine from running without load, which can in some cases shorten engine
lifespan. It is a way user can set when to load external power bank and when to unload it.
This function can only be active if the setpoint Dummy Load Active (page 301) is set to Gen Only value and
Engine State is loaded (GCB feedback is active if configured). Dummy Load function is triggered when the
conditions mentioned before are met and Generator power is bellow Dummy Load On (page 301) setpoint
level, or above Dummy Load Off (page 302) level.
Controller supports up to 5 Dummy Load stages. When the function is enabled, controller will always use all
the dummy load stages up to the highest one configured. User can configure any number of these either in
PLC or as LBO, but if just Dummy Load Stage 1 and Dummy Load Stage 5 are configured, Dummy Load On
Delay (page 302) will trigger five times anyway when going from Dummy Load Stage 1 to Dummy Load
Stage 5. Whenever controller checks conditions and Dummy Load function is triggered, it will do the following
(depending on the power level):
Power is bellow level set by Dummy Load On (page 301) – in this case controller will wait for a period of
time specified in Dummy Load On Delay (page 302) before activating DUMMY LOAD STAGE 1 (PAGE
644) LBO if no Dummy Load was active before. Otherwise the original outputs will stay on and controller
will activate next stage of Dummy Load.
Power is above level set by Dummy Load Off (page 302) – in this case controller will wait for time set by
setpoint Dummy Load Off Delay (page 302) before deactivating the highest active stage of Dummy
Load. If no Dummy Load outputs are active, nothing will happen.
IMPORTANT: Check how big your load bank is and set the Dummy Load On (page 301) and
Dummy Load Off (page 302) setpoints to correct levels, so that when dummy load is activated ,
power will not immediately go over the Dummy Load Off (page 302).

5.5.9 E-Stop
Binary outputs for the control of some essential functions are internally wired as "safe", meaning that their
deactivation is directly bound with the dedicated Input E-STOP (not evaluated as the LBI in the controller).
These BO are fully configurable and are used e.g. for the Starter and Fuel control.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 98

 The emergency stop circuit must be secured.
The power supply of the associated binary outputs (BOUT1 and BOUT2) is supplied by the E-STOP input,
not by the + battery voltage.
Note: There is no difference in the way of configuration of all binary outputs. Binary outputs BO1 (Starter),
BO2 (Fuel Solenoid) are intended for these functions (not dedicated).

There is a measurement of E-STOP input voltage analogically and setting the binary value (representing
emergency stop input level) based on comparison of the measured voltage to two analog levels, which are
derived from the controller supply voltage (battery voltage) perceptually.

Image 5.24 SW principle of E-STOP

If the input voltage of E-stop is higher than high comparison level (ex. higher than 80% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is not activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is lower than low comparison level (ex. lower than 60% of the supply voltage),
then E-stop is activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is located somewhere between low and high comparison levels (ex. between 60
and 80 %of the supply voltage, then E-stop binary value will remain in its previous state (meaning the E-Stop
binary value will not change).
Visualization on CU screen
1 – E-STOP has voltage – state is OK
0 – E-STOP has no voltage – protection is active
For more information about connection see E-Stop on page 43.

5.5.10 ECU Frequency selection

Value Ecu freq select is calculated from Nominal Frequency (page 216) setpoint. The sequence for
frequency change is executed automatically (engine must be in still condition) in the following steps:
1. Starting of the engine is blocked (state: Not Ready)
2. LBO: ECU Power relay is activated
3. Wait 5 s
4. LBO: Stop Pulse is set for 1 s (standard Stop Pulse duration)
5. Wait 3 s
6. Frequency selection is changed to a new value
7. Wait 2 s

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 99

 8. LBO: Stop Pulse is set for 1 s (standard Stop Pulse duration)
9. Wait 2 s
10. LBO: ECU Power relay is deactivated
11. Return from start blocking state

5.5.11 Engine cool down and stop

The cool down phase begins after the stop command has been issued and the GCB has been opened.
Duration of the cool down phase is determined by the setpoint Cooling Time (page 247).
Cooling is performed either at nominal speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are evaluated)
or at idle speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are not evaluated). Selection of the speed is
done by the setpoint Cooling Speed (page 246).
The cool down can be finished manually in MAN mode by pressing the STOP button.
If a new start request comes, the cool down will be interrupted and the Gen-set will go back to the
stabilization phase. If the cooling was at nominal speed, the stabilization timers will not count down again
so the GCB is ready to be closed (after 2s delay).
When the cool down is finished, the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) is de-energized and STOP SOLENOID
(PAGE 677) is energized. The engine will stop within the time period determined by the setpoint Stop Time
(page 247). If the engine does not stop within this time, the alarm Wrn Stop Fail (page 731) will be issued.
The output STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 677) is energized until the engine is stopped, but at least for the duration of
Stop Time (page 247). If the Stop Time (page 247) has elapsed and the engine has still not stopped, the
STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 677) is de-energized for 5 s and then energized again for Stop Time (page 247).This
is repeated until the engine is stopped.
The output Ignition (page 663) is continuously energized until the engine is stopped.

Stopped Gen-set evaluation

The Gen-set is considered as stopped when all of following conditions are valid:
The engine speed is lower than 2 RPM.
The generator voltage in all phases is lower than 10 V.
None of the Additional running engine indications (page 86) signals is active.

5.5.12 Engine start

Diesel engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 230) must be switched to the Diesel position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing the Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is
fulfilled in AUTO mode), PRESTART (PAGE 669) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 660) outputs are energized for a
time period established by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 233) and Glow Plugs Time (page 234).
After Prestart Time (page 233) and Glow Plugs Time (page 234), the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
654) is energized after Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 241) the motor starter is activated by energizing the
output STARTER 1 (PAGE 675).
When one or more of following conditions is met, the starter output is de-energized:
The engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page 233), or
One of the Additional running engine indications (page 86) signals is active.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 100

 The controller remains in the Starting phase until the engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 233), after which it is considered started and the Idle period will follow.
The maximum duration that the output STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 232). If the engine does not start within this period, the output STARTER
1 (PAGE 675) is de-energized and a pause with a length determined by Cranking Fail Pause (page 232)
will follow. PRESTART (PAGE 669) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 660) outputs are active during the pause. After
the pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the
setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 231).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
241).
After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 151) phase follows.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 101

 Image 5.25 Flowchart of start of diesel engine

GAS engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 230) must be switched to the Gas position.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 102

 After the command for start is issued (pressing the Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is
fulfilled in AUTO mode), PRESTART (PAGE 669) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 660) outputs are energized for a
time period established by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 233) and Glow Plugs Time (page 234)
begins.
After Prestart Time (page 233) and Glow Plugs Time (page 234), the countdown of Sd Ventilation
Time (page 245)
After Sd Ventilation Time (page 245), the engine starter is activated by energizing the output STARTER 1
(PAGE 675).
When the engine speed exceeds 30 RPM, the outputs FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) and IGNITION (PAGE
663) are energized.
When the engine speed exceeds value of Starting RPM (page 233), the engine starter is de-energized.
The engine is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
IMPORTANT: Additional running engine indications (page 86) signals are not evaluated during
the start of a gas engine. The Pickup must be used in any case!

The maximum duration that the output STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 232). If the engine does not start within this period, outputs STARTER 1
(PAGE 675) and FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) are de-energized and a pause with length determined by
Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) will follow. PRESTART (PAGE 669), GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 660) and
IGNITION (PAGE 663) outputs are active during the pause. After the pause has elapsed, the next start
attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint Cranking Attempts (page
231).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
241).
After the idle period has finished, the output DESCRIPTION (PAGE 663) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 151) phase follows.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 103

 Image 5.26 Flowchart of start of gas engine

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 104

 Dual Starter
Dual Starter function is enabled if LBO STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) is configured and Setpoint Dual Starter
Sequence (page 231) is set to any of sequence options: 1-2 or 11-22 or 111-222.
Dual Starter Sequence options:
Disabled (Default)
1-2: (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 676)
according to the order of option pattern 1-2.
11-22: (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then
STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) according to the order of option pattern 11-22.
111-222: (Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then STARTER 1 (PAGE 675)
then STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) then STARTER 2
(PAGE 676) according to the order of option pattern 111-222.
The total number of attempts is defined by the Setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 231).
Example:
Cranking Attempts=5, Dual Starter Sequence =1-2
Gen-set will activate Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter 1 (if failed) then
Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter 1
Cranking Attempts=5, Dual Starter Sequence =11-22
Gen-set will activate Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 1 (if failed) then Starter 2 (if failed) then
Starter 2 (if failed) then Starter 1

The order of sequence is affected by the actual status of LBI STARTER PRIORITY (PAGE 628) (0-Starter 1, 1-
Starter 2). Can be used for disabling a particular starter.
LBIs STARTER 1 DISABLED (PAGE 628), STARTER 2 DISABLED (PAGE 628). If the LBI Starter 1,2 Disabled state
is 1 then the Starter 1 ,2 will be skipped in the sequence. Skipped starter is not counted as cranking attempt.
In case both starters are disabled, controller is in the state not ready.
Value Num Starts (page 573) stores the total successful starts of both starters.

5.5.13 Exercise timers

The exercise (general-purpose) timers in controller are intended for scheduling of any operations such as
periodic tests of the Gen-set.
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 333) Timer 1 Day (page 337)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 337)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 337)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 335) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 338)
Timer 1 Duration (page 335) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 336) Timer 1 Weekends (page 340)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 336) Timer 1 Setup (page 334)

There are up to 16 Timers available in the InteliLite 4. For more information see Group: Scheduler on page
326.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 105

 Available modes of each timer:
This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for
Once
preset duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and
Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer
can be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the
period period.

Once mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1
Setup.
Note: First, the timer functions must be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333).

Image 5.27 Once mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the
duration of timer.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 106

 Set-up via controller interface
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 333)
setpoint. Then go to Timer 1 Setup and press the Enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) setpoint
select Once mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page
335) and Timer 1 Duration (page 335).
Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Daily mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1
Setup.
Note: First, the timer functions must be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333).

Image 5.28 Daily mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the xth day of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339)) and behavior of timer on weekends (Timer 1 Weekends (page 340)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be activated again every 3rd day at 12:00 for 1 hour including weekends.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 333)
setpoint. Then go to Timer 1 Setup and press the Enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) setpoint
select Repeated mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334), Timer 1 First Occur. Time
(page 335) and Timer 1 Duration (page 335). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 336) select Daily and

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 107

 adjust Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339) (xth day of repetition) and Timer 1 Weekends (page 340)
(behavior of timer on weekends).
Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Weekly mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1
Setup.
Note: First, the timer functions must be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333).

Image 5.29 Weekly mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the xth week of
repetition (Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339)) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page
337)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 333)
setpoint. Then go to Timer 1 Setup and press the Enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) setpoint
select Repeated mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334), Timer 1 First Occur. Time
(page 335) and Timer 1 Duration (page 335). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 336) select Weekly and
adjust Timer 1 Day (page 337) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339)
(xth week of repetition).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 108

 Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

Monthly mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1
Setup.
Note: First, the timer functions must be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333).

There are two types of monthly repetition. The first is based on repeating one day in month.

Image 5.30 Monthly mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the type of monthly
repetition and the xth day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 337)). Than select the xth
month of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be activated again every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 109

 Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.

Image 5.31 Monthly mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the type of monthly
repetition, the xth week of repetition and days in week. Than select the xth month of repetition.
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be activated again every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

There are two types of monthly repetition. The first is based on repeating one day in month.
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 333)
setpoint. Then go to Timer 1 Setup and press the Enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) setpoint
select Repeated mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334), Timer 1 First Occur. Time
(page 335) and Timer 1 Duration (page 335). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 336) select Monthly and
adjust type of monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 336), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339)
(xth month of repetition) and Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 337) (concrete day in repeated months).
The second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating on certain days of the week in a month.
In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 333)
setpoint. Then go to Timer 1 Setup and press the Enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) setpoint
select Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334), Timer 1 First Occur. Time
(page 335) and Timer 1 Duration (page 335). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 336) select Monthly and
adjust type of monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 336), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339)
(xth month of repetition), Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 337) (days in week when timer is active)
and Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 338) (concrete week in repeated months).
Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 110

 Short period mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1
Setup.
Note: First, the timer functions must be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333).

Image 5.32 Short period mode – InteliConfig

In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of
first occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Then select the interval of
repetition (shorter than 1 day).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be activated again every 4th hour for 1 hour.

Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 333)
setpoint. Then go to Timer 1 Setup and press the Enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) setpoint
select Repeated mode. Then adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334), Timer 1 First Occur. Time
(page 335) and Timer 1 Duration (page 335). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 336), select Short
Period and adjust Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339) (interval of repetition).
Note: Use the Left and the Right buttons to move between timer setpoints.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 111

5.5.14 Extended features
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

A controller offers the possibility to extend its functionality by activating Extended features.
Hybrid applications: Modbus Client supported - see Modbus Client (Master) on page 123
Once the correct SW key is inserted, it is protected against rewriting during configuration update.
Note: Each SW Key is unique and valid only for the specific serial number of a controller.

1. Get your SW Key from the Comap website

2. Insert your SW Key into the setpoint SW Key (page 224).
3. Restart the controller.
Note: If the controller after restart remains in the init state, the inserted SW Key is not correct.

List of SW key features

Extended feature Order code
Modbus Client SKMODCLI03

5.5.15 Firewall
The firewall function allows to restrict the access to the controller application services (ComAp/TCP server,
MODBUS/TCP server etc.) or to the specific computers or networks. Firewall can be activated on Ethernet port.
Example:
Adress: [Link]
Netmask: [Link]
Port: 23
Any computer with IP address from the network range [Link] – [Link] can connect to
ComAp/TCP server (= connect to the controller with InteliConfig via Ethernet).

Example:
Adress: [Link]
Netmask: [Link]
Port: 502
Only the single computer with IP address [Link] can connect to MODBUS/TCP server

IMPORTANT: When enabling the firewall, If the rules are not set up properly and the connection is
made remotely, loss of connection can happen.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 112

5.5.16 Gen-set operation states
Engine state machine

Autotest during controller power on.

Note: Sometimes controller stays in Init mode after FW upgrade. It means that there
Init
are new parameters which should be checked by user. It is possible to disable this
control via InteliConfig.
Gen-set is not ready to start.
Not ready
Example: When shutdown alarm is active or unit is in OFF mode.
Ready Gen-set is ready to run.
Prestart sequence in process, PRESTART (PAGE 669) output is active.
Prestart
Example: Usually used for preheating or processes executed prior Gen-set start.
Cranking Engine is cranking, STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) or STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) output is active.
Pause Pause between start attempts.
Starting Starting speed is reached and the Idle timer is running.
Running Gen-set is running at nominal speed.
Loaded Gen-set is running at nominal speed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 656) is active.
Cooling Gen-set is cooling before stop.
Stop.
Stop
Example: Automatic or manual stop command was issued, engine is stopping.
Shutdown Shut-down alarm activated.
Gas engine - ventilation of unburned fuel when stop command comes during
Ventil
cranking with gas
Gas engine - ventilation of unburned fuel after unsuccessful start attempt or after
SDVentil
shutdown stop.
EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 617) Gen-set operation.
Example: Used for bypass the controller and engine manual start.
EmergMan
Controller mode, where the LBI EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 617) is activated. All control
functions are stopped

Engine started conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 233) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 234) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 623) is in logical 0 or
D+ terminal active (reached D+ Threshold (page 249) of supply voltage) for minimum 1 s or
Generator voltage > 25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 212)
(any phase)
Note: Any of these condition will disconnect starter of the engine, however for transition to next state RPM
needs to be higher than Starting RPM (page 233).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 113

 Engine running conditions
Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 233) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 234) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 623) is in logical 0 or
Generator voltage > 25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212)

Still engine conditions

Engine speed (RPM) < Starting RPM (page 233) and
Oil pressure < Starting Oil Pressure (page 234) and
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 623) is in logical 1 and
Generator voltage < 50 V (all phases)

Note: When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2 s delay is
necessary to confirm "still engine".

When any engine running conditions are observed in still engine, then the Wrn Stop Fail (page 731) is
activated with the following delays:
For generator voltage from 10 V to < 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For generator voltage > 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200 ms
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 234), Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 623) is in logical 0, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
For detected RPM, there is no delay.

Stop engine conditions

If no engine running conditions are validated, then the controller will wait extra 12 s before leaving the
Machine Stop state and releasing the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 677) output.

Image 5.33 Engine stops in Stop Time (page 247)

If the total stopping time will exceed setpoint Stop Time (page 247) then the Wrn Stop Fail (page 731) and
binary outputs for stopping are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 114

 Image 5.34 Engine stops after first Stop Time (page 247)

Electric state machine

IslOper Island operation

BrksOff GCB opened

5.5.17 Geo-fencing
Geo-fencing function (available with CM2-4G-GPS) is kind of protection that evaluates whether the actual
GPS location is within a predefined area, then based on this evaluation takes an action (sends SMS
message, stops engine, make history record etc.). This function is enabled by setpoint Geo-Fencing (page
465) or by logical binary input GEO-FENCING ENABLE (PAGE 621).
Using InteliConfig, it is possible to set two concentric geo-circles within which the unit is allowed to be located.
Each geo-circle is defined as a circular geographic area with its center (common for both geo-circles) named
Home Position. This point is adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 465) and Home Longitude (page
466) and radius named Fence Radius adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Radius (page 468) and Fence 2
Radius (page 470).
The Protection can be different for both circles and are adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Protection (page
467) and Fence 2 Protection (page 469).
It is also possible to see the current position of the controller in WebSupervisor map view.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 115

5.5.18 History log
The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records "snapshots" of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
The event which caused the record (e.g. "Overspeed alarm" or "GCB closed")
The date and time when it was recorded
All important data values such as RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.

Note: It is possible to clear history on users demand. To execute history log clearing, navigate to History
page in InteliConfig and select the option ClearHistory.

Record structure

Name Abbreviation Description

Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the previous
Number No.
one, etc.)
Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the gen-
Reason Reason
set
Time Time Time
Date Date Date
RPM RPM Engine rotations per minute
Power Pwr Generator active power
Reactive power Q Generator reactive power
Power Factor PF Generator power factor
Load Character LChr Generator load character
Generator
Gfrq Generator Frequency
Frequency
Generator Voltage Vg1 Generator voltage Ph1
Generator Voltage Vg2 Generator voltage Ph2
Generator Voltage Vg3 Generator voltage Ph3
Generator Voltage Vg12 Generator voltage Ph12
Generator Voltage Vg23 Generator voltage Ph23
Generator Voltage Vg31 Generator voltage Ph31
Generator Current Ig1 Generator current Ph1
Generator Current Ig2 Generator current Ph2
Generator Current Ig3 Generator current Ph3
Voltage Battery VBat Voltage of battery
Analog Input 1 Ain1 Analog input 1
Analog Input 2 Ain2 Analog input 2
Analog Input 3 Ain3 Analog input 3
Analog Input 4 Ain4 Analog input 4

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 116

 Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
E-Stop E-Stop State of dedicated E-Stop input
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Controller Mode Mode Controller mode

Note: When some setpoint is changed, its number of the communication object is written in the history log.

5.5.19 Hybrid application

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

InteliLite 4 controllers support hybrid applications featuring advanced monitoring of backup batteries and
photovoltaic (PV) systems. The functionality is beneficial e.g. for telecommunications and related fields. The
genset starting/stopping conditions are enhanced about the backup battery status – voltage, charging
current, state of charge, or overall capacity.
Battery status information and photovoltaic status information can be accurately measured through the DC
module (Inteli AIO9/1) or obtained from the rectifier or Battery Management System (BMS) via Modbus
communication, and properly connected with predefined LAI (logical analog inputs) within the configuration.
IMPORTANT: Value of AUX BATT CURRENT (PAGE 686) and evaluation of AUX battery state by
selected method are minimal requirements for hybrid applications.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 117

 Image 5.35 Example of hybrid application

Basic configuration of hybrid application

First of all it is necessary to configure which parts of hybrid system are available in application. There is a list
of setpoints:
AUX Battery Support (page 226)
PV Support (page 227)
BCB Control Mode (page 219)
PVCB Control Mode (page 220)
LCB Control Mode (page 219)

Starting and stopping conditions of genset

Starting and stopping of genset is evaluated from state of AUX battery. When AUX battery is discharged to
start level, genset is started and when AUX battery is charged to stop level, genset is stopped.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 118

 AMF Application
MAN Mode
Genset is started and stopped by start and stop buttons. There is no change from standard AMF application.
AUTO Mode
To start the genset, following conditions has to be fulfilled:
Mains fail occurs and
AUX Battery is discharged to start level
To stop genset, following condition has to be fulfilled:
AUX Battery is charged to stop level or
Mains is considered as healthy
TEST Mode
Genset is started and remains running until TEST mode is active. There is no change from standard AMF
application.

MRS Application
MAN Mode
Genset is started and stopped by start and stop buttons. There is no change from standard MRS application.
AUTO Mode
To start the genset, following condition has to be fulfilled:
AUX Battery is discharged to start level
To stop genset, following condition has to be fulfilled:
AUX Battery is charged to stop level

AUX battery management

Evaluation of AUX battery state
There are more ways how to obtain information about AUX battery. Supported ways are AUX Battery Voltage
and Current, State of Charge (SoC) of AUX battery or actual Capacity of AUX battery. However, only one of
these conditions can be used for starting and stopping of genset. This is adjusted in setpoint AUX Batt
Start/Stop Condition (page 282).
Voltage and Current
AUX Battery voltage and current can be used for evaluation of battery state. Decrease of AUX battery voltage
is used as condition for starting. When genset is started, controller evaluates charging current. Decrease of
this current is used as condition for stopping. Value of AUX battery current and voltage is taken from logical
analog inputs AUX BATT VOLTAGE (PAGE 687) and AUX BATT CURRENT (PAGE 686).
Following setpoints are important for this option:
AUX Batt Start Voltage (page 283)
AUX Batt Stop Current (page 283)
SoC
State of charge of AUX battery can be used for evaluation of battery state. Starting and stopping condition is
evaluated from actual value of SoC. Value of SoC is taken from logical analog input AUX BATT SOC (PAGE
686).
Following setpoints are important for this option:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 119

 AUX Batt Start SoC (page 285)
AUX Batt Stop SoC (page 285)
Capacity
Actual capacity of AUX battery can be used for evaluation of battery state. Starting and stopping condition is
evaluated from actual value of capacity. Value of AUX battery capacity is taken from logical analog input AUX
BATT CHARGE LEV (PAGE 686).
Following setpoints are important for this option:
AUX Batt Start Capacity (page 284)
AUX Batt Stop Capacity (page 284)

Max AUX Batt Charging Time (page 287) per one cycle and also AUX Batt Start Delay (page 286) and
AUX Batt Stop Delay (page 286) are common for all three methods of evaluation of AUX battery state.

Other functions
Full Charge Cycle
This is enhanced option for increasing the charging time for each n-th cycle to prolong the battery life.
Stopping limits of genset are increased for each n-th cycle. See setpoint Full Charge Cycle (page 287).
Example: AUX battery SoC is used for evaluation of AUX battery state. Stopping level of standard cycles
is 80%. For each n-th cycle, stopping level is increased to 100% to prolong battery life.

Cycle Limitation
This is enhanced option for limitation of the charging cycles for each day to prolong the battery life. User
adjusts maximal number of cycles. When this number is reached, genset is not stopped when battery is
charged to stop level. See setpoint Max AUX Batt Cycles Per Day (page 289).
Silent Hours
This is enhanced option for avoiding of the unwanted noise from running genset. Starting limits of genset are
decreased in adjusted period of day. See setpoint Silent Hours (page 290).
Example: AUX battery SoC is used for evaluation of AUX battery state. Starting level is 20%. During silent
hours, starting level is decreased to 15% to postpone start of genset.

Low AUX Batt Protection

This is function which safeguards the backup battery from the risk associated with deep discharging. This
function is connected to Battery circuit breaker trip protection - type of alarm which is designed to open BCB
(battery circuit breaker).
Note: This type of alarm can by used also for user protections.

Photovoltaic system, DC load and rectifier monitoring

PV, DC load and rectifier can by also monitored by controller. There are logical analog inputs for this purpose:
PV CURRENT (PAGE 689)
PV VOLTAGE (PAGE 689)
LOAD CURRENT (PAGE 688)
LOAD VOLTAGE (PAGE 688)
RECTIFIER CURRENT (PAGE 690)
RECTIFIER VOLTAGE (PAGE 690)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 120

 Actual values of these analog inputs are available in dedicated values in controller. These values can be used
also for user protections. PV circuit breaker trip alarm and load circuit breaker trip alarm are alarms designed
to open PVCB (PV circuit breaker) and LCB (load circuit breaker).

5.5.20 Load shedding

The Load shedding is the controlled disconnection of less important load groups (circuits) when the object
consumption is too high.

Load shedding stages

The Load Shedding function consists of 5 stages which are numbered 1-5. Stages are disconnected in
ascending order up to the last configured stage. Reconnecting of stages is in descending order and starts
with higher configured stage. A stage is considered configured when the respective Load Shedding Output is
configured. Highest activated load shedding stage is stored in value Load Shedding Status (page 576).

Load shedding outputs

Stage LBO
Stage 1 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE 666)
Stage 2 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 666)
Stage 3 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 3 (PAGE 667)
Stage 4 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 4 (PAGE 667)
Stage 5 LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 5 (PAGE 667)

How the Load shedding controls the Load shedding outputs

The load shedding function is active in all controller modes except OFF.
Load shedding has 5 steps and each step is linked with its own binary output, LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1 (PAGE
666), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 666), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 3 (PAGE 667), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 4
(PAGE 667) and LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 5 (PAGE 667).
The Load shedding outputs can be activated one by one in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. The conditions for activation
are defined by setpoints Load Shedding Level (page 298) and Load Shedding Delay (page 299).
The Load shedding outputs are deactivated one by one according to the conditions given by the setpoints
Load Reconnection Level (page 299), Load Reconnection Delay (page 300), AUTO LOAD
RECONNECTION (PAGE 300).
If manual reconnection of the load is desired the Auto Load Reconnection (page 300) setpoint must be
disabled and the MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 622) digital input must be configured.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 121

 Image 5.36 Load shedding

Image 5.37 Load reconnection

Image 5.38 Load manual reconnection

5.5.21 Maintenance Timers

Maintenance timer contains two types of timers – Maintenance Timer RunHours and Maintenance Timer
xy Interval.
Maintenance Timer RunHours is based on engine running hours and it only counts down when engine
is running. When engine runs value Maintenance Timer RunHours counts down, but setpoint
Maintenance Timer RunHours will not change.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 122

 Maintenance Timer Interval is set in months. Specific date is calculated as the setpoint is set. E.g. when
the timer is set to 6 months on June 10th, corresponding Maintenance Timer Interval value is set to the
number of days remaining to December 10th, the timer count down is done in days and alarm is issued on
December 10th. The setpoint value does not change, as the remaining days count down is done.
Timers can be reset by changing the corresponding setpoint value (it does not have to be a different value,
editing it and confirming original value is enough).
When either of the timers elapse, appropriate LBO Maintenance will be activated and stays active until
the timers are reset.
Note: For more information see Group: Maintenance Timers on page 261.

5.5.22 Modbus Client (Master)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

IMPORTANT: This is a premium function which requires SW Key in order to be used. Without SW
key, there are only 2 datapoints which can be read by controller. Please see Extended features
(page 112) chapter.

The Controller is equipped by the function of Modbus Client (Master). Actually it means that controller can
play the role of the device which initiate the modbus communication, i.e. controller can ask and command
other devices being in role of modbus server (slave). In standard terms role of modbus client (master) on
modbus TCP or RTU. The communication protocol with server device is a matter of configuration.

Modbus Client (Master) configuration step by step

Controller is able to communicate with up to 5 devices at one time. The modbus server device is configured
like the ECU module, it is part of Multi ECU configuration. Modbus server devices uses the same pool
(resources) for the inputs and outputs as standard ECUs.
The Modbus Client/Master function is conditioned by software license - SW Key which must be inserted in the
setpoint SW Key (page 224).

User defined Modbus Server Devices

Adding Modbus Server Device

Open the Controller Configuration in InteliConfig, go to section Modules, and click on Add New Module in
ECU section. Then under Electronic Control Unit select ECU list - Standard and choose User device -
Modbus - Modbus User Device to define your own device definition. Then confirm the settings by pressing
the button Add Module. Now your modbus server device is added into the configuration.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 123

 Modbus Server Device Settings
Once the device was added into the configuration you need to edit its setting such as number of each type of
Inputs/Outputs, Device Address, etc. Keep in mind that all devices uses inputs and outputs from the limited
pool common with ECU. Inserting the "Device address" is required for both Connection Types (Modbus RTU
or Modbus TCP).

MODBUS Registers (datapoints) definition

Open the section MODBUS registers for editing or creating new registers (datapoints). The list of registers is
actually a set of definitions belonging to your specific device and has no direct connection to specific control
signals in the controller. So, you can create large set of registers without any limitation. Register defintions for
all devices are integrated into the configuration and uploaded into the controller. Therefore there is no need to
share the "original Modbus Device List" containing all registers, when editing the configuration which was not
created in your computer.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 124

 Configuration of Inputs And Outputs
Now, when the definition of your Modbus Server Device was created, go to section I/O Configuration and
assign the specified registers to inputs and outputs. Then assign the functions for inputs and outputs. You can
select from the list of standard logical signals or use your inputs and outputs in the PLC configuration.

Clonning of The Modbus Server Device

When using more then one instance of a specific Modbus Server Device in one configuration, or when
needed the Modbus Server Device definition for configuration of another controller, there is a way how to
Export and Import the definitions. Go to section MODBUS registers in Modules and select the icon for
exporting data.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 125

 Insert the name and select the target folder for exporting data. You will be informed about successful
exporting of your device definition.

After that select the icon for importing data in a new configuration.

Select one of your Modbus Server Device definition files and Import it into the configuration for a new instance
of your device.

Block of registers reading

As modbus protocol allows reading of block of registers using one operation Modbus Master functionality
offers this option. If possible using of this operation is strongly recomended to decrees the numbers of polls in
modbus communication. The block reading is a matter of the configuration in InteliConfig. It allows to merge
more datapoints into the group or to define each input datapoint directly under this group. The Group
operation (modbus function) is then defined by the first datapoint which was added (or created) inside this
group. Configuration tool automatically construct the modbus poll operation based on the renge of register
adresses inside this group.

Write on change option

For writing operation there is possible to define the Refresh Type parameter which offers these options:
Periodically - The writing operations is performed every period based on the settinfs of Refresh Rate
parameter regardless the real change of the output which is to be written.
On Change - The write operation is only performedon change of output value.
On Change & Periodically - The Write operation is always performed on change as same as
periodically. This allows to set relatively slow refresh rate but accept the change of the output at the same
time.

5.5.23 MRS operation

The "MRS function" represents manual or remote start of gen-set. It is ideal for prime power applications.

The MRS procedure

When the start command is detected, the following steps are performed:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 126

 The Gen-set is started.
GCB is closed and the Gen-set begins to supply the load (in AUTO mode, otherwise GCB button must be
pressed)
When the stop command is detected, the following steps are performed:
GCB is opened and the Gen-set stops supplying the load.
After GCB is opened, the Gen-set cools down and a stops.

5.5.24 Multi ECU

InteliLite 4 allows you to configure, monitor and control multiple Electronic Control Units (ECUs), such as
Engine Control Units, AVR modules, Breakers and Modbus modules which are connected to the CAN. At this
moment there are 2 ECU slots available, each slot can contain one ECU which settings can be separately
configured.

In order to ensure proper functionality you shall pay extra attention to settings ECU address and
Controller address. ECU address has to be always unique whereas Controller address is required to be set to
same value as Subgroup: Controller Address (page 227) of the Controller Unit that sends commands
frames to this ECU.

Moreover you can now also modify I/O Configuration and recognized Fault Codes.

Note: Module name effects name of the value screen shown on the controller.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 127

 Controller objects related to ECU
ECU
LBI LBO Alarm
Slot
ECU COMMUNICATION FAIL Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail
1 ECU 1 COMM FAIL (PAGE 645)
BLOCK 1 (PAGE 614) (page 725)
ECU COMMUNICATION FAIL Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail
2 ECU 2 COMM FAIL (PAGE 645)
BLOCK 2 (PAGE 614) (page 725)

For each ECU there is LBO which gets activated when communication issue with respective ECU is detected.
For easier detection whether all configured ECUs are communicating, there is LBO ECU COMM OK (PAGE
646). During detected communication issue an alarm is issued for respective ECU. This alarm and all user
protections related to respective ECU can be suppressed by appropriate LBI. To suppress all protections of
all ECUs use LBI ECU COMMUNICATION FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 614). See table above to find relative LBO, LBI
and alarm to respective ECU slot.
All protections which evaluation depends on values from the ECU with communication error are blocked in
order to prevent showing of invalid protections in the Alarm list.

5.5.25 Operating Modes

Selecting the operating mode is done with the Left and the Right buttons on the front panel or by
changing the Controller Mode (page 217) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.

Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.

The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 626)
Remote MAN (page 626)
Remote AUTO (page 625)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.

MRS Operating Modes

OFF mode – MRS
No start of the Gen-set is possible. Controller stays in Not ready status and cannot be started in any way. The
buttons GCB , Start and Stop including the appropriate binary inputs for the external buttons are not
active.
IMPORTANT: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch Gen-set to OFF mode.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 128

 MAN mode – MRS
The engine can be started and stopped manually using the Start and Stop buttons (or the external
buttons wired to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode. When the engine is running, GCB can be
closed.

AUTO mode – MRS

The controller does not respond to the buttons Start , Stop and GCB ON/OFF .Engine start/stop
request is given by binary input Remote Start/Stop (page 627).

5.5.26 PLC
PLC Editor is a powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has a graphical interface to
make user interface easy to use.

List of available PLC blocks

PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 64
XOR/RS 16
Comp Time 8
Comp Win 8
Comp Hyst 8
Delay 32
Timer 2
AxB/C+-D 2
Math Fc. 4
Ana Switch8 4
Counter 4
Decomp.4 4
Hold 2
Ana Chng Mon 2

Working with the editor

If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program)
contains the following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 130) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 130) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 131) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 133) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See List of PLC blocks (page 691) for more information about blocks.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 129

 Working with sheets
Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.

Image 5.39 Adjusting PLC sheet

Adding PLC blocks

Adding a PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select the required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet.
Double-click on the block and adjust the properties of the block. See List of PLC blocks (page 691) for
more information about blocks.
Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs
(page 131) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of
selected PLC block.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 130

 Image 5.40 Adding PLC blocks

Note: To delete a PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also the delete selection function can be
used.

Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press the F1 button.

Define inputs and outputs

Image 5.41 Blank sheet of PLC Editor

Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 131

 Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from the following categories:
Bin. values – this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs, fixed protection states, user buttons, user protection states.
PLC outputs – this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from the following categories:
Ana. values – this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All setpoints – this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.

Image 5.42 PLC inputs

Outputs
Sheet output is located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Double-click on a free output position to add a new sheet output.
Double-click on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a
logical binary input (first some PLC block output must be connected to this output to enable configuration
of output).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 132

 Image 5.43 PLC outputs

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.

Creating wires
Wires can be created between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs
and blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from
blocks.

Follow the procedure below to create wire:

Situate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If
you point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.

Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value
(binary or analog). Binary values are marked by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 133

 Note: To delete wire just click on it and press the Delete button. Also the Delete selection function can be
used.

PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100 ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers
(item numbers), which are indicated in each block. Block numbers are assigned automatically according to
their position on sheet.

Image 5.44 PLC execution logic

IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use
direct feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect
results!!!

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 134

 Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.

Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).

Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).

PLC monitor
PLC Monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC Monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see your PLC. Active inputs and outputs are a blue color. Also wires with active signals are blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC Monitor tool.

5.5.27 Power formats and units

InteliLite 4 allows users to choose from several Power Formats that affect dimensions in which values and
some setpoints are interpreted or adjusted. Power formats and units can be changed with InteliConfig in the
following way. Control tab → Controller configuration → Others tab → Units/Power format
Power formats are available in decimal and non decimal format. Units can be changed to metric or US units.

Units
Metric 20 °C 10.0 bar 11.4 l/h
US 68 °F 145 psi 3.01 gph

Power Format

Identification/Name Power Voltage Current

Small 0.1 kW / kVA / kVAr 1V 1A
Standard 1 kW / kVA / kVAr 1V 1A

Range of some setpoints and values is changed significantly when different Power Formats are selected.
Affected setpoint are displayed during selection of power format.

5.5.28 Protections
Fixed Protections
Fixed protections are built in protections for Generator, Engine or for other functionalities (battery voltage, fuel
theft, D+, etc…). Their purpose is to inform or perform actions when the malfunction is detected.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 135

 Fixed Protection types

Alarm Fault Reset LBO Horn LBO Alarm Action: Action: Gen- SD Override
Name Level Abbreviation History Common LBO
List needed activation activation CB open set stop blocking

History Record Only 1 Hst - - - - - - - -

Alarm List Indication 1 ALI - - - - - - - -

Alarmlist indication +
1 AHI - - - - - - -
history record
AL COMMON WRN
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
(PAGE 638)
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
(PAGE 637)
Breaker Open & Cool AL COMMON BOC
2 BOC
Down (PAGE 637)

Shutdown Override 2 Sd -

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 136

 Protection blocking
Engine and generator fixed protections are blocked during starting phases or Ready and Stop states. They
become unblocked once Maximal Stabilization Time (page 244) has elapsed or GCB is closed whichever
happens first.
Exceptions are:
Overspeed protection which has two limits defined via setpoints Overspeed Sd (page 250) and Starting
Overspeed Sd (page 251). Starting Overspeed limit is considered in the starting phase till Starting
Overspeed Time elapses. This time starts to count once the RPM exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 233).
E-Stop and Emergency stop
The other way fixed protections can be blocked is by active LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627).
Note: LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) (Shutdown Override) does not block evaluation of fixed protection
conditions and their visualization. They are recorded into alarm list or history. It only blocks their actions.
Shutdown Override blocks all level 2 (Sd, BOC) fixed protection. It does not block level 1 (Wrn, AHI, Hist) or
protection of type Sd Override.

Some generators or engine protections have an option to DISABLE the protection.

The setting is done by using the setpoint which is associated to the fixed protection. Each setpoint offers
these options.

Setpoint options
Options Description
Enable Protection is enabled
Disable Protection is blocked
ExtDisable Disabling of the protection can be forced by LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 624)

Generator and engine protections lists

Generator protections
Setpoint for protection ON / OFF Alarms / Protection name
Always active BOC Short Circuit (page 769)
IDMT Overcurrent Protection (page
BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 769)
Current 276)
Current Unbalance Protection (page
BOC Current Unbalance (page 768)
277)
Generator Frequency Protection BOC Generator Overfrequency (page
(page 278) 767)
Frequency
Generator Frequency Protection BOC Generator Underfrequency (page
(page 278) 768)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 137

 Setpoint for protection ON / OFF Alarms / Protection name
Always active ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted (page 743)
Always active ALI Gen Ph L2 Inverted (page 744)
Always active ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted (page 744)
Others ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite (page
Always active
744)
Earth Fault Current Protection (page
Sd Earth Fault Current (page 769)
524)
Overload Protection (page 276) BOC Overload (page 768)
Power
Reverse Power Protection (page 279) BOC Reverse Power (page 768)
Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage (page 760)
Sd Generator L2 Overvoltage (page 761)
Sd Generator L3 Overvoltage (page 761)
Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage (page
761)
Sd Generator L2L3 Overvoltage (page
761)
Sd Generator L3L1 Overvoltage (page
762)
BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage (page
Generator <> Voltage Protection
762)
(page 277)
BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage (page
Voltage 762)
BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage (page
762)
BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage (page
763)
BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage (page
763)
BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage (page
763)
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N (page
Voltage Unbalance Protection (page 767)
278) BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
(page 767)

Engine protections
Protection Enable / Disable Alarms / Protection name
Always active Sd Overspeed (page 758)
Speed
Underspeed Protection (page 279) Sd Underspeed (page 759)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 138

 User Protections
InteliLite 4 allows users to configure their own protections to any analog input or binary input/output. Only one
protection of 1st level and/or one protection of 2nd level can be configured on logical binary input/output.
More than one protection can be configured on analog input. Max simultaneous number of configured user
protections is 64.
Source upon which the protection is configured can be selected. It can be any analog value or binary state.

Source
Analog values Binary states
Binary inputs
Analog inputs
Controller, Modules, ECU
Controller, Modules
Binary outputs
Values
PLC
ECU, Generator, others
Protection states
Statistics
LBOs

Protection activation
Type Name of activation Description
Over Limit Protection is activated if value is over limit.
Over Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is over limit or in a fault state.
Analog Under Limit Protection is activated if value is under limit.
Under Limit + Fls Protection is activated if value is under limit or in a fault state.
Fls only Protection is activated if value is in a fault state.
True Protection is activated if value is Logical 1.
TrueOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 1 or in a fault state.
Binary
False Protection is activated if value is Logical 0.
FalseOrFls Protection is activated if value is Logical 0 or in a fault state.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 139

 User Protection types

Alarm Fault Reset LBO Horn LBO Alarm Action: Action: Gen- SD Override
Name Level Abbreviation History Common LBO
List needed activation activation CB open set stop blocking

History Record Only 1 Hst - - - - - - - -

Alarm List Indication 1 ALI - - - - - - - -

Alarmlist indication +
1 AHI - - - - - - -
history record
AL COMMON WRN
Warning 1 Wrn - - -
(PAGE 638)
AL COMMON SD
Shutdown 2 Sd
(PAGE 637)
Breaker Open & Cool AL COMMON BOC
2 BOC
Down (PAGE 637)

Shutdown Override 2 Sd -

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 140

 Protection blocking
It is possible to configure one Protection Blocking to any User Protections (page 139). This function is used
to block certain protections when their function is unwanted or meaningless. Each user protection has an
option to set the blocking condition.

Protection blocking
Block Type Description
All the time The protection is not blocked. It can be blocked only by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627).
Run Only The protection is blocked depending on engine state and time defined by setpoint Run
Block Delay Only Block Delay (page 245). It can also be blocked by LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627).
The protection is blocked by LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 624) or by LBI SD
Force Block
OVERRIDE (PAGE 627).
The protection is blocked depending on engine state. It is unblocked once Maximal
Electrical
Stabilization Time (page 244) is elapsed or GCB is closed. It can also be blocked by LBI
Protection
SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627).

Note: LBI SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) (Shutdown Override) does not block evaluation of user protection
conditions and their visualization. They are recorded into alarm list or history. It only blocks their actions.
Shutdown Override blocks all level 2 (Sd,BOC) protection. It does not block level 1 (Wrn, AHI, Hist) or
protection of type SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627).

Image 5.45 Run only block delay and electrical protection blocking

History record
Always – History is recorded all the time.
Once – History is recorded only once after fault reset.

Note: Every User protection is evaluated with period 0.1 s.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 141

 Configuration of protections in InteliConfig
Control tab → Controller configuration → Protections tab → Analog / Binary protections

Select the desired protections to be configured (Analog protections / Binary protections).

Add protection by clicking on the icon .

Delete selected protection by clicking on the icon .

Edit selected protection by clicking on the icon .

Protection states
Protection states are states of fixed and user protections. These states can be configured as binary output or
used in PLC logic.

Fixed protection states

Important Fixed Protections (page 135) have a protection state. The protection state is (usually) named the
same as the alarm. Fixed protection states are in a group of 32 values.
Protection states groups:
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 580)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 2 (PAGE 580)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 3 (PAGE 580)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 4 (PAGE 580)
FIXED PROTECTIONS STATES 5 (PAGE 581)

User protections states

During the Configuration of protections in InteliConfig (page 142), you can decide whether you want to
add user protection state for the protection. The name is the same as the alarm's message.
User protection states are in a group of 32 values.
Note: Group of User protection states is showed only when there is at least 1 protection state in it.

Protection states group:

USER PROTECTIONS STATES 1 (PAGE 581)

Alarm management
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding Gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the Gen-set or technology.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 142

 Analog input alarm evaluation principle

Image 5.46 Analog input alarm evaluation principle

Alarm handling
There are four different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated. The category is
selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in alarms. The categories are the
following:
The alarm is evaluated all the time the controller is switched on.
The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used for e.g. oil pressure.
These alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been started with the delay given by the setpoint
Run Only Block Delay (page 245).
The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the
engine has been started and Maximal Stabilization Time (page 244) has elapsed or the GCB has been
closed. They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only Generator under/overvoltage, Generator
voltage unbalance and Generator under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not
configurable to binary and analog input alarms.
The alarm is evaluated only when LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 624) is not active.
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start
to run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms, analog input alarms) or is adjusted
via configuration window in InteliConfig (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions persist, the alarm
will activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.
After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 618), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarm list as soon as the
respective condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will
remain in the Alarm list as Inactive.
Note: The input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the
engine. This input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the
Gen-set drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 143

 Alarm states
An alarm can have the following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.

Image 5.47 Alarm List

Alarm types – Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.

History record only (Hst)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 662) and ALARM (PAGE 639)) are
not activated.

Alarm list indication (ALI)

The event is only indicated in the Alarmlist. It disappears for the alarmist automatically as soon as the cause
disappears. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 662) and ALARM (PAGE 639)) are not activated.

Alarm list indication + History record (AHI)

The alarm appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log.

Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON WRN
(PAGE 638) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 662) and ALARM (PAGE 639)).

Alarm types – Level 2

The level 2 alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.

IMPORTANT: The Gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer
an active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO mode!

Breaker open and cool down (BOC)

The event appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate opening of the
GCB and then the standard stop sequence with cooling follows. The Gen-set cannot be started again while
there is a BOC alarm in the Alarm list. Activates the output AL COMMON BOC (PAGE 637) as well as the
standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 662) and ALARM (PAGE 639)).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 144

 IMPORTANT: In case there is no feedback from breakers configured on physical binary input or
in PLC, Breaker open and cool down alarm will be replaced by shutdown alarm type.

Shutdown (Sd)
The alarm appears in the Alarm list and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate stop of the Gen-
set without cooling phase. Also GCB breaker will open. The Gen-set cannot be started again while there is a
shutdown alarm in the Alarm list. Activates the output AL COMMON SD (PAGE 637) as well as the standard
alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 662) and ALARM (PAGE 639)).

Shutdown override
nd
If the Logical binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) is closed, all 2 level protections are disabled to allow the
Gen-set run in an emergency situation, e.g. sprinkler devices power supply.
All protections are shown in Alarmlist and recorded into History, but the controller does not stop the engine
because of them. If the input is deactivated and some protections are still active or not yet reset, the controller
starts to take these protections into account and consequently stops the engine.
nd
All 2 level protections are locked out, except of these:
Emergency stop
Overspeed
Underspeed
Binary and analog protections configured as Sd override type. In fact this protection type means
"Unoverridable shutdown", i.e. it works the same way as standard shutdown protection, however it cannot
be overridden (blocked) by the SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) input.

Sensor failure detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor failure will be detected and a
sensor failure message will appear in the Alarm list (page 146). The valid range is defined by the far left (RL)
and far right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5 % from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.

Image 5.48 Sensor failure detection principle

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 145

 Remote alarm messaging
If the communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messagesor
emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarm list (page 146) or new event is written in the
History log (page 116). The message will contain a copy of the Alarm list (page 146) or reasons from the
History log (page 116). To enable this function first to check the controller internet connection. Then adjust
setpoints Event Message (page 520), Wrn Message (page 522), BOC Message (page 521) and Sd
Message (page 522) to ON. Also enter a valid GSM phone number or email address to the setpoints.
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:
Note: * Only with enabled Internet Connection (page 475).

Alarm list
Alarm list is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarm list contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms on binary or analog inputs
ECU alarms

Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the Alarm list begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.

User configured alarms

An alarm message in the Alarm list begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC).
Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog user protection. Then the alarm
name follows, which can be adjusted by user during the configuration.

ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic Trouble Code,
which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the alarm
occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric
code and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.

Built-in alarms

Protection
Events specification Description
type
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Overvoltage
Wrn Battery Overvoltage WRN
(page 258) setpoint.
Wrn Battery Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery
WRN
Undervoltage Undervoltage (page 257) setpoint.
If the controller switches off during starting sequence (
Sd Battery Flat SD
STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) output is active) it doesn't try to start

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 146

 Protection
Events specification Description
type
again and activates this protection (controller assumes bad
battery condition).
Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without
Sd Start Fail SD
success.
BOC Gen Lx
Undervoltage The generator voltage is out of limits given by Generator
SD
Undervoltage BOC (page 271) and Generator
Sd Gen Lx Overvoltage BOC
Overvoltage Sd (page 270) setpoints.
(where x=1,2,3)
The generator voltage is unbalanced more than the value of
BOC Gen V Unbalance BOC
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 272) setpoint.
The generator frequency is out of limits given by Generator
BOC Gen >, <Frequency BOC Overfrequency BOC (page 273) and Generator
Underfrequency BOC (page 274) setpoints.
The generator current is unbalanced more than the value of
BOC Current Unbalance BOC
Current Unbalance BOC (page 269) setpoint.
Generator current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given
BOC Current IDMT BOC by Nominal Current (page 208) and IDMT Overcurrent
Delay (page 268) setpoints.
The load is greater than the value given by Overload BOC
BOC Overload BOC
(page 266) setpoint.
This alarm is activated when Earth Fault value exceeds Earth
Sd Earth Fault SD Fault Sd (page 526) limit for at least Earth Fault Delay
(page 525) period.
The protection comes active if the speed is greater than
Sd Overspeed SD
Overspeed Sd (page 250) setpoint.
During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value
of Starting RPM (page 233) setpoint the starter is switched
off and the speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM
Sd Underspeed SD
(page 233) again. Then the Underspeed protection is active.
Protection evaluation starts 5 seconds after reaching
Starting RPM (page 233).
If the input Emergency Stop is active shutdown is
Emergency Stop SD
immediately activated.
If the input E-Stop is active shutdown is immediately
E-Stop SD
activated.
GCB Fail SD Failure of generator circuit breaker.
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement.
This alarm appears, if starter was disengaged for other
Sd RPM Measurement
SD reason than over-crossing Starting RPM (page 233) (like oil
Fail
pressure or D+) and at the end of timer Maximum Cranking
Time (page 232) there are no RPMs > Starting RPM (page

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 147

 Protection
Events specification Description
type
233) detected.
Gen-set stop failed. See description at Gen-set Operation
Wrn Stop Fail WRN
States chapter.
Charge Alternator Fail WRN Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Wrn Override All Sd WRN The protection is active if the output Sd Override is active.
ALI Gen Ph-Rotation Gen-set voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing
ALI
Opposite is prohibited by controller.
The reverse power is higher than limit adjusted via setpoint
BOC Reverse Power BOC
Reverse Power Level (page 275).

Note: This table does not contain all alarms in the controller. It is only a list of the most common alarms.

5.5.29 Pulse Counters

InteliLite 4 has 2 internal counters. Value of the each pulse counter is increased by one step whenever the
number of pulses counted reaches the value of setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse. Pulse counters are
able to count reliably pulses longer than 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF.

Conversion setpoint Value Binary Input

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page Pulse Counter 1 (page PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE
259) 574) 624)
Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page Pulse Counter 2 (page PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE
259) 574) 625)

Note: Value of the internal counters remains even if the controller is unplugged from power.

Note: Counter counts leading edges.

5.5.30 Rental Timers

In controller, there are two timers which are designed like rental timers. Rental timers will stop the Gen-set
after their elapse.

How to set-up rental timer

This is a short guide for settings of rental timers. Please see following few steps regarding how to set up rental
timers:
Choose the type of rental timer
Rental Timer 1 (page 460) (based on engine running hours)
Rental Timer 2 (page 462) (based on date)
Adjust the length of chosen timer
Adjust the warning for user Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 462) or Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 464) (warning
will be displayed in Alarm list before elapsing of rental timer)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 148

 Adjust Rental Timer BOC (page 464) – common for both timers (if engine is still running after rental timer
counts down, this timer will start tocount down. After the time has elapsed, the Gen-set will be cooled
down and stop).

5.5.31 RPM Measurement

InteliLite 4 offers multiple methods to measure the RPM of the engine. Please pay close attention during
configuration to ensure that you will use correct method.

Measuring using dedicated RPM input

Connect magnetic pick-up sensor to dedicated input Magnetic pick-up (page 40). Received data are
converted using setpoint Gear Teeth (page 216).

Measuring from generator frequency

RPM is calculated from generator frequency which is received from Generator Voltage L1-N (page 556). To
enable this measurement method adjust setpoint Gear Teeth (page 216) to Fgen->RPM. The calculation is
based on expectation of 4 pole alternator. Following formula is used:

5.5.32 Sensor curves

Background of the sensor calibration
To correct measuring error of each analog input (pressure, temperature, level, etc.), calibrating constants
should be set. To correct an offset of each analog input, select an option Offset in InteliConfig and set the
appropriate value.

Note: The calibration must be done at the operational point of the analog input (e.g. 80 °C, 4.0 Bar etc..)

Sensor curve HW configuration

InteliLite 4 analog inputs allows you to select Input HW type. Three HW configuration options are available:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 149

 0-15 kΩ
0-10 V
0-20 mA passive
Setup controller analog input in this way to use other than the default HW configuration (0-15 kΩ):
1. Start with a sensor configuration and select requested HW configuration

2. Use the adjusted sensor with an analog input and the requested HW configuration will be used with the
analog input automatically. There is no need to use a jumper, configured Input HW type is used by
controller automatically.

Default sensor curves

There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on
minimum/maximum values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ.
The purpose is to prolong curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm failure
sensor.

Curve Min [Ω] Max [Ω] Units

VDO 10 Bar 10 180 Bar
VDO40-120°C 22 3200 °C
VDOLevel% 0 180 %
General line 1 0 1000 Ω
General line 2 0 1000 Ω

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 150

 General line 3 0 1000 Ω
General line 4 0 1000 Ω
General line 5 0 1000 Ω
General line 6 0 1000 Ω
General line 7 0 1000 Ω
General line 8 0 1000 Ω
General line 9 0 1000 Ω
General line 10 0 1000 Ω
General line 11 0 1000 Ω
General line 12 0 1000 Ω
General line 13 0 1000 Ω

Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. Some standard curves are also prepared in InteliConfig.

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of function Total Fuel Consumption, curve for analog input FUEL
LEVEL (PAGE 688) has to be in percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be
adjusted correctly.

5.5.33 Stabilization
When the Engine start (page 100) sequence is finished, the Gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There
are two timers (setpoints) in this phase:
Minimal Stabilization Time (page 243) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB
cannot be closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 244) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated), but contrary
to the previous timer, the GCB can be closed if generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUTO mode), the closing of GCB will occur as soon as
the generator voltage and frequency will get into limits and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 243) has
elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits of the Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 244) period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the Gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.
Note: The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Group: Generator
settings (page 266).

Note: The value of the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 243) setpoint has to be lower than the value of
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 244) setpoint.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 151

5.5.34 Start-stop sequence
State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Ready Start request PRESTART (PAGE 669) on Prestart Prestart
Time (page 233) counter started
RPM > 2 or Oil pressure > Stop (Stop
Starting Oil Pressure (page fail)
234) or Generator voltage >
10V or D+ voltage is higher
than D+ Threshold (page 249)
OFF Mode selected or Not Ready
Shutdown alarm active
Not Ready RPM < 2, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage <
10 V, D+ not Active no
shutdown alarm active, other
than OFF Mode selected
Prestart Prestart time elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) on, Cranking
STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) orSTARTER 2
(PAGE 676) on, Maximum Cranking
Time (page 232) counter started
Cranking RPM > Starting RPM STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) or STARTER 2 Starting
(PAGE 676) off, PRESTART (PAGE 669)
off
D+ input activated or oil STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) or STARTER 2 Cranking
pressure detected or Generator (PAGE 676) off, PRESTART (PAGE 669)
voltage > 25% Nominal voltage off
Maximum Cranking Time STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) or STARTER 2 Crank pause
(page 232), 1st attempt (PAGE 676) off, FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
654) off, STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 677)
on, Cranking Fail Pause (page 232)
timer started
Maximum Cranking Time STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) or STARTER 2 Shutdown
(page 232) elapsed, last (PAGE 676) off, PRESTART (PAGE 669) (Start fail)
attempt off
all cranking attempts elapsed FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) off, STOP Shutdown
SOLENOID (PAGE 677) on (Start fail)
Crank pause Cranking Fail Pause (page STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) or STARTER 2 Cranking
232) elapsed (PAGE 676) off, FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
654) on, STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 677)
off, Maximum Cranking Time (page
232) counter started
Starting Idle Time (page 241) elapsed Minimal Stabilization Time (page Running
243) and Maximal Stabilization

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 152

 Time (page 244) counter started
any shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) off, STOP Shutdown
SOLENOID (PAGE 677) on
Running Stop request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 672) Cooling
off,Cooling Time (page 247) counter
started
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown READY TO LOAD (PAGE 672) off, FUEL Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 654) off
GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 656) Loaded
closed
Loaded GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 656) Running
opened
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) off, STOP Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 677) on, READY TO
LOAD (PAGE 672) off,
Cooling Cooling Time (page 247) FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) off, STOP Stop
elapsed SOLENOID (PAGE 677) on
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) off, STOP Shutdown
condition SOLENOID (PAGE 677) on
Start request READY TO LOAD (PAGE 672) on Running
Stop RPM = 0, Oil pressure not Ready
detected, Generator voltage
<10 V, D+ not active
If at least one of engine running Stop (Stop
indication is detected when fail)
Stop Time (page 247)
elapsed.

Note: If all generator parameters are OK and Minimal Stabilization Time (page 243) elapsed, indicates
that GCB is possible to close. In AUTO Mode GCB is closed in this moment automatically.

Note: The start-up sequence can be interrupted atn any time by a stop request.

5.5.35 Universal hours counter

This function is designed to count time when conditions of counter are fulfilled. There are 2 independent
counters. Value of counted time is visible in statistics group - values Universal Hours Counter 1 (page 568)
and Universal Hours Counter 2 (page 568). Each timer has its own LBI which has to be active to start
appropriate counter - UNIVERSAL HOURS COUNTER 1 (PAGE 631) and UNIVERSAL HOURS COUNTER 2 (PAGE
631).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 153

5.5.36 USB host
USB host is a function for programming the controller from the USB Flash Drive. In order to get the latest
firmware and archive to USB flash drive following steps have to be followed:
Download and install latest .psi package from [Link]
Use InteliConfig -> Tools -> USB Flash Export -> Export Manager
There must be 4 files generated or copied on USB flash drive.

Note: M.N.P.B stands for number 0 – 9.

The following functions are supported:

Firmware upload (Access level 3 is required)
Configuration upload (Access level 3 is required)
Firmware and configuration upload (Access level 3 is required)
Configuration download (Access level 0 is satisfactory)

IMPORTANT: Do not unplug USB Flash Drive during programming!

IMPORTANT: It is not possible to do downgrade from version 1.6.0 to older versions with USB
Host

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 154

 Image 5.49 USB host flowchart

Terminology:
The Archive = the native file of InteliConfig, including the complete Configuration + History + Statistic +
Values (at time of download) + Alarm list.
Configuration = the part of Archive, in the terms of Configuration + Setpoints + PLC + IO definitions +
Languages (for more information see Configuration (archive) download on page 157).
New configuration = the configuration created in InteliConfig for the purpose of uploading it into the
controller using the USB memory stick. The new configuration is recognized due to its name. The name
must contain the specific string ="InteliLite4-Genset name-M.N.P.B.ail4".

Note: M.N.P.B stands for number 0 – 9.

Compatible firmware = the firmware version compatible with the configuration in the controller.
Abbreviations:
CU – control unit
FW – firmware
CFG – configuration

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 155

 Firmware upload
Point 1 – controller detects that USB Flash Drive has been inserted.
If the communication via USB is running, the controller will not detect the USB flash drive.
On the other hand if the USB flash drive was detected, communication via USB B port is not possible.
Point 2 – controller is in OFF mode
All operations with USB memory key are possible only in OFF mode
Point 3 – Conditions for firmware upload with current configuration
The new firmware compatible with the version of the configuration in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new configuration file).
Detection is based on the name of firmware
More firmware can be stored on the USB Flash Drive. Controller automatically selects the compatible
firmware with the highest version.
Point 4 – Pop-up message
Do you want to update firmware?
Point 5 – Firmware upload
Current archive is downloaded to USB Flash Drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New firmware is uploaded into the controller without the change of the configuration
History record "Firmware loaded" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB Flash Drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "Controller programming successful"

Configuration (archive) upload

Point 1 – controller detects that USB Flash Drive has been inserted.
If the communication via USB B is running, the controller will not detect the USB memory key.
On the other hand if the USB flash drive was detected, communication via USB B port is not possible.
Point 2 – controller is in OFF mode
All operations with USB flash drive are possible only in OFF mode
Point 9 – conditions for new configuration upload
The new configuration compatible with the version of the firmware in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new firmware file).
Detection is based on name of configuration – required name: "InteliLite 4-Genset name-M.N.P.B.ail4

Note: M.N.P.B stands for number 0 – 9."

There can be only one configuration file

Point 10 – Pop-up message
Do you want to update configuration?
Point 11 – Configuration upload
Current archive is download to USB flash drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New configuration is uploaded into the controller without the change of the firmware
History record "Config loaded" is made

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 156

 Confirming file (.txt) on USB flash drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "Controller programming successful"

Firmware and configuration (archive) upload

Point 1 – controller detects that USB Flash Drive has been inserted.
If the communication via USB B is running, the controller will not detect the USB memory key.
On the other hand if the USB flash drive was detected, communication via USB B port is not possible.
Point 2 – controller is in OFF mode
All operations with USB flash drive are possible only in OFF mode
Point 6 – conditions for new firmware and configuration upload
The new configuration has been detected. Also there is a firmware file compatible with detected new
configuration
Detection is based on name of configuration – required name: "InteliLite 4-Genset name-
M.N.P.B.ail4" and on name of firmware
There can be only one configuration file
More firmware can be stored on the USB flash drive. Controller automatically selects the compatible
firmware with the highest version.
Point 7 – Pop-up message
Do you want to update firmware and configuration?
Point 8 – Configuration and firmware upload
Current archive is download to USB flash drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New firmware is uploaded into the controller
New configuration is uploaded into the controller
History record "Firmware loaded" and "Config loaded" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB flash drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful,
Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "Controller programming successful"

Configuration (archive) download

Point 1 – controller detects that USB Flash Drive has been inserted.
If the communication via USB B is running, the controller will not detect the USB memory key.
On the other hand if the USB flash drive was detected, communication via USB B port is not possible.
Point 2 – controller is in OFF mode
All operations with USB flash drive are possible only in OFF mode
Points 3, 6, 9 – conditions for configuration download
There is no firmware or configuration with required name
Point 12 – Pop-up message
Do you want to download archive?

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 157

 Point 11 – Configuration download
Current archive is download to USB flash drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
Confirmation pop-up message: "Archive successfully saved"

5.5.37 User Buttons

The User button is a binary signal. Its value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device such as Modbus).
States of user buttons signals are visible in the Values group User Buttons. There are 16 user buttons
available.

Each setpoint has these options

Option Description
The LBO User Button X is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third party
COMMAND
device.
The LBO User Button X is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user button
MAN OFF
is still 0.
The LBO User Button X is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user button
is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching to
COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until command is
received.

Commands
Commands can be sent from third party device via Modbus or remote connection (WebSupervisor). Following
types are available:

Command Description
When a command ON is received, User Button is activated. Subsequent commands ON
ON/OFF when User Button is active have no effect. If a command OFF is received, User Button is
deactivated. Subsequent commands OFF when User Button is inactive have no effect.
When a command TOGGLE is received, User Button is activated. Next command
TOGGLE
TOGGLE when User Button is active deactivates User Button and so on.
When a command PULSE is received, User Button is activated for the set duration.
Pulse length is 200 ms (user can use this pulse in PLC to prolong it using e.g. block
Delay)
Consequent commands PULSE sent during duration of the pulse prolong the duration
accordingly.
PULSE When the setting of pulse duration is changed while the pulse is active, the current pulse
will have the original duration and the new setting is applied for the next pulse.
If the User Button is active (as a result of COMMAND ON or COMMAND TOGGLE) and
COMMAND PULSE comes, User Button remains active for the duration of the pulse and
then it deactivates.
While a pulse is active (duration of the pulse) and COMMAND ON, COMMAND OFF or

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 158

 Command Description
COMMAND TOGGLE comes, the pulse is canceled. Next state depends on the
canceling command

Note:
COMMAND ON – User Button remains active until COMMAND OFF or COMMAND TOGGLE comes
COMMAND OFF or COMMAND TOGGLE – User Button deactivates until COMMAND ON,
COMMAND TOGGLE or COMMAND PULSE come

User button MODBUS commands *)

User User User User User User User User
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button 5 Button 6 Button 7 Button 8
00 0A 00 00 14 00 00 1E 00 00 28 00 00 32 00 00 3C 00 00 46 00 00 50 00
PULSE
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
00 0B 00 00 15 00 00 1F 00 00 29 00 00 33 00 00 3D 00 00 47 00 00 51 00
TOGGLE
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
00 0C 00 00 16 00 00 20 00 00 2A 00 00 34 00 00 3E 00 00 48 00 00 52 00
ON
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
00 0D 00 00 17 00 00 21 00 00 2B 00 00 35 00 00 3F 00 00 49 00 00 53 00
OFF
00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47 00 00 47
User User User User User User User User
Button 9 Button 10 Button 11 Button 12 Button 13 Button 14 Button 15 Button 16
00 5A 00 00 64 00 00 6E 00 00 78 00 00 82 00 00 8C 00 00 96 00 00 A0 00
PULSE
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48
00 5B 00 00 65 00 00 6F 00 00 79 00 00 83 00 00 8D 00 00 97 00 00 A1 00
TOGGLE
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48
00 5C 00 00 66 00 00 70 00 00 7A 00 00 84 00 00 8E 00 00 98 00 00 A2 00
ON
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48
00 5D 00 00 67 00 00 71 00 00 7B 00 00 85 00 00 8F 00 00 99 00 00 A3 00
OFF
00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48 00 00 48

IMPORTANT: The first line in each table cell represents an Argument, the second line stands for
Command.

Note: Table provides data which has to be written into MODBUS registers 4207-4209 (count 3) using
function 16 for specific user button and command type.

MODBUS Register: 44208(4207), Function 16, Count 3

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 159

5.5.38 User setpoints
Controller allows user to create their own setpoints, as well as edit and delete created setpoints. The number
of setpoints created by the user is limited to 128. All setpoints created by user are located in a group selected
by a user. The Comm. object number (CO) can be found via InteliConfig (Tools tab → Generate Cfg image
(COM)). User setpoints can be used to manage User protections and PLC.

Add User setpoint

Delete selected User setpoint

Edit selected User setpoint

Image 5.50 Setting parameters of a user setpoint

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 160

 Contents of the user setpoint
Max. 32 characters
Name Note: Does not consider duplicities (It is possible to have setpoints with the same
name, but it is not recommended.)
Can be chosen from a list or
Dimension
User can create their own with a limit of 32 characters.
Resolution Max. 4 decimal place
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
Low Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Max. value cannot exceed High Limit.
Range of the data type INT32 (restricted by resolution).
High Limit Value is set as a constant (can not be set as setpoint).
Min. value cannot be lower than Low Limit.
Default value Must be in range between Low and High Limit (restricted by resolution).
Group in which setpoint will be shown.
Group
Position of a setpoint in a list.
Subgroup Subgroup in which setpoint will be shown.

5.5.39 User texts

Selected texts in controller can be changes by user. In InteliConfig PC tool go to configuration window and tab
others. There is tab User texts.
Example of texts which can be changed by user:
Maintanance timers
Exercise timers
Rental timers
User Buttons
Remote Control Switches
Universal Hours Counters

5.5.40 Voltage phase sequence detection

The controller detects phase sequence voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller
installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection. The phase sequence is adjusted via setpoint Phase
Rotation (page 225). When the phases are connected in different order (e.g. L1,L3,L2 or L2,L1,L3) the
following alarms are detected:
ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite (page 744)

6 back to Functions

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 161

5.6 User management and data access control
Accessing, monitoring or controlling the device via any communication interface requires a user to be
logged-in.
When a task (read data, write data , control) is to be performed the Role of the user who is currently
logged-in must be higher or equal to the Role required for the particular task.
User must have their user account defined by the administrator of the controller before the user can log-in
into the controller and perform monitoring, control or configuration tasks.
Note: For trusted interfaces there is an "implicit user"(see Implicit account on page 163) automatically
logged in always while no other explicit user is logged in.

5.6.1 Types of interfaces

The controller communication interfaces are split into two categories according to what kind of environment
the interface is exposed to.
Trusted
Trusted interfaces are operated locally inside a closed environment/ infrastructure where additional
measures against misuse or attack take place (e.g. physical access limitation). Due to the nature of
this interface less strict cybersecurity rules may be applied.
Trusted interfaces provide Implicit account (page 163) function which allows the performance of
certain operations without requiring an explicit user to log in.
Trusted interfaces are USB, RS232, RS485.
Untrusted
General-purpose interfaces, which may be exposed to public networks, such as the Internet, are
untrusted. The communication is running through networks which are not under control of the entity
who operates the controller. Thus, strict cybersecurity rules must apply for this type of interface.
Untrusted interface are Ethernet and cellular module.

5.6.2 User accounts

User account must be created in the controller by an administrator before the particular user can login to the
controller.
Note: User accounts must be created for each controller separately and manually. It is not possible to
transfer the accounts from one controller to another.

User account must have the following properties

Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter. This
Username
is the main identifier of the particular user account.
Consists of 6-15 alphanumeric characters, must contain at least 1 letter and 1
Password digit. This is the password that is used together with user name to authenticate
(log-in).
Optional 4-digit identification string which can be used for simplified login at
User identifier (UID)
trusted interfaces (e.g. from InteliVision display when connected via Ethernet.
PIN 4-digit "password" to be used together with UID.
Role mask Determines Access to controller data (page 169)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 162

 Implicit account
At trusted interfaces there is an implicit user automatically logged-in at any time if no other explicit user is
logged-in at the respective interface. This allows terminal devices (e.g. internal display) to show controller
values even without the need for a specific person to be logged-in.
The implicit account is fixedly defined in the firmware.
The implicit account has fixed Role 1, unless production mode is activated (see Production mode on
page 163).
Implicit user is logged in any time no other user is logged in at the respective interface.

User login
To login to the controller the username and password must be provided into the login form of the
application (InteliConfig (page 13), WebSupervisor (page 13).
Alternatively, at trusted interfaces, it is possible to login using UID and PIN instead of username and
password. This method of login is designed to simplify the login procedure at devices without alphanumeric
keyboard (e.g. InteliVision).
Note: The controller is featured with a protection against brute force attack to user account credentials. For
details see Account break protection on page 169.

Changing password and PIN

The password and/or PIN for currently logged user can be changed. The user must be logged with username
and password even if PIN has to be changed.

Production mode
Production mode is used to simplify working with the controller while manufacturing, putting into operation or
service works.
In production mode the Implicit account (page 163) has Role adjusted to administrator level. Thus, in
production mode at trusted interfaces (like USB) the operator is allowed to perform any operation which
normally requires administrator to log in without the need of logging in.
IMPORTANT: Production mode is intended only for the manufacturing and/or service purposes
while the controller is in the respective facility and must be turned off before the controller is put
into regular operation.

There is active alarm Wrn Production Mode (page 739) in the alarm list any time production mode is active.
To turn off the Production mode go to User management and uncheck the checkbox Production mode or go
to Production Mode display screen and select disable.

Factory default accounts

Each controller comes from the production with one factory default administrator account having following
credentials:
Username: "administrator"
Password: <serial number of the controller>
Example: 12345678

User ID: "0001"

User PIN: "0000"

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 163

 When the controller is being configured for operation the desired user accounts including the administrator
account should be created and then the factory default account can be deleted.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the backup e-mail address before you delete the default administrator
account. This address is used as second authentication factor in password reset request and the
password reset action code will be sent to this and only this e-mail address.

Note: There must always remain at least one administrator account in the system. The controller will not
allow deleting last administrator account.

Wrn Default Password appears in Alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of alarm is to inform that the controller might
be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is default
administrator password.

Reset accounts to factory default

If credentials (username and/or password) for administrator account are lost, it is possible to reset all user
accounts to the factory default state. For more information see Resetting the administrator password on
page 170.
After reset procedure user accounts are in factory default state.
Wrn Default Password (page 726) appears in Alarm list when the default administrator password is set and
communication module is plugged in the controller. The purpose of the alarm is to inform that the controller
might be or is connected to an untrusted interface and cybersecurity rules are not fulfilled because there is
default administrator password.

5.6.3 Managing accounts

User accounts can be managed from InteliConfig while an online connection to the controller is established. A
user with administrator level must be logged with username/password and is prompted to re-enter accounts
password before the user management dialog is opened.
IMPORTANT: The total available number of accounts in the controller is 5.

Adding an account
Click on the "+" button in the lower left corner of the user management window, then provide the account
properties as described in User accounts (page 162).
Note: Rules for the User accounts (page 162) credentials apply and some items are optional

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 164

 Deleting an account
Select the account that has to be deleted and click on the "-" button in the lower left part of the user
management window.
Note: You can not delete your own administrator account unless there is another administrator account
present in the controller.

Changing account properties

Select the account that needs to be edited and click on the "pencil" button in the lower left part of the user
management window. Then modify the desired property or properties. You can modify one or more properties
at once.
Note: It is not possible to change user name or UID. Instead of this create a new account with the required
changes and delete the original one.

Cloning accounts
Cloning feature allows user to clone user accounts together with controller firmware and configuration.
Note: If the archive where the save of the clone is made is configured with the plug-in module, it's firmware
can also be a part of the clone.

Save the clone

To prepare the clone you need to click on the Save Icon. The following window appears.

Image 5.51 Save the clone

Plug-in Module FW bookmark

If is required to clone firmware of connected plug-in modules, click to checkbox "Include Plug-in
Modules FW"
User Management bookmark
User has to create accounts in this section. These newly created accounts are stored in the clone
At least one user with administrator rights (level 3) must be defined. Recovery Email address has to
be set.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 165

 AirGateKey is not mandatory but recommended when the AirGate connection is used to access the
controller

Image 5.52 Create accounts

Package protection
Set up password for clone file

Create clone
To load the clone to the controller click on the Create Clone icon.

Image 5.53 Create clone

1. Select required clone and click on Next button

2. Following window appears

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 166

 Image 5.54 Create clone

3. Select required connection type

4. Fill in the password in case the clone was saved by selected Package protection option
5. Click on Clone button

Manage clones
Click on the ImEx clone icon for managing clones. Following window appears.

Image 5.55 ImEx Clone

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 167

 Exporting clone
It is possible to export clone from InteliConfig software into any location. To export the clone click on the
Export clone icon. Following window appears.

Image 5.56 Save as clone

1. Type required clone name into File name bar

2. Choose required folder
3. Click on Save button

Importing clone
It is possible to import clone from any location. For importing the clone click on the Import clone icon.
Following window appears.

Image 5.57 Open clone

1. Go to location where is required clone saved

2. Select the clone
3. Click on Open button

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 168

5.6.4 Account break protection
The controller protects the user accounts against a brute-force attack, i.e against breaking into the controller
by fast repeating attempts to login with credentials generated from the range of all possible combinations.
If the account break protection detects a possible attack and blocks an account or interface the alarm Wrn
Brute Force Protection Active (page 739) is activated. The alarm can be used to send an active message
(e.g. e-mail) to inform about that situation. The exact behavior of the controller depends on the situation.

Password protection
1. If a user performs five consecutive attempts to login using username/password, providing correct
username but incorrect password, the respective user account is blocked for a time period of 1 minute.
The attempts count regardless of the interface from which it is performed.
2. During the blocking period it is not possible to login with the respective account (username) from any
interface even if the correct password is provided.
3. After the blocking period elapses, another attempt to login with the respective account (username) is
possible. If this attempt fails again the account is blocked again, now for period of 2 minutes.
4. The points repeats 1-3 times further, the duration of the blocking period is multiplied by 2 in each
consequential cycle. However, the maximal blocking time is 20 minutes, the blocking time is never higher.

PIN protection
If a user performs ten consecutive attempts to login using UID/PIN, providing correct UID but incorrect
PIN, the user account is permanently blocked for login using this UID/PIN. The user must login with
username/password and change the PIN to unblock this login method again.

Interface protection
If anyone performs twenty consecutive attempts to login via one particular interface and does not provide
either a valid username nor a valid uid the respective interface is blocked for 2 minutes.
During this period it is not possible to use that interface for any login. The blocking period is not progressive in
this case.

5.6.5 Access to controller data

Every request for reading data from the controller or writing data into it requires a user to be logged. Role of
the user who is currently logged-in must be assigned to the particular task.
There are 4 roles available:
Administrator role. All objects/commands are fixedly assigned to this role.
Roles 1..3 are configurable roles. Each communication object/command can be assigned independently
to each of these roles.
Modbus client role. Each communication object/command can be assigned to this role.
SNMP Manager role. Each communication object/command can be assigned to this role.

Reading data
For each object the Access right "Read" (R) is fixedly granted to each role. That means reading of data
(except some system objects) is available for any user.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 169

 Writing data
For each object the Access right "Write" (W) can be granted to one or more roles. For each object the Access
right "Write" (W) is fixedly granted to administrator role.

Special situations
There are several operations that require administrator role:
Programming firmware
Programming configuration
Managing user accounts
These rights can not be granted to any other role.

5.6.6 Cybernetic security

The cybernetic security is formed by:
Protection against a brute-force attack to the password
Secure method to reset the password
A new technology of encryption of the remote communication

Note: Cybernetic security was designed according to ISA 62443, level 2.

Protection against the brute force attack

Protection against a brute force attack will take place when an invalid password is entered repeatedly.
If the invalid password is entered 5 times, the controller gets blocked from entering the password for a
predetermined amount of time.
Each further entering of the invalid password cause the consequent blocking time is to be increased.
If the invalid password is entered repeatedly the controller gets blocked for entering the password
permanently and the password must be reset to a default value as described below.
Note: Blocking of the controller for entering the password has no influence on controller / Gen-set operation

Note: Permanent blocking cannot occur accidentally, just by user mistake. It can be practically triggered only
by a focused activity.

Resetting the administrator password

If the administrator password is lost or controller is permanently locked due to brute-force attack
protection, proceed according to a procedure described below:
IMPORTANT: There is a backup e-mail address defined in the controller to which and only which
ComAp will send the "password reset action code". Please be sure, that you have adjusted this e-
mail address correctly. Use InteliConfig to adjust the backup e-mail address

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 170

 Reset password procedure
1. Connect InteliConfig.
2. Get the password reset request code and send it via e-mail to support@[Link]

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 171

 3. Once you receive the reply from ComAp, copy the code from the e-mail (all characters inside the box
as indicated below)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 172

 4. Paste the code into the password reset window

Encryption of the communication

New technology CCS is used for an authentication and an encryption of the ComAp protocol via
Internet/ethernet/AirGate. This technology is based on strong and proven cryptographic algorithms and has
successfully passed penetration tests and cybersecurity audit.

Hardening the storage of a credentials

The user credentials (passwords and access code) have been moved to a hardened storage to prevent the
credentials to leak out of the hardware.
IMPORTANT: If a firmware rollback is inevitable, please keep in mind, when the firmware is first
time updated to the new firmware (which uses hardened storage) a seamless transfer of the
credentials into the hardened storage is performed. However, if the rollback to any previous
firmware (which does not use hardened storage) is performed the credentials are NOT transferred
back, so the previous firmware will not "see" any change of the credentials made through the
new firmware. Moreover, as the transfer of the credentials into the hardened storage is performed
only during very first update from an "old" to a "new" firmware, no change of the credentials
performed in the "old" firmware after the rollback will be visible in the "new" firmware after a next
update to the "new" firmware.

Web interface can be disabled

A setpoint has been added to disable the CM3-Ethernet built-in web interface.
IMPORTANT: As the web interface is using HTTP protocol it is recommended to disable the web
interface unless the controller is connected into a trusted secure network.

6 back to Controller setup

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 173

6 Communication
6.1 PC 174
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 180

6 back to Table of contents

6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 174
6.1.2 Remote communication 175

6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.

Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 50.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 471) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.

Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used

Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used

Connection via RS485

Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 or on board RS485 connector can be used for communication via RS485
connection.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 174

 Connection via Onboard RS485
RS485 interface uses RS485 Mode (page 228) port of the controller.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.

Connection via Ethernet

A plug-in communication module CM3-Ethernet is necessary for Ethernet connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 50.
This connection type is used for communication with the controller from InteliConfig or any other PC tool. This
connection can be used regardless of whenever the AirGate is switched on or off. Five remote clients can be
connected at the same time (direct or airgate connection).
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the CM3-Ethernet
IP address into the Gen-set address box in the PC tool.

Image 6.3 Ethernet cable is used

Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.

6.1.2 Remote communication

Ethernet LAN connection
Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the CM3-Ethernet module is reachable from the client
computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the CM3-Ethernet must have static IP address in
the respective local network.
Note: If you have troubles with setting up static and public IP address for direct connection from Internet try
using AirGate connection instead.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 175

 Image 6.4 Ethernet LAN connection

Note: For information how to setup an AirGate connection, see AirGate connection on page 58.

Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch the CM3-Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 501) to Manual. In that case all setpoints of IP settings (IP Address (page 502), Subnet Mask (page
502), Gateway IP (page 503), DNS IP Address 1 (page 504)) must be adjusted manually. If this method is
used several basic rules should be kept avoiding conflicts with the remaining network infrastructure:
The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which CM3-
Ethernet is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.

The second way to get the static IP address is to switch the CM3-Ethernet to automatic IP address mode.
Adjust the setpointIP Address Mode (page 501) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by
DHCP server. Then configure the DHCP server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address)
to the particular CM3-Ethernet according to its MAC address.

Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If CM3-Ethernet is connected to the Internet via a local Ethernet network then in the most cases port
forwarding must be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address
of CM3-Ethernet at the port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to
create multiple port forwarding rules in the same local network.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 176

 AirGate
This connection type is intended for remote connection from InteliConfig, or any other ComAp PC tool over
the Internet in situations, where obtaining fixed public IP address is not possible. Five remote clients can be
connected at the same time (direct or airgate connection).
This connection type is active if AirGate connection is enabled. Setpoint AirGate Address (page 506) must
contain AirGate server address. It can be entered in text form as well as numeric form. There is a public
AirGate server available at the address "[Link]".
Once the controller is connected to the Internet and the AirGate server address is properly adjusted then the
controller registers automatically to the server and an identification string AirGate ID is given to a controller,
which is visible at the controller screen.
In order to connect to InteliConfig following information have to be filled out:
AirGate ID
AirGate server
Controller address
User name and Password
AirGate Key

IMPORTANT: AirGate Key has to be configured. User with administrator rights has a possibility to
set up or change AirGate Key via InteliConfig using Tools -˃ Access Administration -˃ Change
AirGate Key.

SMS

Event SMS
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM2-4G-GPS communication module is able to send Event SMS
according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 520)

Note: First, the setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 493) must be adjusted to enable this function.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 177

 The following events can be received by mobile phone:
Engine Start/Stop
Manual Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop
Load on Gen-set
Message structure:
Gen-set Name (hh:mm:ss [Link])
hh:mm:ss Load on Gen-set

Alarm SMS
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM2-4G-GPS communication module is able to send Alarm SMS
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 522)
Sd Message (page 522)
BOC Message (page 521)

Note: First, the setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 493) must be adjusted to enable this function.

Message structure:
Gen-set Name
AL=(Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm x)

Note: An asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and an exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

Emails

Event Email
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM3-Ethernet communication module is able to send an Event
Email according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 520)

Note: Setpoints Email Address 1 (page 515) and SMTP Sender Address (page 513) or SMTP Server
Address (page 513) must be adjusted to enable this function.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 178

 Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3

Events
-----------------------------------------------
hh:mm:ss Event 1
hh:mm:ss Event 2
hh:mm:ss Event 3

Alarm Email
The InteliLite 4 controller equipped with the CM3-Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm
Emails according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 522)
Sd Message (page 522)
BOC Message (page 521)

Note: Setpoints Email Address 1 (page 515) and SMTP Sender Address (page 513) or SMTP Server
Address (page 513) must be adjusted to enable this function.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 179

 Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3

History events
-----------------------------------------------
0 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 1
-1 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 2
-2 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 3
Note: An asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and an exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

6.2.1 SNMP 180
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 182

6 back to Communication

6.2.1 SNMP
SNMP is an UDP-based client-server protocol used for providing data and events into a supervisory system
(building management system). The controller plays the role of a "SNMP Agent" while the supervisory system
plays the role of a "SNMP Manager".
CM3-Ethernet module is required for SNMP function
Supported versions – SNMP v1, SNMP v2 and SNMP v3
The SNMP Agent function is to be enabled by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page 509) in the CM-Ethernet
setpoint group. The setpoints SNMP RD Community String (page 510) and SNMP WR Community String
(page 511) in the same group can be used to customize the "community strings" for the read and write
operations which function like "passwords". All requests sent from the SNMP Manager must contain a
community string which matches with the community string adjusted in the controller otherwise the controller
will refuse the operation.

MIB table
The "MIB table" (Management Information Base) is a table which gives to the Manager a description of all
objects provided by the Agent.
The MIB table is specific for each controller type and configuration
The MIB table is to be exported from the controller configuration using InteliConfig
Controllers with identical firmware and configuration also share identical MIB table, however if the
configuration and/or firmware is not identical the MIB table is different and must be exported separately for
each controller.
The root OID of the InteliLite 4 controller is [Link].4.1.28634.30. Under this node can be found following sub-
nodes:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 180

 Notifications group (SMI v2 only) contains definitions of all notification-type objects that the Agent may
send to the Manager.
GroupRdFix contains read-only objects that exist in all controllers regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupRdCfg contains read-only objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupWrFix contains read-write objects that exist in all controllers regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupWrCfg contains read-write objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupW contains write-only objects.
NotificationData group contains objects that are accessible only as bindings of the notification messages.

SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and the SMI version that it supports.
Typically, SMI v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule. SMI v2 may also be used for SNMP
v1.

SNMP notifications
Except for the request-response communication model, in which the communication is controlled by the
Manager, there are also messages that the Agent sends without any requests. These messages are called
"Notifications" and inform the Manager about significant events which occurred in the Agent.
The controller can send notifications to two different SNMP Managers (two different IP addresses). The
addresses are to be adjusted in the CM-Ethernet setpoint group by the setpoints SNMP Traps IP Address 1
(page 510) and SNMP Traps IP Address 2 (page 510). If the Manager address is not adjusted the particular
notification channel is off. The controller will send the notifications in the format adjusted by the setpoint
SNMP Trap Format.
Each notification (kind of event) is identified by a unique identifier (Trap ID in SNMPv1 or Notification OID
in SNMPv2). This unique identifier gives the specific meaning to the notification message, e.g. Protection
1st level – Fuel Level – alarm activated.
All possible notifications and their identifiers are listed in the MIB table.
The notification message also contains controller name, serial number and textual description of the
event.

SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and the SMI version that it supports. Typically, SMI
v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may also be used for SNMP v1.
SNMP v3 is supported for request-response operations. Security levels supported: auth-nopriv, auth-priv. All
common protocols supported, up to AES256/SHA256 v3 is not supported for notifications, these are sent in
v1/v2 format according to selected format.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 181

 SNMP reserved objects

Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32 Reading: command return
value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code *)
Writing: changing controller
mode
pControllerMode groupWrCfg.8315 read, write Integer32
Reading: checking controller
mode

Note: *)
For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the description
of the Modbus protocol.

Operational events
This events are used for SNMP traps. See the list below:
Start commands of Gen-set
Start button
Remote start
Stop commands of Gen-set
Stop button
Remote stop
Breaker records
Load on Gen-set

6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP

MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used on serial interfaces (via on board RS485 connector or via CM-RS232-485
communication module). The MODBUS-RTU server must be activated by switching the setpoint COM1
Mode (page 471) or COM2 Mode (page 473) or RS485 Mode (page 228) into the Modbus position. The
serial speed for MODBUS-RTU communication is adjusted by the setpoint COM1 MODBUS
Communication Speed (page 472) or COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 474) or RS485
Modbus Speed (page 229).
MODBUS/TCP can be used on the Ethernet interface (CM3-Ethernet module is required). Up to 3 clients
can be connected simultaneously (MODBUS connection). The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated
by the setpoint MODBUS Server (page 508).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with Web connection and direct Ethernet /
AirGate connection.
IMPORTANT: Do not use setpoints for regulation purposes. Avoid fast periodical re-writing of any
setpoint. Use remote control registers instead.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 182

 Note: Modbus-RTU serial communication mode is 8-N-1 – startbit 1, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stopbit.

Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual
mapping of specific controller data objects to specific Modbus addresses, which depends on configuration,
can be exported into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several
special registers with fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.

MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
0000 .. Binary
Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
0999 objects
1000 ..
Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
2999
3000 .. Read: 03, 04
Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
3999 Write: 06, 16
4200 .. Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
7167 registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16

Configurable part of the map

The contents of the configurable part of the map is specified in the configuration table. It can be changed by
the customer as well as exported in a human-readable format using the configuration tool.
Discrete inputs
The discrete inputs are read-only objects located in the address range 0-999. The source ComAp objects for
discrete inputs can be:
Single bit of any value of any binary type.
Protection (e.g. 2nd-level protection of the state "xyz"). The input is high if the protection is active
regardless of if it is configured or not.
Input registers
The input registers are read-only numeric values located in the address range 1000-2999. The source
ComAp objects can be:
Any controller value of any data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is described in
Mapping data types to registers (page 184).
Holding registers
The holding registers are read-write numeric values located in the address range 3000-3999. The source
ComAp objects can be:
Any controller setpoint of a primitive data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is
described in Mapping data types to registers (page 184).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 183

 Default contents of the configurable part
The default map of Modbus objects contain following items. This map expects the PC tool does have the
function allowing the user to modify the map.

Object type Starting object address Controller object

Physical binary inputs CU + configured *) modules
Logical binary outputs
Discrete inputs 0000 Protections on binary inputs CU + configured *) modules
Protections on analog inputs CU + configured *) modules
All Built-in fixed protections
Input registers 1000 All configured *) visible values
Holding registers 3000 None

Note: *)
Present in the default configuration.

IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch and application must not change
when a new version of the firmware is created. If new objects are added they must be added to
free positions so, that the previous content is not affected.

IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch must not contain different values in
different applications at the same Modbus address. It means if a ComAp object does not make
sense in some application type the respective Modbus address must be left unassigned.

Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = 0
Unsigned8 1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = value, MSB
Integer16 2-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value, LSB
MSB = value, MSB
Unsigned16 2-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value, LSB
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
Integer32 4-byte signed integer 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
Unsigned32 4-byte unsigned integer 2
LSB1 = value, byte 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 184

 Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB = value, bits 8-15
Binary16 16-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
Binary32 32-bit binary value 2
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
LSB2 = ASCII value of the 4. character
…

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 185

 Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…

Note:
*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail
**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8

Error codes (exception codes)

An exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be
completed successfully.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Illegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.
02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with an object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other erroneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem
can be obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.

Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meanings. These registers are available in all controllers regardless
of the configuration.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 186

 Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 text data provided by MODBUS (e.g.
alarmlist messages).
Last application error. To be read after
the device returns the exception code
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32
04. It contains specific information
about the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
Reading: command return value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list
4242 - 4268 27 read Alarm 2. record in alarm list
4269 - 4295 27 read Alarm 3. record in alarm list
4296 - 4322 27 read Alarm 4. record in alarm list
4323 - 4349 27 read Alarm 5. record in alarm list
4350 - 4376 27 read Alarm 6. record in alarm list
4377 - 4403 27 read Alarm 7. record in alarm list
4404 - 4430 27 read Alarm 8. record in alarm list
4431 - 4457 27 read Alarm 9. record in alarm list
4458 - 4484 27 read Alarm 10. record in alarm list
4485 - 4511 27 read Alarm 11. record in alarm list
4512 - 4538 27 read Alarm 12. record in alarm list
4539 - 4565 27 read Alarm 13. record in alarm list
4566 - 4592 27 read Alarm 14. record in alarm list
4593 - 4619 27 read Alarm 15. record in alarm list
4620 - 4646 27 read Alarm 16. record in alarm list

List of commands and arguments

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via Modbus is as follows:
1. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use
function 16.
2. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 187

 3. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-
4208). Use function 3.
4. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker cannot be closed in the specific
situation etc.)

Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1

Note: *)
This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button

Modbus Remote Start/Stop

There is possibility when the controller is in AUTO mode to activate functionality remote start/stop by writing
data FF00 into register 4700 applying function 5. The message Modbus Remote Start is written into history.
To deactivate Modbus remote start/stop write data 0000.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 188

 Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
[Link]. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
BatteryVoltag Controller
01036 8213 V Integer 2 1 0 400
e I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register
address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
041Dhex
1053dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex 00F0hex CRC
2 bytes read 240dec

We read value 240 from register 01036. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 189

 Reading Nominal power
Configure a free MODBUS register for setpoint to be read. (InteliConfig -> ControllerConfiguration ->
Others -> MODBUS)
It is possible to export table of used MODBUS registers from InteliConfig.

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
[Link]. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
Nominal Basic
03000 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 0 5000
Power Settings

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 04CChex Number of registers CRC
1228dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 02hex 00C8hex CRC
2 bytes read 200dec

Read nominal power is 200 kW.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 190

 Reading all binary inputs as Modbus register

Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register
[Link]. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
Binary Controller
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - -
Inputs I/O

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 042Chex Number of registers CRC
1068dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Length of data Data
Controller
Modbus function 02hex 0012hex CRC
address
2 bytes read 00010010bin

Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use Modbus function 4 instead of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 191

 Reading specific binary inputs

Table: Binaries
Allowed MODBUS functions: 01, 02
Addresses Source Name of Bit Name
C.O.#
Modbus Addr. = Value Value Bit # Activated by protection Group
State #
Prot. Addr. = State Name of State (s):
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 0 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 Emergency Stop Controller I/O

We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register
address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
0001hex
0001dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function 01hex 01hex CRC
1 byte read active

The readed data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use Modbus function 2 instead of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 192

 Starting the Engine
User with Role 0 must have full access for Engine Cmd otherwise the command will not be invoked.

Table Reserved registers (page 186)

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32 Reading: command return
value
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code

Table List of commands and arguments (page 187)

Action Command code Argument Return value
Engine start 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE

Request 1/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 10 10 6F 00 03 06
Modbus function Register address
Controller address Number of registers Data length in bytes
10hex = 16dec 106Fhex = 4207dec

Request 2/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 FE 00 00 00 01 68 0B
Argument Command code CRC

Note: Command and argument may be written as one "packet" (function 16) or you can split it and write
argument (function 16) and after that write command code (function 6).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 193

 Nominal Power – writing
Configure a free MODBUS register for a setpoint to be written. (InteliConfig -> ControllerConfiguration
-> Others -> MODBUS).

Table: Setpoints
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Register
[Link]. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
(s)
Nominal Basic
03000 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Data
Register address
Controller address Modbus function 0064hex = CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec
100dec

Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec

Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
16 15 2
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x +x +x +1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: [Link] Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex
6 back to Communication

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 194

7 Technical data Communications
USB Device Non-isolated type B connector

USB Host Non-isolated type A connector

Power supply
RS485 Isolated
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
Non-isolated, 250 / 50 kbps,
Power consumption CAN
3.5 W Terminator impedance 120 Ω
(without modules)
Current measurement
RTC battery Replaceable (3 V)
4 A w/o BOUT consumption Measurement inputs 3ph Gen current
Fusing power
10 A Measurement range 5A
E-Stop fusing
9W Max. allowed current 10 A
Max. power dissipation
±20 mA for 0-2 A; 1 % of value for 2-5
Operating conditions Accuracy
A
Protection degree Input impedance <0.1 Ω
IP 65
(front panel)
E-Stop
Operating temperature -20 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Dedicated terminal for safe E-Stop input.
Operating temperature
-40 ˚C to +70 ˚C Physical supply for binary outputs 1 & 2.
for Low Temp. version
Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +80 ˚C Binary inputs
95 % non-condensing 8
Operating humidity Number
(EN 60068-2-30)
0-2 VDC close contact
5-25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm Close/Open indication
Vibration 6-36 VDC open contact
25-100 Hz, a = 400 m/s2
a = 500 m/s
2 Binary outputs
Shocks
Surrounding air temperature rating 70 °C Number 8

Suitable for pollution degree 2 BO1,2=5 A (60 °C); BO1,2=4 A

Max. current
(70 °C), BO3-8=0.5 A
D+
Switching to positive supply terminal
Max. output current 250 mA
Analog inputs
Charging fail
Adjustable
threshold 4, switchable (R/U/I)
Number
AIN 2
Voltage measurement
Range R = 0-2500 Ω; U = 0-10 V; I = 0-20 mA
Measurement inputs 3ph-n Gen voltage
R: ±2 % from value ±5 Ω in range 0-250 Ω
10-277 V AC / 10-480 V AC
R: ±4 % from value in range 250 Ω-2500
(EU)
Measurement range Accuracy Ω
10-346 V AC / 10-600 V AC
U: 1 % from value ±100 mV
(US/Canada)
I: 1 % from value ±0.2 mA
Linear measurement 350 V AC Ph-N
and protection range 660 V AC Ph-Ph +5 V Power supply output
Accuracy 1% Max. current 45 mA
Frequency range 30-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz)
Magnetic pickup
Input impedance 0.72 MΩ ph-ph , 0.36 MΩ ph-n
4 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 4 Hz to 1
Note: *) Maximum effective voltage on the voltage kHz
terminals must be lower than 300 V against minus Voltage input 6 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 1 to 5
battery voltage and for overvoltage CAT III or lower. range kHz
10 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 5 to 10
Display kHz

Type Build-in monochromatic 3.2" Frequency input

4 Hz to 10 kHz
Resolution 132 × 64 px range
Frequency
measurement 0.2 % from measured value
tolerance

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 195

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 196
8.2 Alarms 710
8.3 Modules 773

6 back to Table of contents

8.1 Controller objects

8.1.1 List of controller objects types
8.1.2 Setpoints 196
8.1.3 Values 542
8.1.4 Logical binary inputs 605
8.1.5 Logical binary outputs 632
8.1.6 Logical analog inputs 683
8.1.7 PLC 691

8.1.2 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated
writing of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which
5
can be overwritten up to 10 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become
damaged, when the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded.

For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 197).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 196

 List of setpoints

Group: Basic settings 207 Zero Power Mode 223

Subgroup: Name 207 Run Hours Source 223
Gen-Set Name 207 User Logging Record 224
Subgroup: Power settings 207 SW Key 224
Nominal Power 207 Subgroup: Phase Rotation 225
Nominal Power Split Phase 208 Phase Rotation 225
Subgroup: Current settings 208 Subgroup: HMI Settings 225
Nominal Current 208 Main Screen Line 1 225
Gen CT Ratio Prim 209 Main Screen Line 2 225
Gen CT Ratio Sec 209 Screen Filter 226
CT Location 210 Main Screen Gauge 226
Subgroup: Voltage settings 210 Subgroup: System Variability 226
Connection type 210 AUX Battery Support 226
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 212 PV Support 227
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 212 Group: Communication Settings 227
Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y 213 Subgroup: Controller Address 227
Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y 213 Controller Address 227
Nominal Voltage High Leg D 214 Subgroup: Modbus Server Address 228
Nominal Voltage SplitPhase 214 Modbus Server Address 228
Nominal Voltage MonoPhase 215 Subgroup: RS485 Settings 228
Gen VT Ratio 215 RS485 Mode 228
Subgroup: Frequency settings 216 RS485 Communication Speed 229
Nominal Frequency 216 RS485 Modbus Speed 229
Gear Teeth 216 RS485 Modbus Mode 230
Nominal RPM 217 Group: Engine settings 230
Subgroup: Controller settings 217 Subgroup: Starting 230
Controller Mode 217 Fuel Solenoid 230
Power On Mode 218 Dual Starter Sequence 231
GCB Control Mode 218 Cranking Attempts 231
BCB Control Mode 219 Maximum Cranking Time 232
LCB Control Mode 219 Cranking Fail Pause 232
PVCB Control Mode 220 Prestart Time 233
Reset To Manual 221 Starting RPM 233
Backlight Timeout 221 Starting Oil Pressure 234
Horn Timeout 222 Glow Plugs Time 234
Fail Safe Binary State 222 Idle RPM 235
Subgroup: Choke 235

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 197

 Choke Function 235 Transfer Wrn Delay 257
Choke Time 236 Subgroup: Battery Protections 257
Choke Start Temp 237 Battery Undervoltage 257
Choke Increment 238 Battery Overvoltage 258
Choke Voltage 239 Battery <> Voltage Delay 258
Choke Lead 240 Battery Charger Fail Delay 258
Subgroup: Starting Timers 241 Subgroup: Pulse Counters 259
Fuel Solenoid Lead 241 Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 259
Idle Time 241 Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 259
Minimal Stabilization Time 243 Subgroup: Ventilation 260
Maximal Stabilization Time 244 Ventilation Pulse Time 260
Run Only Block Delay 245 Subgroup: ECU Settings 260
Sd Ventilation Time 245 ECU Speed Adjustment 260
Subgroup: Aftertreatment 246 Manual ECU Activation Timeout 261
DPF Regeneration RPM 246 Group: Maintenance Timers 261
Subgroup: Stopping 246 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 1 261
Cooling Speed 246 Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 261
Subgroup: Stopping Timers 247 Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 262
Cooling Time 247 Maintenance Timer 1 Protection 262
Stop Time 247 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 2 263
After Cooling Time 248 Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours 263
Subgroup: D+ Function 248 Maintenance Timer 2 Interval 263
D+ Function 248 Maintenance Timer 2 Protection 264
D+ Threshold 249 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 3 264
D+ Delay 250 Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours 264
D+ Alarm Type 250 Maintenance Timer 3 Interval 265
Subgroup: Engine Protections 250 Maintenance Timer 3 Protection 265
Overspeed Sd 250 Group: Generator settings 266
Starting Overspeed Sd 251 Subgroup: Overload Protection 266

Starting Overspeed Time 252 Overload BOC 266

Starting Overspeed Protection 252 Overload Wrn 266

Underspeed Sd 253 Overload Delay 267

Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection 253 Subgroup: Current Protection 267

Fuel Tank Volume 253 Short Circuit BOC 267

Maximal Fuel Drop 253 Short Circuit BOC Delay 267

Maximal Fuel Drop Delay 254 IDMT Overcurrent Delay 268

Subgroup: Fuel Pump 255 Current Unbalance BOC 269

Fuel Pump On 255 Current Unbalance BOC Delay 269

Fuel Pump Off 256 Subgroup: Voltage Protection 270

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 198

 Generator Overvoltage Sd 270 Subgroup: Start/Stop Conditions 282
Generator Overvoltage Wrn 270 AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition 282
Generator Undervoltage Wrn 271 AUX Batt Start Voltage 283
Generator Undervoltage BOC 271 AUX Batt Stop Current 283
Generator <> Voltage Delay 272 AUX Batt Start Capacity 284
Voltage Unbalance BOC 272 AUX Batt Stop Capacity 284
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay 272 AUX Batt Start SoC 285
Subgroup: Frequency Protection 273 AUX Batt Stop SoC 285
Generator Overfrequency BOC 273 AUX Batt Start Delay 286
Generator Overfrequency Wrn 273 AUX Batt Stop Delay 286
Generator Underfrequency Wrn 273 Max AUX Batt Charging Time 287
Generator Underfrequency BOC 274 Subgroup: Full Charge Cycle 287
Generator <> Frequency Delay 274 Full Charge Cycle 287
Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 275 Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop Current 288
Reverse Power Level 275 Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop Capacity 288
Reverse Power Delay 275 Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop SoC 289
Group: Protections 276 Subgroup: Cycle Limitation 289
Subgroup: Overload Protection 276 Max AUX Batt Cycles Per Day 289
Overload Protection 276 Subgroup: Silent Hours 290
Subgroup: Current Protection 276 Silent Hours 290
IDMT Overcurrent Protection 276 Silent Hours Setup 291
Current Unbalance Protection 277 AUX Batt Silent Hours Voltage 291
Subgroup: Voltage Protection 277 AUX Batt Silent Hours Capacity 292
Generator <> Voltage Protection 277 AUX Batt Silent Hours SoC 292
Voltage Unbalance Protection 278 Subgroup: Low AUX Batt Level Protection 293
Subgroup: Frequency Protection 278 Low AUX Batt Level Discon Del 293
Generator Frequency Protection 278 Low AUX Batt Level Discon U 293
Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection 279 Low AUX Batt Level Discon Cap 294
Reverse Power Protection 279 Low AUX Batt Level Discon SoC 294
Subgroup: Speed Protection 279 Group: Dual operation 295
Underspeed Protection 279 Subgroup: Dual Operation 295
Subgroup: Phase Rotation Protection 280 Running Hours Max Difference 295
Phase Rotation Protection 280 Running Hours Base 295
Subgroup: AUX Battery Protection 280 Swap Gen-sets 296
Low AUX Batt Level Protection 280 Master Error Protection 296
Group: AUX Battery Settings 281 Slave Error Protection 297
Subgroup: AUX Battery Settings 281 Transfer Delay 297
AUX Batt Nominal Capacity 281 Group: Load Management 298
AUX Batt Chrg Current Character 281 Subgroup: Load Shedding 298

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 199

 Load Shedding Active 298 AIN Switch03 On 323
Load Shedding Level 298 AIN Switch03 Off 324
Load Shedding Delay 299 Subgroup: Analog Switches 4 325
Subgroup: Load Reconnection Settings 299 AIN Switch04 On 325
Load Reconnection Level 299 AIN Switch04 Off 326
Load Reconnection Delay 300 Group: Scheduler 326
Auto Load Reconnection 300 Subgroup: Time & Date 326
Subgroup: Dummy Load 301 Time 326
Dummy Load Active 301 Date 327
Dummy Load On 301 Time Stamp Period 327
Dummy Load On Delay 302 DST Switching Mode 328
Dummy Load Off 302 DST Period Rule 329
Dummy Load Off Delay 302 Time Mode 329

Group: User Buttons 303 Time Zone 330

Subgroup: User Buttons 303 Subgroup: Sunrise/Sunset 330
User Button 1 303 Sunrise/Sunset Function 330
User Button 2 304 Sunrise/Sunset Latitude 331
User Button 3 305 Sunrise/Sunset Longitude 331
User Button 4 306 Sunrise Offset 332
User Button 5 307 Sunset Offset 332
User Button 6 308 Subgroup: Timer 1 333
User Button 7 309 Timer 1 Function 333
User Button 8 310 Timer 1 Setup 334
User Button 9 311 Timer 1 First Occur. Date 334
User Button 10 312 Timer 1 First Occur. Time 335
User Button 11 313 Timer 1 Duration 335
User Button 12 314 Timer 1 Repetition 335
User Button 13 315 Timer 1 Repeated 336
User Button 14 316 Timer 1 Repeat Day 336
User Button 15 317 Timer 1 Day 337
User Button 16 318 Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week 337
Group: Analog Switches 319 Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month 337
Subgroup: Analog Switches 1 319 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month 338
AIN Switch01 On 319 Timer 1 Refresh Period 339
AIN Switch01 Off 320 Timer 1 Weekends 340
Subgroup: Analog Switches 2 321 Subgroup: Timer 2 341
AIN Switch02 On 321 Timer 2 Function 341
AIN Switch02 Off 322 Timer 2 Setup 342
Subgroup: Analog Switches 3 323 Timer 2 First Occur. Date 342

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 200

 Timer 2 First Occur. Time 343 Timer 4 Refresh Period 363
Timer 2 Duration 343 Timer 4 Weekends 364
Timer 2 Repetition 343 Subgroup: Timer 5 365
Timer 2 Repeated 344 Timer 5 Function 365
Timer 2 Repeat Day 344 Timer 5 Setup 366
Timer 2 Day 345 Timer 5 First Occur. Date 366
Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week 345 Timer 5 First Occur. Time 366
Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month 345 Timer 5 Duration 367
Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month 346 Timer 5 Repetition 367
Timer 2 Refresh Period 347 Timer 5 Repeated 368
Timer 2 Weekends 348 Timer 5 Repeat Day 368
Subgroup: Timer 3 349 Timer 5 Day 369
Timer 3 Function 349 Timer 5 Repeated Day In Week 369
Timer 3 Setup 350 Timer 5 Repeat Day In Month 369
Timer 3 First Occur. Date 350 Timer 5 Repeat Week In Month 370
Timer 3 First Occur. Time 351 Timer 5 Refresh Period 371
Timer 3 Duration 351 Timer 5 Weekends 372
Timer 3 Repetition 351 Subgroup: Timer 6 373
Timer 3 Repeated 352 Timer 6 Function 373
Timer 3 Repeat Day 352 Timer 6 Setup 374
Timer 3 Day 353 Timer 6 First Occur. Date 374
Timer 3 Repeated Day In Week 353 Timer 6 First Occur. Time 374
Timer 3 Repeat Day In Month 353 Timer 6 Duration 375
Timer 3 Repeat Week In Month 354 Timer 6 Repetition 375
Timer 3 Refresh Period 355 Timer 6 Repeated 376
Timer 3 Weekends 356 Timer 6 Repeat Day 376
Subgroup: Timer 4 357 Timer 6 Day 377
Timer 4 Function 357 Timer 6 Repeated Day In Week 377
Timer 4 Setup 358 Timer 6 Repeat Day In Month 377
Timer 4 First Occur. Date 358 Timer 6 Repeat Week In Month 378
Timer 4 First Occur. Time 359 Timer 6 Refresh Period 379
Timer 4 Duration 359 Timer 6 Weekends 380
Timer 4 Repetition 359 Subgroup: Timer 7 381
Timer 4 Repeated 360 Timer 7 Function 381
Timer 4 Repeat Day 360 Timer 7 Setup 382
Timer 4 Day 361 Timer 7 First Occur. Date 382
Timer 4 Repeated Day In Week 361 Timer 7 First Occur. Time 382
Timer 4 Repeat Day In Month 361 Timer 7 Duration 383
Timer 4 Repeat Week In Month 362 Timer 7 Repetition 383

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 201

 Timer 7 Repeated 384 Timer 10 Function 405
Timer 7 Repeat Day 384 Timer 10 Setup 406
Timer 7 Day 385 Timer 10 First Occur. Date 406
Timer 7 Repeated Day In Week 385 Timer 10 First Occur. Time 406
Timer 7 Repeat Day In Month 385 Timer 10 Duration 407
Timer 7 Repeat Week In Month 386 Timer 10 Repetition 407
Timer 7 Refresh Period 387 Timer 10 Repeated 408
Timer 7 Weekends 388 Timer 10 Day 408
Subgroup: Timer 8 389 Timer 10 Repeat Day 409
Timer 8 Function 389 Timer 10 Repeated Day In Week 409
Timer 8 Setup 390 Timer 10 Repeat Day In Month 410
Timer 8 First Occur. Date 390 Timer 10 Repeat Week In Month 410
Timer 8 First Occur. Time 390 Timer 10 Refresh Period 411
Timer 8 Duration 391 Timer 10 Weekends 412
Timer 8 Repetition 391 Subgroup: Timer 11 413
Timer 8 Repeated 392 Timer 11 Function 413
Timer 8 Repeat Day 392 Timer 11 Setup 414
Timer 8 Day 393 Timer 11 First Occur. Date 414
Timer 8 Repeated Day In Week 393 Timer 11 First Occur. Time 414
Timer 8 Repeat Day In Month 393 Timer 11 Duration 415
Timer 8 Repeat Week In Month 394 Timer 11 Repetition 415
Timer 8 Refresh Period 395 Timer 11 Repeated 416
Timer 8 Weekends 396 Timer 11 Day 416
Subgroup: Timer 9 397 Timer 11 Repeat Day 417
Timer 9 Function 397 Timer 11 Repeated Day In Week 417
Timer 9 Setup 398 Timer 11 Repeat Day In Month 418
Timer 9 First Occur. Date 398 Timer 11 Repeat Week In Month 418
Timer 9 First Occur. Time 398 Timer 11 Refresh Period 419
Timer 9 Duration 399 Timer 11 Weekends 420
Timer 9 Repetition 399 Subgroup: Timer 12 421
Timer 9 Repeated 400 Timer 12 Function 421
Timer 9 Day 400 Timer 12 Setup 422
Timer 9 Repeat Day 401 Timer 12 First Occur. Date 422
Timer 9 Repeated Day In Week 401 Timer 12 First Occur. Time 422
Timer 9 Repeat Day In Month 402 Timer 12 Duration 423
Timer 9 Repeat Week In Month 402 Timer 12 Repetition 423
Timer 9 Refresh Period 403 Timer 12 Repeated 424
Timer 9 Weekends 404 Timer 12 Day 424
Subgroup: Timer 10 405 Timer 12 Repeat Day 425

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 202

 Timer 12 Repeated Day In Week 425 Timer 15 First Occur. Time 446
Timer 12 Repeat Day In Month 426 Timer 15 Duration 447
Timer 12 Repeat Week In Month 426 Timer 15 Repetition 447
Timer 12 Refresh Period 427 Timer 15 Repeated 448
Timer 12 Weekends 428 Timer 15 Day 448
Subgroup: Timer 13 429 Timer 15 Repeat Day 449
Timer 13 Function 429 Timer 15 Repeated Day In Week 449
Timer 13 Setup 430 Timer 15 Repeat Day In Month 450
Timer 13 First Occur. Date 430 Timer 15 Repeat Week In Month 450
Timer 13 First Occur. Time 430 Timer 15 Refresh Period 451
Timer 13 Duration 431 Timer 15 Weekends 452
Timer 13 Repetition 431 Subgroup: Timer 16 453
Timer 13 Repeated 432 Timer 16 Function 453
Timer 13 Day 432 Timer 16 Setup 454
Timer 13 Repeat Day 433 Timer 16 First Occur. Date 454
Timer 13 Repeated Day In Week 433 Timer 16 First Occur. Time 454
Timer 13 Repeat Day In Month 434 Timer 16 Duration 455
Timer 13 Repeat Week In Month 434 Timer 16 Repetition 455
Timer 13 Refresh Period 435 Timer 16 Repeated 456
Timer 13 Weekends 436 Timer 16 Day 456
Subgroup: Timer 14 437 Timer 16 Repeat Day 457
Timer 14 Function 437 Timer 16 Repeated Day In Week 457
Timer 14 Setup 438 Timer 16 Repeat Day In Month 458
Timer 14 First Occur. Date 438 Timer 16 Repeat Week In Month 458
Timer 14 First Occur. Time 438 Timer 16 Refresh Period 459
Timer 14 Duration 439 Timer 16 Weekends 460
Timer 14 Repetition 439 Subgroup: Rental Timers 460
Timer 14 Repeated 440 Rental Timer 1 460
Timer 14 Day 440 Rental Timer 1 Wrn 462
Timer 14 Repeat Day 441 Rental Timer 2 462
Timer 14 Repeated Day In Week 441 Rental Timer 2 Wrn 464
Timer 14 Repeat Day In Month 442 Rental Timer BOC 464
Timer 14 Repeat Week In Month 442 Group: Geo-Fencing 465
Timer 14 Refresh Period 443 Subgroup: Geo Fencing 465
Timer 14 Weekends 444 Geo-Fencing 465
Subgroup: Timer 15 445 Subgroup: Position 465
Timer 15 Function 445 Home Latitude 465
Timer 15 Setup 446 Home Longitude 466
Timer 15 First Occur. Date 446 Subgroup: Fence 1 467

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 203

 Fence 1 Protection 467 Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 482
Fence 1 Radius 468 Direct Connection 482
Fence 1 Delay 468 Direct Connection Port 483
Subgroup: Fence 2 469 ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 483
Fence 2 Protection 469 Subgroup: E-mail Settings 484
Fence 2 Radius 470 SMTP Server Address 484
Fence 2 Delay 470 SMTP Sender Address 484
Group: Plug-In Modules 470 SMTP User Name 485
Subgroup: Slot A 470 SMTP User Password 485
Slot A 470 SMTP Encryption 486
Subgroup: Slot B 471 Email Address 1 486
Slot B 471 Email Address 2 487
Group: CM-RS232-485 471 Email Address 3 487
Subgroup: COM1 Setting 471 Email Address 4 488
COM1 Mode 471 Subgroup: Message Settings 488
COM1 Communication Speed 472 E-mail/SMS Language 488
COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed 472 Event Message 489
COM1 Modbus Mode 473 AHI Message 489
Subgroup: COM2 Setting 473 ALI Message 490
COM2 Mode 473 ECU FC Message 490
COM2 Communication Speed 473 Hst Message 491
COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed 474 Wrn Message 491
COM2 Modbus Mode 474 BOC Message 492
Group: CM-4G-GPS 475 Sd Override Message 492
Subgroup: Cellular Interface 475 Sd Message 493
Internet Connection 475 Telephone Number 1 493
Network Mode 475 Telephone Number 2 494
Access Point Name 475 Telephone Number 3 494
Connection Check IP1 476 Telephone Number 4 495
Connection Check IP2 477 Telephone Number 5 495
Connection Check IP3 478 Telephone Number 6 496
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 479 Telephone Number 7 496
DNS Mode 479 Telephone Number 8 497
DNS IP Address 1 479 Telephone Number 9 497
DNS IP Address 2 480 Telephone Number 10 498
IP Firewall 480 Subgroup: GPS Settings 498
Subgroup: AirGate Settings 481 GPS Tracking 498
AirGate Connection 481 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization 499
AirGate Address 481 NTP Clock Sync 499
Airgate Port 482

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 204

 NTP Server 499 SMTP User Password 514
GPS Clock Sync 500 SMTP Encryption 515
Time Zone 500 Email Address 1 515
Group: CM-Ethernet 501 Email Address 2 516
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings 501 Email Address 3 516
IP Address Mode 501 Email Address 4 517
IP Address 502 Subgroup: Messages Settings 517
Subnet Mask 502 BOC Message 517
Gateway IP 503 E-mail/SMS Language 518
DNS Mode 503 AHI Message 518
DNS IP Address 1 504 ALI Message 519
DNS IP Address 2 504 Hst Message 519
IP Firewall 505 Event Message 520
Subgroup: AirGate Settings 505 ECU FC Message 520
AirGate Connection 505 BOC Message 521
AirGate Address 506 Sd Override Message 521
AirGate Port 506 Sd Message 522
Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings 507 Wrn Message 522
Direct Connection 507 Subgroup: NTP Settings 523
Direct Connection Port 507 NTP Clock Synchronization 523
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout 508 NTP Server 523
Subgroup: MODBUS Settings 508 Time Zone 524
MODBUS Server 508 Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP 524
MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout 508 Subgroup: EFCP Settings 524
Subgroup: SNMP Settings 509 Earth Fault Current Protection 524
SNMP Agent 509 Earth Fault Delay 525
SNMP Trap Format 509 Earth Fault CT Input Range 525
SNMP Traps IP Address 1 510 Earth Fault CT Ratio 525
SNMP Traps IP Address 2 510 Group: Alternate Config 526
SNMP RD Community String 510 Subgroup: Configuration 1 526
SNMP WR Community String 511 Nominal RPM 1 526
SNMP Engine User Name 511 Nominal Frequency 1 527
SNMP Privacy Protocol 511 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 527
SNMP Authentication Protocol 512 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 527
SNMP Security Level 512 Nominal Current 1 528
Subgroup: E-mail Settings 513 Connection Type 1 528
SMTP Server Address 513 ECU Speed Adjustment 1 530
SMTP Sender Address 513 Nominal Power 1 530
SMTP UserName 514 Nominal Power Split Phase 1 531

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 205

Subgroup: Configuration 2 531
Nominal RPM 2 531
Nominal Frequency 2 532
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 532
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 532
Nominal Current 2 533
Connection type 2 533
ECU Speed Adjustment 2 535
Nominal Power 2 535
Nominal Power Split Phase 2 536
Subgroup: Configuration 3 536
Nominal RPM 3 536
Nominal Frequency 3 537
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 537
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 537
Nominal Current 3 538
Connection type 3 538
ECU Speed Adjustment 3 540
Nominal Power 3 540
Nominal Power Split Phase 3 541
6 back to Controller objects

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 206

 Group: Basic settings

Subgroup: Name

Gen-Set Name

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliLite 4 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8637 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-set
Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using InteliConfig or from controller's
configuration menu.
Note: If the Gen-set Name is "TurboRunHours", the running hours will be counted faster – 1 minute in
real will represent 1 hour.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Power settings

Nominal Power

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 32 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 8276 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 210) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power 1 (page
530), Nominal Power 2 (page 535) and Nominal Power 3 (page 540).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 207

 Nominal Power Split Phase

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 32 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 9977 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210)
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload
BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 210) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power Split Phase
1 (page 531), Nominal Power Split Phase 2 (page 536) and Nominal Power Split Phase 3 (page
541).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current settings

Nominal Current

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 8275 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210).
Description
It is current limit for Gen-set current protections and means maximal continuous Gen-set current. Nominal
Current can be different from Gen-set rated current value.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page
528), Nominal Current 2 (page 533) and Nominal Current 3 (page 538).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 208

 Gen CT Ratio Prim

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Default value 500 A Alternative config NO
Step 1A
Comm object 8274 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Current transformers ratio of Gen-set.

6 back to List of setpoints

Gen CT Ratio Sec

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] - [/1A / /5A]
Default value /5A Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 10556 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Current transformers ratio of Gen-set.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 209

 CT Location

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Gen-set / None [-]
Default value Gen-set Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11625 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts position of current measurement.

Gen-set Current CT's are physically placed on Gen-set (typically before GCB).
None There are no current CT's.

When option None is selected, following objects are hidden/changed:

Current screen is hidden
Generator Power screen is hidden
Statistics screens – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh are hidden
Main screen – kW meter is replaced by generator voltage meter
Generator L1-N voltage is displayed for Monopahse, Splitphase L1L2, Splitphase L1L3 and
High Leg delta connection types
Generator L1-L2 voltage is displayed for 3ph3w and 3ph4w connection types
Group Load is hidden
Group Statistics – values Gen-set kWh, Gen-set kVArh, Mains kWh are hidden

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Voltage settings

Connection type

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11628 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 210

 1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
High Leg Delta L2 >=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
3Ph Low Y L2 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
3Ph High Y L2 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L3 L2 <= 20 V
L3 >=100 V

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 211

 L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L2 L2 >= 100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
Mono Phase L2 <= 20 V
L3 <= 20 V
Voltage Autodetect shutdown

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 8277 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210).
Description
Nominal voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
(page 527), Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 532) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 537).

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 11657 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1
(page 527), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 532) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 537)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 212

 Nominal Voltage 3Ph Low Y

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 120 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 20811 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 210) Setpoints is set to
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 210) is 3Ph Low Y (controller can not distinguish between
the 4 wire and 3 wire connection), detected phase-phase voltage is lower than 300 V in all three phases
and phase-neutral voltage is lower than or equal to 160 V in all three phases.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage 3Ph High Y

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 277 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 20812 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 210) Setpoints is set to
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 210) is 3Ph High Y, detected phase-phase voltage is higher
than or equal to 300 V in all three phases and phase-neutral voltage is higher than 160 V in all three
phases.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 213

 Nominal Voltage High Leg D

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 277 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 20813 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 210) Setpoints is set to
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 210) is High Leg D. Set this setpoint to 120 V with high leg
delta system, which works with the high leg voltage 208 V (L2-N).

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage SplitPhase

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 120 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 20814 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 210) Setpoints is set to
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 210) is SplPhL1L2 or SplPhL1L3.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 214

 Nominal Voltage MonoPhase

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 120 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 20815 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Visible if one of the three Connection type (page 210) Setpoints is set to
Setpoint visibility
Autodetect.
Description
This setting is used as phase-neutral Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) by the voltage autodetect
function, if detected Connection type (page 210) is MonoPhase.

6 back to List of setpoints

Gen VT Ratio

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.01 .. 500.00 [V/V]
Default value 1.00 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0.01 V/V
Comm object 9579 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Generator voltage potential transformers ratio. If no VTs are used, adjust this setpoint to 1.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 215

 Subgroup: Frequency settings

Nominal Frequency

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 30.0 .. 65.0 [Hz]
Default value 50.0 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1.0 Hz
Comm object 8278 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Frequency 1 (page
527), Nominal Frequency 2 (page 532) and Nominal Frequency 3 (page 537).

6 back to List of setpoints

Gear Teeth

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] FGen->RPM / 1 .. 500 [-]
Default value FGen->RPM Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 8252 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to zero if no pick-up is used and
the Engine speed will be counted from the generator frequency.
Note: If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible overcranking,
which can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is not present immediately after
exceeding firing speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 216

 Nominal RPM

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 8253 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM – revolutions per minute).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal RPM 1 (page 526),
Nominal RPM 2 (page 531) and Nominal RPM 3 (page 536).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Controller settings

Controller Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO[-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8315 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via Modbus. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from InteliConfig.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 217

 Power On Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13000 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.
Previous When controller is power on, controller is switched to last mode before power off.
OFF When controller is power on, controller is switched to OFF Mode.

Note: Remote modes – In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint – controller mode is forced into mode selected via
LBI. After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode

6 back to List of setpoints

GCB Control Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Internal / External / No Button [-]
Default value Internal Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11771 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjusts control mode of GCB.

The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change of GCB
FEEDBACK (PAGE 620) causes Sd GCB Fail (page 760) immediately.
Internal
Incorrect reaction of the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 620) on internal GCB Close/Open
command causes Sd GCB Fail (page 760)
Controller does not control the GCB at all. The GCB is controlled externally, when
the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 620) get changed, then the event "GCB Opened" or
"GCB Closed" is recorded to the history log.
Controller always accept the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 620) without of issuing any
External
alarm.
When the Sd protection shuts down the engine, the GCB stays closed. The BOC
protection does not open the GCB, controller goes to cooling when the BOC
protection is tripped (GCB stays closed until opened externally).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 218

 IMPORTANT: Gen-set with closed GCB is not blocked against starting.
GCB button and LBI GCB button are deactivated.
When selected in AMF mode, there is active warning Wrn Wrong GCB
Control Mode (page 745). The behavior of the controller is the same as GCB
No Button
Control Mode would be switched to Internal
When selected in MRS mode and MAN mode the GCB is closed
automatically the same way as in Auto mode – no manual command needed.

6 back to List of setpoints

BCB Control Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Internal / External / No Breaker[-]
Default value No Breaker Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 19007 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjusts control mode of BCB.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change or incorrect
reaction of BCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 612) causes BCBT BCB Fail (page
Internal
748) immediately.
BCB is closed all the time unless there is BCBT alarm.
Controller does not control the BCB at all. The BCB is controlled externally, when the
BCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 612) get changed, then the event "BCB Opened" or "BCB
External
Closed" is recorded to the history log. Controller always accept the BCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 612) without of issuing any alarm.
Controller does not control the BCB at all. Controller behaves like BCB is closed all
No Breaker
the time.

6 back to List of setpoints

LCB Control Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Internal / External / No Breaker[-]
Default value No Breaker Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 19006 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 219

 Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjusts control mode of LCB.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change or incorrect
reaction of LCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 622) causes LCBT LCB Fail (page
Internal
751) immediately.
LCB is closed all the time unless there is LCBT alarm.
Controller does not control the LCB at all. The LCB is controlled externally, when the
LCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 622) get changed, then the event "LCB Opened" or "LCB
External
Closed" is recorded to the history log. Controller always accept the LCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 622) without of issuing any alarm.
Controller does not control the LCB at all. Controller behaves like LCB is closed all
No Breaker
the time.

6 back to List of setpoints

PVCB Control Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Internal / External / No Breaker[-]
Default value No Breaker Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 19451 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjusts control mode of PVCB.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

The breaker is controlled only from controller. Any unexpected change or incorrect
reaction of PVCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 625) causes PVCBT PVCB Fail (page
Internal
750) immediately.
PVCB is closed all the time unless there is PVCBT alarm.
Controller does not control the PVCB at all. The PVCB is controlled externally, when
the PVCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 625) get changed, then the event "PVCB Opened" or
External
"PVCB Closed" is recorded to the history log. Controller always accept the PVCB
FEEDBACK (PAGE 625) without of issuing any alarm.
Controller does not control the PVCB at all. Controller behaves like PVCB is closed
No Breaker
all the time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 220

 Reset To Manual

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9983 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN mode when there is a red alarm in
the alarm list and fault reset button is pressed. This is a safety function that prevents the Gen-set starting
again automatically in specific cases when fault reset button is pressed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Backlight Timeout

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 10121 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then
the display will be backlighted all the time.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 221

 Horn Timeout

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 600 s / Horn Reset [-]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8264 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 662) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 662) output is active
1 .. 600 [s]
when this timeout elapsed.
Horn reset LBO HORN (PAGE 662) is deactivated by Fault reset button or by Horn reset button.

Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn
timeout has elapsed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Fail Safe Binary State

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Log0 / Log1 / Last valid state [-]
Default value Last valid state Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 21215 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts behavior of the controller when the received binary input value are invalid due to the
loss of communication for example. Binary inputs are received from external devices like ECUs or CAN
modules.

Log0 All invalid values are replaced by logical zero.

Log1 All invalid values are replaced by logical one.
Last Valid State All invalid values are replaced by the last valid state.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 222

 Zero Power Mode

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 360 [min]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8548 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The controller is switched to Zero Power Mode when there is no user interaction with the controller for the
preset time period. For the controller wake up press button Start or activate Binary Input 1. The controller
will not switch to Zero Power Mode if generator is running. In Zero Power Mode binary outputs go to high
impedance.
Note: Power consumption of controller in Zero Power Mode is 0 mA. Controller is internally
disconnected from power supply.

Note: While there is USB power present (USB cable plugged) the controller is able to turn off when
there is no user interaction but wake up is not possible. USB power has to be cut off (USB cable un-
plugged).

6 back to List of setpoints

Run Hours Source

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] AUTO / ECU / INTERNAL [-]
Default value AUTO Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13345 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint selects source of running hours.
AUTO If there is some ECU which send valid running hours, then this value is used.
Otherwise value from internal counter is used.
ECU Running hours are taken from ECU if ECU send valid data. It is not possible to set
and reset this value in statistics.
INTERNAL Running hours are taken from internal counter. It is possible to set and reset this
value in statistics.

Note: It is not necessary to restart controller when this setpoint is changed. Change of this setpoint is
applied immediately.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 223

 User Logging Record

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23885 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoints enables / disables history records when any user is log in.

Every time user login/logout to the controller, there is a message: User with user index
Enabled
(n) logged in/out … written in the history.
Disabled Login/logout message is not written into history.

6 back to List of setpoints

SW Key

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value - Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 24258 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to fill SW Key to the controller to activate Extended features (page 112).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 224

 Subgroup: Phase Rotation

Phase Rotation

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Clockwise / Counterclockwise [-]
Default value Clockwise Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15122 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjust the phase sequence of voltage terminals.
Note: This protection can be disabled by setpoint Phase Rotation Protection (page 280).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: HMI Settings

Main Screen Line 1

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] RPM / PF / Run Hours / ATT / AIN1 / AIN2 / AIN3 / AIN4 [-]
Default value PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13346 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 1 on Main screen.
6 back to List of setpoints

Main Screen Line 2

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] RPM / PF / Run Hours / ATT / AIN1 / AIN2 / AIN3 / AIN4 [-]
Default value RPM Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14628 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts line 2 on Main screen.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 225

 Screen Filter

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enable / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15889 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Every analog value showed on CU screen is filtered when setpoint is enabled.
6 back to List of setpoints

Main Screen Gauge

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Gen kW / Gen V / RPM [-]
Default value Gen kW Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20578 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts value which is displayed on main screen gauge.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: System Variability

AUX Battery Support

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 19017 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables AUX battery in hybrid applications. When setpoint is enabled, controller requires
values from AUX battery - mainly AUX Battery SoC and AUX Battery Current. Other values, like AUX
Battery SoH, AUX Battery Voltage, AUX Battery SoH, AUX Battery Cycles, etc. can be also received.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 226

 PV Support

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 19008 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables PV in hybrid applications. When setpoint is enabled, controller requires values from
PV - mainly PV Current and PV Voltage.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Communication Settings

Subgroup: Controller Address

Controller Address

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 24537 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1)
so that more controllers can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed e.g. InteliConfig.
IMPORTANT: This address is not used for MODBUS communication.

Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 227

 Subgroup: Modbus Server Address

Modbus Server Address

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 247 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 24188 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1)
so that more controllers or other devices can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed from Modbus
terminal.
IMPORTANT: This address is used only for MODBUS communication.

Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: RS485 Settings

RS485 Mode

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Settings
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / Dual Master / Dual Slave [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24134 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Communication protocol switch for on-board RS485.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
Dual Master Dual operation protocol – master function.
Dual Slave Dual operation protocol – slave function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 228

 RS485 Communication Speed

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24135 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
If the direct mode is selected on on-board RS485, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.
Note: This speed is also used for communication during Dual Operation.

6 back to List of setpoints

RS485 Modbus Speed

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24141 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 229

 RS485 Modbus Mode

Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Settings
Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Default value 8N1 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24020 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication mode of Modbus-RTU.

Possible options
8N1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
8N2 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
8E1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Engine settings

Subgroup: Starting

Fuel Solenoid

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Diesel / Gas [-]
Default value Diesel Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9100 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Determines behavior of the Binary output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654)
Diesel: Output is activated before binary output STARTER 1 (PAGE 675). Lead of output is
adjusted via setpoint Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 241). The output is deactivated if
Emergency Stop comes or Gen-set is stopped and in pause between repeated starts.

Gas: Output is activated together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 663) if RPM is over the
30 RPM (fixed value). Output is deactivated after stop command or in pause between
repeated start.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 230

 Dual Starter Sequence

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1-2 / 11-22 / 111-222 [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 16644 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setpoint is used to enable LBO STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) by choosing the predefined sequence.
Dual Starter Sequence options:
Disabled (Default)
1-2 – Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 676)
according to the order of option pattern 1-2.
11-22 – Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then Starter 1 then
STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) then STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) according to the order of option pattern 11-22.
111-222 – Controller in cranking phase will activate STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) then Starter 1 then
Starter 1 then STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) then Starter 2 and then Starter 2 according to the order of
option pattern 111-222.

6 back to List of setpoints

Cranking Attempts

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 20 [-]
Default value 3 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 8255 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maximal number of cranking attempts.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 231

 Maximum Cranking Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8256 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maximum time limit of cranking time.
IMPORTANT: There is a protection against broken pinion on starter. In case that there are
no RPM after 5 seconds of starting, cranking is interrupted and cranking fail pause follows.

6 back to List of setpoints

Cranking Fail Pause

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 5 .. 60 [s]
DefaultFixed
8s Alternative config NO
value
Step 1s
Comm object 8257 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Pause between Cranking Attempts (page 231). PRESTART (PAGE 669) output is active in this pause until
Cranking Fail Pause elapses.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 232

 Prestart Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 3600.0 [s]
Default value 2.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 s
Comm object 8394 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time of closing of the PRESTART (PAGE 669) output prior to the engine start. Set to zero if you want to leave
the output PRESTART (PAGE 669) open.

Image 8.1 Prestart Time

6 back to List of setpoints

Starting RPM

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 5 .. 50 [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 217)
Comm object 8254 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the "firing" speed level as percent value of the Nominal RPM (page 217). If this level
is exceeded the engine is considered as started.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 233

 Starting Oil Pressure

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 0,1 .. 10,0 [bar]
Default value 4,5 bar Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 bar
Comm object 9681 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Oil pressure limit for starting. The controller will stop cranking (STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) goes OFF) if the oil
pressure rises above this limit.
Option Disabled – when this option is selected, Oil Pressure value (value from CU analog Oil Pressure,
value from ECU analog Oil pressure and state of binary input Oil Pressure) is not used for disengagement
of starter and for engine running evaluation.
IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

Glow Plugs Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. Prestart Time (page 233) [s]
Default value 0.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 1.0 s
Comm object 14412 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the time before starting when logical binary output GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 660) will be
active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 234

 Idle RPM

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 900 RPM Alternative config NO
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9946 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts idle speed of engine.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Choke

Choke Function

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled /Fixed Time / Temp Based [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15717 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 642) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines choke function behavior.
Disabled Choke function is disabled and logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 642) is
activated under no circumstances.
Fixed Time Choke time is fixedly defined by Choke Time (page 236) setpoint.
Temp Based Choke time is calculated using actual engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoints
Choke Start Temp (page 237) and Choke Increment (page 238) are taken
into consideration.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 235

 Choke Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 13011 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 642) is configured and setpoint Choke Function
Setpoint visibility
(page 235) = Fixed Time.
Description
Defines time logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE 642) is activated for when fixed time is used. When
setpoint Choke Function (page 235) is set to Temp Based value, Choke Time value have no effect.
Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 240) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches value set by Choke Time setpoint. This mean Choke Timeshould be longer than
Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 236

 Choke Start Temp

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -20,0 .. 80,0 [°C]
Default value 0,0 °C Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 °C
Comm object 15716 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 642) is configured and setpoint Choke Function
Setpoint visibility
(page 235) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the base temperature for Choke function. When temperature will be higher than this
setpoint, Choke Time will be always 0. When temperature will be lower than this setpoint, Choke Time will
be calculated by curve adjusted via setpoint Choke Increment (page 238). When setpoint Choke
Function (page 235) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke Start Temp has no effect.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 237

 Choke Increment

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,00 .. 20,00 [s/°C]
Default value 0,00 s/°C Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 s/°C
Comm object 15715 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 642) is configured and setpoint Choke Function
Setpoint visibility
(page 235) = Temp Based.
Description
This setpoint adjust the maximal time of activation of binary output CHOKE (PAGE 642). Calculated time
depends on engine (coolant) temperature. Setpoint adjust curve which is used for calculating actual
Choke Time. When setpoint Choke Function (page 235) is set to Fixed Time value, setpoint Choke
Increment has no effect.

Note: If setpoint Choke Lead (page 240) is set to nonzero value, total time the CHOKE output is
activated still matches calculated value (based on actual temperature and setpoints Choke Increment
and Choke Start Temp (page 237)) This mean that adjusted parameters should ensure that
calculated Choke Time will be longer than Choke Leadto ensure expected Choke behavior.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 238

 Choke Voltage

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1–100 [%]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 15718 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 642) is configured.
Description
This setpoint adjust threshold level for deactivation of CHOKE (PAGE 642) binary output. When generator
voltage is higher than this level, then logical binary output CHOKE is deactivated. In multiphase system it is
sufficient to deactivate CHOKE LBO when at least one voltage crosses this threshold. In case setpoint
Choke Voltage is set to Disabled value, no voltage is taken into account and CHOKE LBO isn't deactivated
on the voltage basis.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 239

 Choke Lead

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. Prestart Time [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 15774 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only when LBO CHOKE (PAGE 642) is configured.
Description
This setpoint adjust the lead of logical binary output CHOKE. CHOKE (PAGE 642) is activated before logical
binary output STARTER 1 (PAGE 675).
Note: In case Choke Lead is longer than 8 s (cranking fail pause), Choke Lead will be limited to 8 s
(cranking fail pause time). This limitation is applied only for cranking fail pause, Choke Lead in Prestart
stays unchanged.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 240

 Subgroup: Starting Timers

Fuel Solenoid Lead

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 10525 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay between FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) and STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) logical binary [Link]
SOLENOID (PAGE 654) is active before STARTER 1 (PAGE 675). Lead time is adjusted via this setpoint.

Image 8.2 Fuel Solenoid Lead

Note: LBO PRESTART (PAGE 669) goes to logical zero when Fuel Solenoid Lead goes to logical one.

Note: This setpoint is used only for diesel Fuel Solenoid (page 230).

6 back to List of setpoints

Idle Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 12 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9097 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Idle Time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM (page 233). Start fail is detected when during
Idle state RPM decreases below 2 RPM.
The output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) remains inactive during the idle period. Binary output Idle/Nominal

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 241

 opens during Cooling period again. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.
Note: When controller is in the MAN mode, it is possible to finish the Idle Time count down by pushing
the Start button.

Image 8.3 Idle Time 1

Image 8.4 Idle Time 2

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 242

 Minimal Stabilization Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. Maximal Stabilization Time (page 244) [s]
Default value 2s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8259 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the Gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the controller will wait for a period
adjusted by this setpoint before closing GCB, even if the generator voltage and frequency are already in
limits.
Note: When starting the engine, setpoint should be set >300 s.

Image 8.5 Minimal Stabilization Time

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 243

 Maximal Stabilization Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Minimal Stabilization Time (page 243) .. 3600 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8313 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the Gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the generator voltage and frequency
must get within limits within this period of time, otherwise an appropriate shutdown alarm (generator
voltage and/or frequency) is issued.
Note: When starting the engine, setpoint should be set >300 s.

Image 8.6 Maximal Stabilization Time

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 244

 Run Only Block Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 5.0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 10023 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
During the start of the Gen-set, some engine protections have to be blocked (e.g. Oil pressure). The
protections are unblocked after the Protect Hold Off. The time starts after reaching Starting RPM.
The protection blocking is based on the operating state of the engine automat. Once the engine automat
reaches the state "Running" the protection with this blocking condition gets unblocked after delay Run
Only Block Delay.

6 back to List of setpoints

Sd Ventilation Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 60 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9695 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
In case Fuel Solenoid (page 230) is set to GAS, the Sd Ventilation Time adjusts the time of the starter to
be switched on for engine pre-ventilation in the case of a first start attempt after shutdown or controller
switch-on.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 245

 Subgroup: Aftertreatment

DPF Regeneration RPM

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1000 .. 2500 [RPM]
Default value 1500 [RPM] Alternative config YES
Step 1 [RPM]
Comm object 19049 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if ECU is configured and Aftertreatment support is enabled.
Description
This setpoint defines the speed during the Manual DPF regeneration procedure, when the LBI
DESCRIPTION (PAGE 609) is closed. Overspeed protection are calculated based on this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Stopping

Cooling Speed

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Idle / Nominal [-]
Default value Nominal Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10046 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Selects the function of the binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) during engine cooling state.
Idle Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off.
Nominal Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active.

Note: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for Idle speed is requested.

Note: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) must be configured and connected to speed governor.
Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 246

 Subgroup: Stopping Timers

Cooling Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8258 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Runtime of the unloaded Gen-set to cool the engine before stop.

6 back to List of setpoints

Stop Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 9815 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period after the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
654) has been de-energized and the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 677) energized. The Stop Solenoid output is
deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off.

Image 8.7 Stop Time 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 247

 Image 8.8 Stop Time 2

6 back to List of setpoints

After Cooling Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Default value 180 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8662 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Runtime of engine after cooling pump. Binary output COOLING PUMP (PAGE 643) is active when the engine
starts deactivates after timer set in this setpoint elapses (timer starts counting down as soon as engine
switches to stop phase).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: D+ Function

D+ Function

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / ChargeFail / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9683 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Behavior of D+ terminal.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 248

 Enabled The D+ terminal is used for both functions – "running engine" detection and
charge fail detection.
The D+ terminal is used for charge fail detection only. There are 2 operation
states. First state is excitation of alternator - this state is active until Idle Time
ChargeFail
elapses. Second state is evaluation of alternator voltage - this state is active
after Idle Time elapses until engine is stopped.
Disabled The D+ terminal is not used.

Image 8.9 D+ Function 2

Note: Delay of this function is adjusted via D+ Delay (page 250) setpoint, threshold of this function is
adjusted via D+ Threshold (page 249) setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

D+ Threshold

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0..100 [%]
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of actual value of Battery Volts (page 565)
Comm object 14959 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 248) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts threshold level for D+ Function (page 248). This treshold has to be reached before
Idle time elapses.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 249

 D+ Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..255 [s]
Default value 1s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14960 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 248) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay for D+ Function (page 248). This delay is used for:
Alarm Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 731).
For engine running condition – evaluation of Stop Fail alarm based on D+ value

6 back to List of setpoints

D+ Alarm Type

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] No Protec/Wrn/Sd [-]
Default value Wrn Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15751 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if setpoint D+ Function (page 248) is not set to Disabled value.
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of alarm Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 731).
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Engine Protections

Overspeed Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Underspeed Sd (page 253) 50 .. 200 [%]
Default value 115% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 217)
Comm object 8263 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for over speed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 250

 Starting Overspeed Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 100 ..200 [%]
Default value 115% Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 11033 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The rise up threshold for overspeed protection. The time for which this level is accepted is defined as
Starting Overspeed Time (page 252). This period starts to be counted once the RPM exceeds the value
Starting RPM (page 233). The threshold Overspeed Sd (page 250) starts to be valid once this period
elapsed.
The type of reaction of the overspeed protection within the Starting Overspeed Time (page 252) is
defined by the setpoint Starting Overspeed Protection (page 252), so it is either considered as Sd
Overspeed or unsuccessful start attempt. Then the next start attempt is enabled once the engine was
stopped. History record Starting Overspeed should be written in this case.

Image 8.10 Staring speed overshoot › Ovespeed Sd

Image 8.11 Staring speed overshoot ‹ Ovespeed Sd

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 251

 6 back to List of setpoints

Starting Overspeed Time

Setpoint group Engine protection Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 255 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14108 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time when Starting Overspeed Sd (page 251) level is used for overspeed protection. This time starts
countdown when starting RPM are reached.

6 back to List of setpoints

Starting Overspeed Protection

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] OverSpd Sd / NextStartAt [-]
Default value OverSpd Sd Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15808 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The setpoint allows user to chose which kind of protection will be triggered if speed limit is reached during
Starting Overspeed Time (page 252).
Sd overspeed option will result in controller shutting down the engine and displaying Sd Starting
Overspeed alarm and NextStartAt option will result in controller stopping the engine and trying to start
again. The number of attempts is defined by Cranking Attempts (page 231).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 252

 Underspeed Sd

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. Overspeed Sd (page 250) [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 217)
Comm object 8260 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for underspeed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Fuel Theft Protection

Fuel Tank Volume

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 10 000 [l]
Default value 200 l Alternative config NO
Step 1l
Comm object 11103 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 688) is or ECU is configured
Description
Define a capacity of Gen-set fuel tank.
6 back to List of setpoints

Maximal Fuel Drop

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 50 [%/h]
Default value 25 %/h Alternative config NO
Step 1%/h
Comm object 12373 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Setpoint indicates the maximum allowable drop of fuel in fuel tank per running hour. When the engine is
not running the maximal allowed fuel drop-off is preset to 5% of total tank volume per hour.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 253

 Maximal Fuel Drop Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step s
Comm object 14683 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
When the value of fuel drop per hour is higher than Maximal Fuel Drop (page 253) this delay starts count
down. After count down of this delay alarm Wrn Fuel Theft (page 745) is activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 254

 Subgroup: Fuel Pump

Fuel Pump On

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. Fuel Pump Off (page 256) [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10100 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) on.

Image 8.12 Fuel Pump On

IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 619) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On and
Fuel Pump Off (page 256) are not evaluated!

Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 255

 Fuel Pump Off

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Fuel Pump On (page 255) .. 100 [%]
Default value 90 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 10101 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) off.

Image 8.13 Fuel Pump Off

IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 619) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page
255) and Fuel Pump Off are not evaluated!

Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 256

 Transfer Wrn Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 10685 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) is configured
Description
If the controller does not see the fuel increase during fuel transfer within this time alarm Wrn Fuel
Transfer Failed (page 731) will be displayed and the FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) will be turned off. Alarm Wrn
Fuel Transfer Failed (page 731) will be displayed but this alarm becomes immediately inactive and it will
be possible to delete this message by the Fault reset button. If the fault is deleted the controller will initiate
the transfer again.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Battery Protections

Battery Undervoltage

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 8.0 V .. Battery Overvoltage (page 258) [V]
Default value 18.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Comm object 8387 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 257

 Battery Overvoltage

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 257) .. 40.0 [V]
Default value 36.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Comm object 9587 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.
6 back to List of setpoints

Battery <> Voltage Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
DefaultFixed
5s Alternative config NO
value
Step 1s
Comm object 8383 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Battery Undervoltage (page 257) and Battery Overvoltage (page 258) protection.
IMPORTANT: This is a fixed parameter, it isn't possible to adjust it in any manner. This
parameter isn't visible either in controller or in PC tools.

6 back to List of setpoints

Battery Charger Fail Delay

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 [min]
Default value 5 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 11374 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned with LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 612)
Description
Delay for LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 612).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 258

 Subgroup: Pulse Counters

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 ... 65 000 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 10994 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 624) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at
the input PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 624) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this
setpoint, the counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 574) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is
reset to 0. Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
6 back to List of setpoints

Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 ... 65 000 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 10995 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only if LBI PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 625) is configured
Description
This setpoint adjusts the rate of increasing of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at
the input PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 625) and if the input pulses counter reaches value given by this
setpoint, the counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 574) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is
reset to 0. Both counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 259

 Subgroup: Ventilation

Ventilation Pulse Time

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0–3600 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 15767 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only when logical binary output VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE 682) or VENTILATION
Setpoint visibility
OFF PULSE (PAGE 682) is configured.
Description
This setpoint defines duration of pulse generated on logical binary outputs VENTILATION ON PULSE (PAGE
682) or VENTILATION OFF PULSE (PAGE 682) at the moment when logical binary output VENTILATION (PAGE
682) is activated or deactivated respectively.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: ECU Settings

ECU Speed Adjustment

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 9948 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50 %. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 260

 Manual ECU Activation Timeout

Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 300 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 19707 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
The setpoint allows user to set length of ECU manual activation in OFF mode. LBO ECU Power Relay is
activated by Start button. This LBO is active until Stop button is pressed, or until timeout elapses or until
mode is changed.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Maintenance Timers

Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 1

Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 13853 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer counts down when engine is running. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counts down to negative values. When the value 10 000 (Disabled) is set, the Maintenance function is
disabled and the counter value disappears from controllers statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 261

 Maintenance Timer 1 Interval

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 36 [month] / Disabled
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 month
Comm object 20583 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer counts down all the time, setting is done in months, but actual Maintenance Timer 1
Interval (page 570) value is displayed and counted in days. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the
timer still counts down to negative values. When the value 37 (Disabled) is set, then the maintenance
function is disabled and counter does not count and the counter value disappears from controllers
statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again. Setting of the setpoint does not change
when the reset is done, only the Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 570) value changes to reflect reset
of the maintenance timer.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 1 Protection

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Warning / BOC [-]
Default value Warning Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20586 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Type of the maintenance alarm of both Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 261) and Maintenance
Timer 1 Interval (page 262).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 262

 Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 2

Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 13854 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer counts down when engine is running. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counts down to negative values. When the value 10 000 (Disabled) is set, the Maintenance function is
disabled and the counter value disappears from controllers statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 2 Interval

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 36 [month] / Disabled
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 month
Comm object 20584 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer counts down all the time, setting is done in months, but actual Maintenance Timer 2
Interval (page 570) value is displayed and counted in days. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the
timer still counts down to negative values. When the value 37 (Disabled) is set, then the maintenance
function is disabled and counter does not count and the counter value disappears from controllers
statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again. Setting of the setpoint does not change
when the reset is done, only the Maintenance Timer 2 Interval (page 570) value changes to reflect reset
of the maintenance timer.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 263

 Maintenance Timer 2 Protection

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Warning / BOC [-]
Default value Warning Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20587 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Type of the maintenance alarm of both Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page 263) and Maintenance
Timer 2 Interval (page 263).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Maintenance Timer 3

Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 13855 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer counts down when engine is running. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counts down to negative values. When the value 10 000 (Disabled) is set, the Maintenance function is
disabled and the counter value disappears from controllers statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 264

 Maintenance Timer 3 Interval

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 36 [month] / Disabled
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1 month
Comm object 20585 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Maintenance timer counts down all the time, setting is done in months, but actual Maintenance Timer 3
Interval (page 571) value is displayed and counted in days. If it reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the
timer still counts down to negative values. When the value 37 (Disabled) is set, then the maintenance
function is disabled and counter does not count and the counter value disappears from controllers
statistics.
Reset of the timer can be done by adjusting this setpoint again. Setting of the setpoint does not change
when the reset is done, only the Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (page 571) value changes to reflect reset
of the maintenance timer.

6 back to List of setpoints

Maintenance Timer 3 Protection

Setpoint group Maintenance Timers Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Warning / BOC [-]
Default value Warning Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20588 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Type of the maintenance alarm of both Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page 264) and Maintenance
Timer 3 Interval (page 265).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 265

 Group: Generator settings

Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Overload Wrn (page 266) .. 200 [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 207)
Comm object 8280 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for overload of generator (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker
Open and Gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Overload Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. Overload BOC (page 266) [%]
Default value 120 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 207)
Comm object 9685 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold level for overload of generator (in % of Nominal Power (page 207)) protection. This is only
warning.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 266

 Overload Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 5.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8281 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for protections Overload BOC (page 266) and Overload Wrn (page 266).
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current Protection

Short Circuit BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Default value 250 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 208)
Comm object 8282 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Protection occurs when generator current reaches this preset threshold. Type of the protection is BOC.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Short Circuit BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.00 .. 10.00 [s]
Default value 0.04 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 9991 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOC (page 267) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 267

 IDMT Overcurrent Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 4.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8283 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
IDMT curve shape selection. IDMT is "very inverse" over current protection. Reaction time is not constant
but depends on over current level according to the following formula:

Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.

Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator current.

Table 8.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels
Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
0.2 s No action 20 s 2s
Reaction time 2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s

Image 8.14 IDMT Overcurrent Delay

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 268

 Current Unbalance BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Current (page 208)
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 208)
Comm object 8284 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210)
Description
Threshold for generator current asymmetry (unbalance).
Protection is BOC (Breaker Open and Gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Current Unbalance BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 5.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8285 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210)
Description
Delay for Current Unbalance BOC (page 269) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 269

 Subgroup: Voltage Protection

Generator Overvoltage Sd

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270) .. 200 [%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 212)
Comm object 8291 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is
used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Overvoltage Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271) .. Generator Overvoltage Sd (page
Range [units]
270) [%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 212)
Comm object 9686 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is
used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 270

 Generator Undervoltage Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271) .. Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page
Range [units]
270) [%]
Default value 70 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 212)
Comm object 9687 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is
used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Undervoltage BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271) [%]
Default value 70 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 212)
Comm object 8293 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is
used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 271

 Generator <> Voltage Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 9103 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 270), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270), Generator
Undervoltage BOC (page 271) and Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage Unbalance BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-N
Range [units]
(page 212)
Default value 10 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 8288 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210)
Description
Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 3.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8289 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210)
Description
Delay for Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 272) protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 272

 Subgroup: Frequency Protection

Generator Overfrequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 273) .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 216)
Comm object 8296 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Overfrequency Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 273) .. Generator Overfrequency BOC
Range [units]
(page 273) [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 216)
Comm object 9688 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
6 back to List of setpoints

Generator Underfrequency Wrn

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 274) .. Generator Overfrequency Wrn
Range [units]
(page 273) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 216)
Comm object 9689 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 273

 Generator Underfrequency BOC

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 273) [%]
Default value 85,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 216)
Comm object 8298 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.

6 back to List of setpoints

Generator <> Frequency Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 3,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Comm object 8297 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Delay for Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 273), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 273),
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 273) and Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 274)
protection.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 274

 Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection

Reverse Power Level

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 50 [%]
Default value 10 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 207)
Comm object 8486 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 279)
Description
Level for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 279). Protection gets active when the level of
active power [kW] gets under limit given by setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 275) for time longer
than the value of setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 275).

6 back to List of setpoints

Reverse Power Delay

Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8552 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 279)
Description
Delay for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 279). Protection gets active when the level of
active power [kW] gets under limit given by setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 275) for time longer
than the value of setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 275).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 275

 Group: Protections

Subgroup: Overload Protection

Overload Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled/Disabled/ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15664 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Overload protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Overload

Enabled:
BOC (page 266), Overload Wrn (page 266) and Overload Delay (page 267).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624)

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Current Protection

IDMT Overcurrent Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable[-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15666 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator IDMT Overcurrent protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint IDMT

Enabled:
Overcurrent Delay (page 268).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 276

 Current Unbalance Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable[-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15667 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Current Unbalance protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Current

Enabled:
Unbalance BOC (page 269) and Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 269).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Voltage Protection

Generator <> Voltage Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15668 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Generator <> Voltage protection. GCB closing is blocked, if
the protection is disabled!

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Generator

Overvoltage Sd (page 270), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270),
Enabled:
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271), Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page
271) and Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624)
GCB closing is disabled, if the parameter is set to Disabled. It is blocked as well, if the parameter is set to
ExtDisable and LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 624) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 277

 Voltage Unbalance Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15669 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Voltage Unbalance protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Voltage

Enabled:
Unbalance BOC (page 272) and Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 272).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Frequency Protection

Generator Frequency Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15670 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of Generator Frequency protection. GCB closing is blocked, if the
protection is disabled!.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Generator

Overfrequency BOC (page 273), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 273),
Enabled:
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 274), Generator Underfrequency Wrn
(page 273), and Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 274).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624)
GCB closing is disabled, if the parameter is set to Disabled. It is blocked as well, if the parameter is set to
ExtDisable and LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE (PAGE 624) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 278

 Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection

Reverse Power Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 13230 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
The protection of the generator against the reverse (negative) active power. Protection gets active when
the level of active power [kW] gets under limit given by setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 275) for time
longer than the value of setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 275).
This setpoint adjusts behavior of generator Reverse power protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Reverse

Enabled:
Power Level (page 275), Reverse Power Delay (page 275)
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624).

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Speed Protection

Underspeed Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15671 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Underspeed protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint Underspeed

Enabled:
Sd (page 253).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 279

 Subgroup: Phase Rotation Protection

Phase Rotation Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled/Disabled/ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 19709 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Phase Rotation protection.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint Phase

Enabled:
Rotation (page 225).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624)

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AUX Battery Protection

Low AUX Batt Level Protection

Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18977 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of low AUX batt level protection. This protection safeguards the AUX
battery from the risk associated with deep discharging.

Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Low

AUX Batt Level Discon U (page 293) / Low AUX Batt Level Discon Cap (page
Enabled:
294) / Low AUX Batt Level Discon SoC (page 294) and Low AUX Batt Level
Discon Del (page 293).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI PROTECTION FORCE DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 624)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 280

 Group: AUX Battery Settings

Subgroup: AUX Battery Settings

AUX Batt Nominal Capacity

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 1000 [Ah]
Default value 100 Ah Alternative config NO
Step 1 Ah
Comm object 20348 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
Nominal capacity of AUX Battery in Ah. Parameter is used mainly for calculation of window where value
AUX Batt State (page 547) is considered as Ready state.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

AUX Batt Chrg Current Character

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Negative / Positive [-]
Default value Negative Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18584 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts polarity of AUX battery current used for charging. This is very important setpoint for
correct calculation of AUX Batt Power (page 546) and AUX Batt State (page 547).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 281

 Subgroup: Start/Stop Conditions

AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] U/I / Capacity / SoC[-]
Default value SoC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 19134 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts starting/stopping conditions for the gen-set regarding to SoC (State of Charge) or U/I
(AUX battery DC voltage and current) or Capacity of AUX battery.

Condition Description
Gen-set is started and stopped based on AUX Battery voltage and current. Limits
U/I are adjusted in setpoints AUX Batt Start Voltage (page 283) and AUX Batt Stop
Current (page 283).
Gen-set is started and stopped based on AUX Battery Charge Level (Actual
Capacity capacity). Limits are adjusted in setpoints AUX Batt Start Capacity (page 284)
and AUX Batt Stop Capacity (page 284).
Gen-set is started and stopped based on AUX Battery SoC (State of Charge).
SoC Limits are adjusted in setpoints AUX Batt Start SoC (page 285) and AUX Batt
Stop SoC (page 285).

For all of these starting/stopping conditions there is delay for starting/stopping of gen-set when start/stop
condition is fulfilled. Delays are adjusted via setpoints AUX Batt Start Delay (page 286) and AUX Batt
Stop Delay (page 286).
Maximal time of charging per 1 charging cycle is adjusted via setpoint Max AUX Batt Charging Time
(page 287).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 282

 AUX Batt Start Voltage

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 100.0 [V]
Default value 48.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Comm object 19025 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines voltage of AUX battery when engine is started to charge AUX battery. This setpoint is
used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = U/I.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
VOLTAGE (PAGE 687)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

AUX Batt Stop Current

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -100.00 .. 100.00[A]
Default value 0.10 A Alternative config NO
Step 0.01 A
Comm object 19026 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines charging current of AUX battery when engine is stopped. This setpoint is used when
AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = U/I.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
CURRENT (PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 283

 AUX Batt Start Capacity

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. AUX Batt Stop Capacity (page 284) [Ah]
Default value 20 Ah Alternative config NO
Step 1 Ah
Comm object 19023 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines capacity of AUX battery when engine is started to charge AUX battery. This setpoint
is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = Capacity.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
CHARGE LEV (PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

AUX Batt Stop Capacity

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] AUX Batt Start Capacity (page 284) .. 100 [Ah]
Default value 80 Ah Alternative config NO
Step 1 Ah
Comm object 19024 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines capacity of AUX battery when engine is stopped. This setpoint is used when AUX
Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = Capacity.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
CHARGE LEV (PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 284

 AUX Batt Start SoC

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. AUX Batt Stop SoC (page 285) [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 19021 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines SoC (State of Charge) of AUX battery when engine is started to charge AUX battery.
This setpoint is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = SoC.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT SOC
(PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

AUX Batt Stop SoC

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] AUX Batt Start SoC (page 285) .. 100 [%]
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 19022 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines SoC (State of Charge) of AUX battery when engine is stopped. This setpoint is used
when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = SoC.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT SOC
(PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 285

 AUX Batt Start Delay

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 60 [min]
Default value 1 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 19019 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay of start of gen-set when starting condition for charging of AUX battery is
fulfilled. Starting condition is adjusted via setpoint AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

AUX Batt Stop Delay

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 60 [min]
Default value 1 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 19020 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay of stop of gen-set when stopping condition for charging of AUX battery is
fulfilled. Stopping condition is adjusted via setpoint AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 286

 Max AUX Batt Charging Time

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 1140 [min]
Default value 600 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 19018 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximal time of charging of AUX battery per 1 charging cycle from gen-set. When
this timer elapses, gen-set is stopped even thought stop condition is not met. Remaining time of this timer
is visible in value AUX Batt Charging Time Remaining (page 549).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Full Charge Cycle

Full Charge Cycle

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 20 [-]
Default value Disabled [-] Alternative config NO
Step 1 [-]
Comm object 19005 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts if full charge cycles are used or not. Full charge cycles are cycles where AUX battery
is charged to high level then in standard cycles. This is enhanced option for increasing the charging time
th
for each n cycle to prolong the battery life.
Disabled - full charge cycle function is not used.
th
1 .. 20 - every n cycle, stopping conditions for full charge cycles are used.
Limits for full charge cycle are adjusted via setpoints:
Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop Current (page 288)
Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop Capacity (page 288)
Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop SoC (page 289)
When full charge cycle is performed, value Full Charge (page 550) is adjusted to "YES".
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 287

 Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop Current

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -100.00 .. 100.00[A]
Default value 0.10 A Alternative config NO
Step 0.01 A
Comm object 19004 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines charging current of AUX battery when engine is stopped during full charge cycle.
This setpoint is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = U/I and when full charge cycle
is performed.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
CURRENT (PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop Capacity

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] AUX Batt Start Capacity (page 284) .. 100 [Ah]
Default value 100 Ah Alternative config NO
Step 1 Ah
Comm object 19003 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines capacity of AUX battery when engine is stopped during full charge cycle. This
setpoint is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = Capacity and when full charge cycle
is performed.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
CHARGE LEV (PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 288

 Full Chrg AUX Batt Stop SoC

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] AUX Batt Start SoC (page 285) .. 100 [%]
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 19002 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines SoC (State of Charge) of AUX battery when engine is stopped during full charge
cycle. This setpoint is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = SoC and when full
charge cycle is performed.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT SOC
(PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Cycle Limitation

Max AUX Batt Cycles Per Day

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 100 [-]
Default value 10 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 20225 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximal number of charging cycles of AUX battery per day made by gen-set. Total
number of cycles is counted in AUX Batt Cycles (page 546) value. This is enhanced option for limitation
of the charging cycles for each day to prolong the battery life.
Actual value of remaining charging cycles made by gen-set is visible in value AUX Batt Remaining
Cycles (page 549).
Note: Per day means from midnight to midnight of 1 calendar day.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 289

 Subgroup: Silent Hours

Silent Hours

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 19000 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts if silent hours are used or not. Silent hours are hours when AUX battery is discharged
to lower level then in standard hours (usually during the night). This is enhanced option for avoiding of the
unwanted noise from running gen-set.
Disabled - silent hours function is not used.
Enabled - during silent hours, starting conditions for silent hours are used. Silent hours are adjusted via
setpoint Silent Hours Setup (page 291).
Limits for full charge cycle are adjusted via setpoints:
AUX Batt Silent Hours Voltage (page 291)
AUX Batt Silent Hours Capacity (page 292)
AUX Batt Silent Hours SoC (page 292)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 290

 Silent Hours Setup

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18999 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
Setup of Silent Hours (page 290) timer. Related parameters:
Silent Hours Repetition Silent Hours Day
Silent Hours First Occur. Date Silent Hours Repeated Day In Week
Silent Hours First Occur. Time Silent Hours Repeat Day In Month
Silent Hours Duration Silent Hours Repeat Week In Month
Silent Hours Repeated Silent Hours Refresh Period
Silent Hours Repeat Day Silent Hours Weekends

Note: Setup via InteliConfig is recommended.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

AUX Batt Silent Hours Voltage

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 100.0 [V]
Default value 46.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Comm object 18998 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines voltage of AUX battery when engine is started during silent hours to charge AUX
battery. This setpoint is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = U/I and when silent
hours are performed.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
VOLTAGE (PAGE 687)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 291

 AUX Batt Silent Hours Capacity

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. AUX Batt Stop Capacity (page 284) [Ah]
Default value 15 Ah Alternative config NO
Step 1 Ah
Comm object 18997 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines capacity of AUX battery when engine is started during silent hours to charge AUX
battery. This setpoint is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = Capacity and when
silent hours are performed.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
CHARGE LEV (PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

AUX Batt Silent Hours SoC

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. AUX Batt Stop SoC (page 285) [%]
Default value 15 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 18996 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint defines SoC (State of Charge) of AUX battery when engine is started during silent hours to
charge AUX battery. This setpoint is used when AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = SoC and
when silent hours are performed.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT SOC
(PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 292

 Subgroup: Low AUX Batt Level Protection

Low AUX Batt Level Discon Del

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 18978 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts delay of Low AUX Batt Level Protection (page 280).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

Low AUX Batt Level Discon U

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. AUX Batt Start Voltage (page 283) [V]
Default value 44.0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 V
Comm object 18979 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts limit of Low AUX Batt Level Protection (page 280). This setpoint is used when
AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = U/I.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
VOLTAGE (PAGE 687)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 293

 Low AUX Batt Level Discon Cap

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. AUX Batt Start Capacity (page 284) [Ah]
Default value 10 Ah Alternative config NO
Step 1 Ah
Comm object 18981 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts limit of Low AUX Batt Level Protection (page 280). This setpoint is used when
AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = Capacity.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT
CHARGE LEV (PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

Low AUX Batt Level Discon SoC

Setpoint group AUX Battery Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. AUX Batt Start SoC (page 285) [%]
Default value 10 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 18980 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when AUX Battery Support (page 226) is Enabled
Description
This setpoint adjusts limit of Low AUX Batt Level Protection (page 280). This setpoint is used when
AUX Batt Start/Stop Condition (page 282) = SoC.
Note: Range, step and resolution of default value can be change by sensor curve of AUX BATT SOC
(PAGE 686)

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 294

 Group: Dual operation

Subgroup: Dual Operation

Running Hours Max Difference

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,1 .. 1000,0 [h]
Default value 10 h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Comm object 16039 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471) and COM2 Mode (page 473) + conditioned by settings of onboard RS485
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximal allowed difference of dual operation running hours between Master and
Slave. When difference is higher, swap of load between controllers is done.

6 back to List of setpoints

Running Hours Base

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -10 000.0 .. 20 000.0 [h]
Default value 0h Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 h
Comm object 16040 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471) and COM2 Mode (page 473)
Description
This setpoint modifies the running hours of controller used in dual operation function. Negative value is
decrement from running hours, positive value is increment to running hours.
Example:
Master controller has 1000 h.
Slave controller has 100 h.
Adjust setpoint of slave controller to 900 h to have both controllers on "0" running hours in dual
operation.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 295

 Swap Gen-sets

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled h Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 16041 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471) and COM2 Mode (page 473)
Description
This setpoint enables or disables swapping of gen-sets on load in dual operation.

Enabled Master and Slave are swapped based on their actual running hours.
Master and Slave are not swapped. Controller with lower running hours starts and
Disabled
then runs until controller shutdown – then second controller starts.

6 back to List of setpoints

Master Error Protection

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monitoring / AL Indic / Wrn [-]
Default value AL Indic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 16042 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471) and COM2 Mode (page 473)
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of protection for Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail (page 729) alarm.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 296

 Slave Error Protection

Setpoint group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monitoring / AL Indic / Wrn [-]
Default value AL Indic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 16043 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471) and COM2 Mode (page 473)
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of protection for Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail (page 730) alarm.

6 back to List of setpoints

Transfer Delay

Setpoint group Mains Settings Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 1.0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 8303 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
Transition Delay between power sources.
This delay is used in dual operation function. This delay is used when load from first Gen-set is transferred
to second Gen-set. Delay starts to countdown when GCB of first Gen-set is open. When this delay
countdown, GCB of second Gen-set is closed. This delay is important for correct function of external
interlock.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 297

 Group: Load Management

Subgroup: Load Shedding

Load Shedding Active

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Gen only [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11001 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used for adjustment when the load shedding function is active.

Disabled The Load shedding function is disabled. All the outputs are open.
Gen only The function is active when Breaker State (page 575) = IsOper.
Load shedding outputs are activated / deactivated one by one in island
operation
All Loadshedding outputs are tripped once the Gen-set comes into the
island operation from "NO LOAD" operation (GCB was opened -> Gen-set
started and GCB closed).

6 back to List of setpoints

Load Shedding Level

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Load Reconnection Level .. 200 [%] of Nominal Power (page 207)
Default value 80 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 8884 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 298) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to activates the next Load shedding [Link] Gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 299) time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 298

 Load Shedding Delay

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8887 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 298) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the next Load shedding stage. When Gen-set load exceeds Load
Shedding Level (page 298) for more than this delay's time, the controller proceeds to the next Load
shedding stage – the next binary output Load Shedding Stage 1-5 is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Load Reconnection Settings

Load Reconnection Level

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. Load Shedding Level (page 298) [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 8890 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 298) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to proceed to the lower load shedding stage when the Gen-set load drops below this
level for more than Load Reconnection Delay (page 300).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 299

 Load Reconnection Delay

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 8893 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 298) is enabled
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the lower Load shedding stage. When Gen-set load drops under Load
Reconnection Level (page 299) for more than this delay time, the binary output for higher stage is
opened. Automatic load reconnection works only when Auto Load Reconnection (page 300) = Enabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

Auto Load Reconnection

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 9649 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 298) is enabled
Description
Switch between manual and automatic reconnection of shedded load..

Rising edge on binary input MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 622) resets
controller to the lower stage, but only if the load is under the Load Reconnection
Disabled
Level (page 299). Load Reconnection Delay (page 300) is not taken into account in
this case.
Load reconnection is automatic depend on setpoints Load Reconnection Level
Enabled (page 299) and Load Reconnection Delay (page 300). Binary input MANUAL LOAD
RECONNECTION (PAGE 622) has no function.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 300

 Subgroup: Dummy Load

Dummy Load Active

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] GenOnly / Disable [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11776 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enables / disables Dummy Load function.
IMPORTANT: If Gen Only option is chosen, no dummy load will be activated when in
parallel with mains.

6 back to List of setpoints

Dummy Load On

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. Dummy Load Off (page 302) [%]
Default value 20 % Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 %
Comm object 11772 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility If Dummy Load Active (page 301) is not set to disabled
Description
This setpoint determines power level which when not matched will trigger Dummy Load Function to
activate additional power bank level (by activating additional Dummy Load Stage LBOs).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 301

 Dummy Load On Delay

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600.0 [s]
Default value 15 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 14506 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility If Dummy Load Active (page 301) is not set to disabled
Description
This setpoint determines delay after which additional Dummy Load Stage will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Dummy Load Off

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Dummy Load On (page 301) .. 200.0 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 %
Comm object 11773 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility If Dummy Load Active (page 301) is not set to disabled
Description
This setpoint determines power level which when exceeded will trigger Dummy Load Function to
remove/activate power bank stages (by deactivating additional Dummy Load Level LBOs).

6 back to List of setpoints

Dummy Load Off Delay

Setpoint group Load Management Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.0 .. 600. [s]
Default value 15 s Alternative config YES
Step 0.1 s
Comm object 14508 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility If Dummy Load Active (page 301) is not set to disabled
Description
This setpoint determines delay after which additional Dummy Load Stage will be deactivated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 302

 Group: User Buttons

Subgroup: User Buttons

User Button 1

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20826 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 1 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 1 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 1 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 303

 User Button 2

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20827 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 2 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 2 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 2 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 304

 User Button 3

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20828 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 3 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 3 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 3 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 305

 User Button 4

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20829 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 4 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 4 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 5 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 306

 User Button 5

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20830 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 5 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 5 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 5 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 307

 User Button 6

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20831 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 6 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 6 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 6 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 308

 User Button 7

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20832 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 7 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 7 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 7 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 309

 User Button 8

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20833 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 8 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 8 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 8 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 310

 User Button 9

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20834 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 9 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 9 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 9 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 311

 User Button 10

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20835 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 10 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 10 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 10 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 312

 User Button 11

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20836 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 11 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 11 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 11 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 313

 User Button 12

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20837 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 12 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 12 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 12 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 314

 User Button 13

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20838 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 13 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 13 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 13 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 315

 User Button 14

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20839 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 14 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 14 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 14 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 316

 User Button 15

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20840 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 15 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 15 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 15 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 317

 User Button 16

Setpoint group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] COMMAND / MAN OFF / MAN ON [-]
Default value COMMAND Alternative config NO
Step -
Comm object 20841 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
User button is a binary signal which value can be set by its setpoint or by remote connection
(WebSupervisor or by third party device(Modbus).

Option Description
The LBO User Button 16 is controlled by command from WebSupervisor or third
COMMAND
party device.
The LBO User Button 16 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
MAN OFF
button is still 0.
The LBO User Button 16 is controlled manually via the setpoint, value of the user
button is still 1.
MAN ON Note: You should always switch from MAN ON to MAN OFF before switching
to COMMAND, otherwise value of the LBO User Button will be 1 until
command is received.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 318

 Group: Analog Switches

Subgroup: Analog Switches 1

AIN Switch01 On

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 11407 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 635) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 635) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.15 General analog input 1 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 319

 AIN Switch01 Off

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 11410 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 635) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 635) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.16 General analog input 1 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 320

 Subgroup: Analog Switches 2

AIN Switch02 On

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 11408 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 635) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 635) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.17 General analog input 2 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 321

 AIN Switch02 Off

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 11411 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 635) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 635) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.18 General analog input 2 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 322

 Subgroup: Analog Switches 3

AIN Switch03 On

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 11409 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH03 (PAGE 636) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH03 (PAGE 636) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.19 General analog input 3 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 323

 AIN Switch03 Off

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 11412 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH03 (PAGE 636) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH03 (PAGE 636) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.20 General analog input 3 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 324

 Subgroup: Analog Switches 4

AIN Switch04 On

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 14385 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH04 (PAGE 636) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH04 (PAGE 636) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 686) analog input.

Image 8.21 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 325

 AIN Switch04 Off

Setpoint group Analog Switches Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] the range is defined by an analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
an analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by an analog sensor curve
Comm object 14386 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH04 (PAGE 636) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH04 (PAGE 636) off. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 686) analog input.

Image 8.22 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Scheduler

Subgroup: Time & Date

Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24554 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Real time clock adjustment.
Note: RTC has backup battery.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 326

 Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24553 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Actual date adjustment.
6 back to List of setpoints

Time Stamp Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 8979 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
Note: History record is made only when engine is running.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 327

 DST Switching Mode

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [AUTO / MANUAL / DISABLED]
Default value AUTO Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20250 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Switches the mode of Daylight Saving Time (DST).

Activation, deactivation of the DST, and changing of the RTC Time value
AUTO accordingly is performed automatically by the controller. The user always sees
valid local time without any action from his side.
Activation, and deactivation of the DST is performed manually by the user via the
setpoint Time Mode (page 329). Changing of the RTC Time value accordingly is
MANUAL
then performed automatically by the controller. So the user does not need to
readjust the RTC time, he only needs to select the proper Time Mode (page 329).
Time Mode (page 329) is fixedly set to STD and the function does not perform any
DISABLED
changes of RTC time.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 328

 DST Period Rule

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

AUSTRALIA, CHILE, EUROPE, MEXICO, NEW ZEALAND, PARAGUAY,
Range [units]
US/CANADA [-]
Default value AUSTRALIA Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20251 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if DST Switching Mode (page 328) = AUTO
Description
Selection of the rule that will be applied for the calculation of the Daylight Saving Time (DST) validity
period.

DST Period Rule DST Validity period

EUROPE 01:00 GMT last Sunday in March – 01:00 GMT last Sunday in October.
nd st
US/CANADA 02:00 local time 2 Sunday in March – 03:00 local time 1 Sunday in November.
st
MEXICO 02:00 local time 1 Sunday in April – 03:00 local time last Sunday in October.
st st
AUSTRALIA 02:00 local time 1 Sunday in October – 03:00 local time 1 Sunday in April.
st
NEW ZEALAND 02:00 local time last Sunday in September – 03:00 local time 1 Sunday in April.
st st
CHILE 00:00 local time 1 Sunday in September – 00:00 local time 1 Sunday in April.
st th
PARAGUAY 00:00 local time 1 Sunday in October – 00:00 local time 4 Sunday in March.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Mode

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] - [STD / DST]
Default value STD Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20249 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if DST Switching Mode (page 328) = MANUAL
Description
In manual DST Switching Mode (page 328) this input is used to adjust the actual time mode. In any other
DST Switching Mode (page 328) this input is not taken into account.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 329

 Time Zone

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Sunrise/Sunset

Sunrise/Sunset Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Timer On / Remote Start/Stop[-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 20210 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjust function for sunrise/sunset function. This function calculates time of sunrise/sunset
based on actual GPS coordinates. Coordinates can be also taken from setpoints Sunrise/Sunset
Latitude (page 331) and Sunrise/Sunset Longitude (page 331). Calculated time of sunrise/sunset can
be changed by setpoints Sunrise Offset (page 332) and Sunset Offset (page 332). There is LBO
SUNRISE/SUNSET ACTIVE (PAGE 679) which is active during night - e.g. from sunset time to sunrise time.

Disabled The sunrise/sunset function is disabled

Timer On There is no specific function. Only binary output of sunrise/sunset is active.
Remote When this option is chosen then the binary output of sunrise/sunset is internally
Start/Stop connected to the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 330

 Sunrise/Sunset Latitude

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -90,0000..90,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Comm object 20214 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330) is not Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjust latitude for Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330). This value is used when actual
latitude from CM2-4G-GPS is not available. Positions on north hemisphere have positive value, position
on south hemisphere have negative value.
Note: Setpoint can by adjusted by LBI SUNRISE/SUNSET HOME POSSITION (PAGE 629) - actual value of
latitude from GPS signal is written into setpoint .

6 back to List of setpoints

Sunrise/Sunset Longitude

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -180,0000..180,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0000 °
Comm object 20213 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330) is not Disabled
Description
This setpoint adjust longitude for Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330). This value is used when actual
longitude from CM2-4G-GPS is not available. Positions on east hemisphere have positive value, position
on west hemisphere have negative value.
Note: Setpoint can by adjusted by LBI SUNRISE/SUNSET HOME POSSITION (PAGE 629) - actual value of
longitude from GPS signal is written into setpoint .

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 331

 Sunrise Offset

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -300 .. 300 [min]
Default value 0 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 20216 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330) is not Disabled
Description
This setpoint can change calculated time of sunrise. Time of sunrise/sunset is calculated by
Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330).

6 back to List of setpoints

Sunset Offset

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -300 .. 300 [min]
Default value 0 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Comm object 20215 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only when Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330) is not Disabled
Description
This setpoint can change calculated time of sunset. Time of sunrise/sunset is calculated by
Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 332

 Subgroup: Timer 1

Timer 1 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func / Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15358 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is possible to choose from following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 649) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require
controller running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 333) is configured for OFF mode
and Timer 2 Function (page 341) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in
OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already
running.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 333

 Timer 1 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10969 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 333) Timer 1 Day (page 337)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 335) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 337)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 334) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 337)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 335) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 338)
Timer 1 Duration (page 335) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 339)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 336) Timer 1 Weekends (page 340)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 336)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 333).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 334

 Timer 1 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 333).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 333) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 333).

Off Timer 1 Function (page 333) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 335

 Timer 1 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 333).

Daily Timer 1 Function (page 333) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 333) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 333) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen
days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 333) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 333).

Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 333) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 333) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 336

 Timer 1 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 337

 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 338

 Timer 1 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 1 Function (page 333). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 1 Repeated (page 336).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 333),
the Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 333),
the Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 1 Day (page 337).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 333),
Monthly
the Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 337) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 1 Day (page 337) and Timer 1
Repeat Week In Month (page 338).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page
333), the Timer 1 Function (page 333) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 339

 Timer 1 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 333)
Description
Behavior of Timer 1 Function (page 333) on weekends.

Timer 1 Function (page 333) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 1
Including
Function (page 333) can be active.
Timer 1 Function (page 333) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 1
Skip
Function (page 333) isn’t active.
Timer 1 Function (page 333) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 1
Function (page 333) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 340

 Subgroup: Timer 2

Timer 2 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func / Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15359 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Note: It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 2 (PAGE
649) is always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions
require controller running in AUTO mode.

Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 1 Function (page 333) is configured for OFF mode
and Timer 2 Function (page 341) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in
OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already
running.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 341

 Timer 2 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10970 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 2 are:
Timer 2 Function (page 341) Timer 2 Day (page 345)
Timer 2 Repetition (page 343) Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week (page 345)
Timer 2 First Occur. Date (page 342) Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month (page 345)
Timer 2 First Occur. Time (page 343) Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month (page 346)
Timer 2 Duration (page 343) Timer 2 Refresh Period (page 347)
Timer 2 Repeated (page 344) Timer 2 Weekends (page 348)
Timer 2 Repeat Day (page 344)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 2 Function (page 341).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 342

 Timer 2 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 341).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Timer 2 Function (page 341) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 2 Function (page 341).

Off Timer 2 Function (page 341) will not be activated.

Once Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 343

 Timer 2 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 2 Function (page 341).

Daily Timer 2 Function (page 341) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 2 Function (page 341) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 2 Function (page 341) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 2 Function (page 341) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 2 Function (page 341).

Chose one day in month when Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 344

 Timer 2 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 345

 Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 346

 Timer 2 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 2 Function (page 341). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 2 Repeated (page 344).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 341),
the Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 341),
the Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 2 Day (page 345).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 341),
Monthly
the Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month (page 345) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 2 Day (page 345) and Timer 2
Repeat Week In Month (page 346).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page
341), the Timer 2 Function (page 341) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 347

 Timer 2 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 2 Function (page 341)
Description
Behavior of Timer 2 Function (page 341) on weekends.

Timer 2 Function (page 341) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 2
Including
Function (page 341) can be active.
Timer 2 Function (page 341) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 2
Skip
Function (page 341) isn’t active.
Timer 2 Function (page 341) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 2
Function (page 341) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 348

 Subgroup: Timer 3

Timer 3 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func / Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15360 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 3 (PAGE 649) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require
controller running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 3. So if Timer 3 Function (page 349) is configured for OFF mode
and Timer 3 Function (page 349) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in
OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already
running.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 349

 Timer 3 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10971 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 3 are:
Timer 3 Function (page 349) Timer 3 Day (page 353)
Timer 3 Repetition (page 351) Timer 3 Repeated Day In Week (page 353)
Timer 3 First Occur. Date (page 350) Timer 3 Repeat Day In Month (page 353)
Timer 3 Duration (page 351) Timer 3 Repeat Week In Month (page 354)
Timer 3 Repeated (page 352) Timer 3 Refresh Period (page 355)
Timer 3 Repeat Day (page 352) Timer 3 Weekends (page 356)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 3 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 3 Function (page 349).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 350

 Timer 3 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 3 Function (page 349).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 3 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Timer 3 Function (page 349) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 3 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 3 Function (page 349).

Off Timer 3 Function (page 349) will not be activated.

Once Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 351

 Timer 3 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 3 Function (page 349).

Daily Timer 3 Function (page 349) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 3 Function (page 349) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 3 Function (page 349) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 3 Function (page 349) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 3 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 3 Function (page 349).

Chose one day in month when Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 352

 Timer 3 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 3 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 3 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 353

 Timer 3 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 354

 Timer 3 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 3 Function (page 349). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 3 Repeated (page 352).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 3, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 3 Function (page 349),
the Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 3, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 3 Function (page 349),
the Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 3 Day (page 353).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 3, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 3 Function (page 349),
Monthly
the Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 3 Repeat Day In Month (page 353) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 3 Day (page 353) and Timer 3
Repeat Week In Month (page 354).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 3,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 3 Function (page
349), the Timer 3 Function (page 349) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 355

 Timer 3 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 3 Function (page 349)
Description
Behavior of Timer 3 Function (page 349) on weekends.

Timer 3 Function (page 349) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 3
Including
Function (page 349) can be active.
Timer 3 Function (page 349) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 3
Skip
Function (page 349) isn’t active.
Timer 3 Function (page 349) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 3
Function (page 349) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 356

 Subgroup: Timer 4

Timer 4 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func / Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 15361 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 4 (PAGE 649) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require
controller running in AUTO mode.
Timer 1 has higher priority over Timer 2. So if Timer 4 Function (page 357) is configured for OFF mode
and Timer 4 Function (page 357) is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in
OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already
running.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 357

 Timer 4 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10973 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Related setpoints for timer 4 are:
Timer 4 Function (page 357) Timer 4 Day (page 361)
Timer 4 Repetition (page 359) Timer 4 Repeated Day In Week (page 361)
Timer 4 First Occur. Date (page 358) Timer 4 Repeat Day In Month (page 361)
Timer 4 First Occur. Time (page 359) Timer 4 Repeat Week In Month (page 362)
Timer 4 Duration (page 359) Timer 4 Refresh Period (page 363)
Timer 4 Repeated (page 360) Timer 4 Weekends (page 364)
Timer 4 Repeat Day (page 360)

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 4 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 4 Function (page 357).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 358

 Timer 4 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 4 Function (page 357).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 4 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Timer 4 Function (page 357) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 4 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 4 Function (page 357).

Off Timer 4 Function (page 357) will not be activated.

Once Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 359

 Timer 4 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 4 Function (page 357).

Daily Timer 4 Function (page 357) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 4 Function (page 357) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 4 Function (page 357) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 4 Function (page 357) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 4 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 4 Function (page 357).

Chose one day in month when Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 360

 Timer 4 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 4 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 4 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 361

 Timer 4 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 362

 Timer 4 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 4 Function (page 357). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 4 Repeated (page 360).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 4 Function (page 357),
the Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 4 Function (page 357),
the Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 4 Day (page 361).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 4 Function (page 357),
Monthly
the Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 4 Repeat Day In Month (page 361) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 4 Day (page 361) and Timer 4
Repeat Week In Month (page 362).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 4 Function (page
357), the Timer 4 Function (page 357) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 363

 Timer 4 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 4 Function (page 357)
Description
Behavior of Timer 4 Function (page 357) on weekends.

Timer 4 Function (page 357) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 4
Including
Function (page 357) can be active.
Timer 4 Function (page 357) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 4
Skip
Function (page 357) isn’t active.
Timer 4 Function (page 357) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 4
Function (page 357) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 364

 Subgroup: Timer 5

Timer 5 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15362 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 5. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 5 Setup (page 366).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 5 (PAGE 650) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 365

 Timer 5 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10974 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 5 Function (page 365) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 5. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 5 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 5 Function (page 365).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 5 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 5 Function (page 365).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 366

 Timer 5 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Timer 5 Function (page 365) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 5 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 5 Function (page 365).

Off Timer 5 Function (page 365) will not be activated.

Once Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 367

 Timer 5 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 5 Function (page 365).

Daily Timer 5 Function (page 365) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 5 Function (page 365) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 5 Function (page 365) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 5 Function (page 365) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 5 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 5 Function (page 365).

Chose one day in month when Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 368

 Timer 5 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 5 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 5 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 369

 Timer 5 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 370

 Timer 5 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 5 Function (page 365). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 4 Repeated (page 360).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 5 Function (page 365),
the Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 5 Function (page 365),
the Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 5 Day (page 369).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 5 Function (page 365),
Monthly
the Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 5 Repeat Day In Month (page 369) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 5 Day (page 369) and Timer 5
Repeat Week In Month (page 370).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 5 Function (page
365), the Timer 5 Function (page 365) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 371

 Timer 5 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 5 Function (page 365)
Description
Behavior of Timer 5 Function (page 365) on weekends.

Timer 5 Function (page 365) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 5
Including
Function (page 365) can be active.
Timer 5 Function (page 365) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 5
Skip
Function (page 365) isn’t active.
Timer 5 Function (page 365) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 5
Function (page 365) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 372

 Subgroup: Timer 6

Timer 6 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15363 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 6. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 6 Setup (page 374).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 6 (PAGE 650) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 373

 Timer 6 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10975 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 6 Function (page 373) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 6. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 6 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 6 Function (page 373).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 6 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 6 Function (page 373).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 374

 Timer 6 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Timer 6 Function (page 373) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 6 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 6 Function (page 373).

Off Timer 6 Function (page 373) will not be activated.

Once Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 375

 Timer 6 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 6 Function (page 373).

Daily Timer 6 Function (page 373) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 6 Function (page 373) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 6 Function (page 373) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 6 Function (page 373) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 6 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 6 Function (page 373).

Chose one day in month when Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 376

 Timer 6 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 6 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 6 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 377

 Timer 6 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 378

 Timer 6 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 6 Function (page 373). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 6 Repeated (page 376).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 6 Function (page 373),
the Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 6 Function (page 373),
the Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 6 Day (page 377).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 6 Function (page 373),
Monthly
the Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 6 Repeat Day In Month (page 377) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 6 Day (page 377) and Timer 6
Repeat Week In Month (page 378).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 6 Function (page
373), the Timer 6 Function (page 373) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 379

 Timer 6 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 6 Function (page 373)
Description
Behavior of Timer 6 Function (page 373) on weekends.

Timer 6 Function (page 373) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 6
Including
Function (page 373) can be active.
Timer 6 Function (page 373) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 6
Skip
Function (page 373) isn’t active.
Timer 6 Function (page 373) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 6
Function (page 373) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 380

 Subgroup: Timer 7

Timer 7 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15364 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 7. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 7 Setup (page 382).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 7 (PAGE 650) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 381

 Timer 7 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10976 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 7 Function (page 381) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 7. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 7 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 7 Function (page 381).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 7 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 7 Function (page 381).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 382

 Timer 7 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Timer 7 Function (page 381) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 7 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 7 Function (page 381).

Off Timer 7 Function (page 381) will not be activated.

Once Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 383

 Timer 7 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 7 Function (page 381).

Daily Timer 7 Function (page 381) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 7 Function (page 381) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 7 Function (page 381) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 7 Function (page 381) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 7 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 7 Function (page 381).

Chose one day in month when Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 384

 Timer 7 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 7 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 7 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 385

 Timer 7 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 386

 Timer 7 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 7 Function (page 381). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 7 Repeated (page 384).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 7 Function (page 381),
the Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 7 Function (page 381),
the Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 7 Day (page 385).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 7 Function (page 381),
Monthly
the Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 7 Repeat Day In Month (page 385) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 7 Day (page 385) and Timer 7
Repeat Week In Month (page 386).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 7 Function (page
381), the Timer 7 Function (page 381) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 387

 Timer 7 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 7 Function (page 381)
Description
Behavior of Timer 7 Function (page 381) on weekends.

Timer 7 Function (page 381) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 7
Including
Function (page 381) can be active.
Timer 7 Function (page 381) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 7
Skip
Function (page 381) isn’t active.
Timer 7 Function (page 381) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 7
Function (page 381) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 388

 Subgroup: Timer 8

Timer 8 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15365 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 8. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 8 Setup (page 390).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 8 (PAGE 650) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 389

 Timer 8 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10977 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 8 Function (page 389) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 8. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 8 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 8 Function (page 389).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 8 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 8 Function (page 389).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 390

 Timer 8 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Timer 8 Function (page 389) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 8 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 8 Function (page 389).

Off Timer 8 Function (page 389) will not be activated.

Once Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 391

 Timer 8 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 8 Function (page 389).

Daily Timer 8 Function (page 389) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 8 Function (page 389) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 8 Function (page 389) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 8 Function (page 389) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 8 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 8 Function (page 389).

Chose one day in month when Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 392

 Timer 8 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 8 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 8 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 393

 Timer 8 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 394

 Timer 8 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 8 Function (page 389). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 8 Repeated (page 392).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 8 Function (page 389),
the Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 8 Function (page 389),
the Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 8 Day (page 393).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 8 Function (page 389),
Monthly
the Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 8 Repeat Day In Month (page 393) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 8 Day (page 393) and Timer 8
Repeat Week In Month (page 394).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 8 Function (page
389), the Timer 8 Function (page 389) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 395

 Timer 8 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 8 Function (page 389)
Description
Behavior of Timer 8 Function (page 389) on weekends.

Timer 8 Function (page 389) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 8
Including
Function (page 389) can be active.
Timer 8 Function (page 389) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 8
Skip
Function (page 389) isn’t active.
Timer 8 Function (page 389) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 8
Function (page 389) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 396

 Subgroup: Timer 9

Timer 9 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15366 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 9. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 9 Setup (page 398).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 9 (PAGE 651) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 397

 Timer 9 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10978 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 9 Function (page 397) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 9. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 9 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 9 Function (page 397).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 9 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 9 Function (page 397).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 398

 Timer 9 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Timer 9 Function (page 397) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 9 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 9 Function (page 397).

Off Timer 9 Function (page 397) will not be activated.

Once Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 399

 Timer 9 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 9 Function (page 397).

Daily Timer 9 Function (page 397) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 9 Function (page 397) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 9 Function (page 397) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 9 Function (page 397) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 9 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Day (page 400)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 400

 Timer 9 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 9 Function (page 397).

Chose one day in month when Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be
Repeated Day
activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be
Repeated Day In Week
activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 9 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 401

 Timer 9 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 9 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 402

 Timer 9 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 9 Function (page 397). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 9 Repeated (page 400).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 9 Function (page 397),
the Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 9 Function (page 397),
the Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 9 Day (page 400).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 9 Function (page 397),
Monthly
the Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be activated in selected day of month
adjusted by Timer 9 Repeat Day In Month (page 402) or in selected days
of week of month adjusted by Timer 9 Day (page 400) and Timer 9
Repeat Week In Month (page 402).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 9 Function (page
397), the Timer 9 Function (page 397) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 403

 Timer 9 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 9 Function (page 397)
Description
Behavior of Timer 9 Function (page 397) on weekends.

Timer 9 Function (page 397) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 9
Including
Function (page 397) can be active.
Timer 9 Function (page 397) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 9
Skip
Function (page 397) isn’t active.
Timer 9 Function (page 397) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 9
Function (page 397) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 404

 Subgroup: Timer 10

Timer 10 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15367 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 10. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 10 Setup (page 406).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 10 (PAGE 651) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 405

 Timer 10 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10979 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 10 Function (page 405) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 10. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 10 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 10 Function (page 405).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 10 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 10 Function (page 405).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 406

 Timer 10 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Timer 10 Function (page 405) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 10 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 10 Function (page 405).

Off Timer 10 Function (page 405) will not be activated.

Once Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 407

 Timer 10 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 10 Function (page 405).

Daily Timer 10 Function (page 405) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 10 Function (page 405) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 10 Function (page 405) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 10 Function (page 405) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 10 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 408

 Timer 10 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 10 Function (page 405).

Chose one day in month when Timer 10 Function (page 405) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 10 Function (page 405) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 10 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 409

 Timer 10 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 10 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 410

 Timer 10 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 10 Function (page 405). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 10 Repeated (page 408).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 10 Function (page 405),
the Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 10 Function (page
405), the Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 10 Day (page 408).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 10 Function (page
Monthly
405), the Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 10 Repeat Day In Month (page 410) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 10 Day (page 408) and
Timer 10 Repeat Week In Month (page 410).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 10 Function
(page 405), the Timer 10 Function (page 405) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 411

 Timer 10 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 10 Function (page 405)
Description
Behavior of Timer 10 Function (page 405) on weekends.

Timer 10 Function (page 405) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 10
Including
Function (page 405) can be active.
Timer 10 Function (page 405) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 10
Skip
Function (page 405) isn’t active.
Timer 10 Function (page 405) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
10 Function (page 405) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 412

 Subgroup: Timer 11

Timer 11 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15368 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 11. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 11 Setup (page 414).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 11 (PAGE 651) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 413

 Timer 11 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10980 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 11 Function (page 413) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 11. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 11 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 11 Function (page 413).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 11 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 11 Function (page 413).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 414

 Timer 11 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Timer 11 Function (page 413) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 11 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 11 Function (page 413).

Off Timer 11 Function (page 413) will not be activated.

Once Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 415

 Timer 11 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 11 Function (page 413).

Daily Timer 11 Function (page 413) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 11 Function (page 413) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 11 Function (page 413) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 11 Function (page 413) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 11 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 416

 Timer 11 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 11 Function (page 413).

Chose one day in month when Timer 11 Function (page 413) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 11 Function (page 413) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 11 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 417

 Timer 11 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 11 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 418

 Timer 11 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 11 Function (page 413). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 11 Repeated (page 416).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 11 Function (page 413),
the Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 11 Function (page
413), the Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 11 Day (page 416).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 11 Function (page
Monthly
413), the Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 11 Repeat Day In Month (page 418) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 11 Day (page 416) and
Timer 11 Repeat Week In Month (page 418).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 11 Function
(page 413), the Timer 11 Function (page 413) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 419

 Timer 11 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 11 Function (page 413)
Description
Behavior of Timer 11 Function (page 413) on weekends.

Timer 11 Function (page 413) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 11
Including
Function (page 413) can be active.
Timer 11 Function (page 413) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 11
Skip
Function (page 413) isn’t active.
Timer 11 Function (page 413) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
11 Function (page 413) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 420

 Subgroup: Timer 12

Timer 12 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15369 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 12. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 12 Setup (page 422).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 12 (PAGE 652) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 421

 Timer 12 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10981 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 12 Function (page 421) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 12. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 12 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 12 Function (page 421).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 12 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 12 Function (page 421).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 422

 Timer 12 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Timer 12 Function (page 421) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 12 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 12 Function (page 421).

Off Timer 12 Function (page 421) will not be activated.

Once Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 423

 Timer 12 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 12 Function (page 421).

Daily Timer 12 Function (page 421) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 12 Function (page 421) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 12 Function (page 421) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 12 Function (page 421) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 12 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 424

 Timer 12 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 12 Function (page 421).

Chose one day in month when Timer 12 Function (page 421) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 12 Function (page 421) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 12 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 425

 Timer 12 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 12 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 426

 Timer 12 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 12 Function (page 421). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 12 Repeated (page 424).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 12 Function (page 421),
the Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 12 Function (page
421), the Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 12 Day (page 424).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 12 Function (page
Monthly
421), the Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 12 Repeat Day In Month (page 426) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 12 Day (page 424) and
Timer 12 Repeat Week In Month (page 426).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 12 Function
(page 421), the Timer 12 Function (page 421) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 427

 Timer 12 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 12 Function (page 421)
Description
Behavior of Timer 12 Function (page 421) on weekends.

Timer 12 Function (page 421) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 12
Including
Function (page 421) can be active.
Timer 12 Function (page 421) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 12
Skip
Function (page 421) isn’t active.
Timer 12 Function (page 421) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
12 Function (page 421) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 428

 Subgroup: Timer 13

Timer 13 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15370 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 13. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 13 Setup (page 430).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 13 (PAGE 652) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 429

 Timer 13 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10982 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 13 Function (page 429) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 13. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 13 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 13 Function (page 429).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 13 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 13 Function (page 429).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 430

 Timer 13 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Timer 13 Function (page 429) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 13 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 13 Function (page 429).

Off Timer 13 Function (page 429) will not be activated.

Once Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 431

 Timer 13 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 13 Function (page 429).

Daily Timer 13 Function (page 429) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 13 Function (page 429) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 13 Function (page 429) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 13 Function (page 429) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 13 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 432

 Timer 13 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 13 Function (page 429).

Chose one day in month when Timer 13 Function (page 429) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 13 Function (page 429) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 13 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 433

 Timer 13 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 13 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 434

 Timer 13 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 13 Function (page 429). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 13 Repeated (page 432).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 13 Function (page 429),
the Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 13 Function (page
429), the Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 13 Day (page 432).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 13 Function (page
Monthly
429), the Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 13 Repeat Day In Month (page 434) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 13 Day (page 432) and
Timer 13 Repeat Week In Month (page 434).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 13 Function
(page 429), the Timer 13 Function (page 429) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 435

 Timer 13 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 13 Function (page 429)
Description
Behavior of Timer 13 Function (page 429) on weekends.

Timer 13 Function (page 429) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 13
Including
Function (page 429) can be active.
Timer 13 Function (page 429) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 13
Skip
Function (page 429) isn’t active.
Timer 13 Function (page 429) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
13 Function (page 429) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 436

 Subgroup: Timer 14

Timer 14 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15371 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 14. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 14 Setup (page 438).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 14 (PAGE 652) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 437

 Timer 14 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10983 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 14 Function (page 437) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 14. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 14 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 14 Function (page 437).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 14 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 14 Function (page 437).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 438

 Timer 14 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Timer 14 Function (page 437) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 14 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 14 Function (page 437).

Off Timer 14 Function (page 437) will not be activated.

Once Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 439

 Timer 14 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 14 Function (page 437).

Daily Timer 14 Function (page 437) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 14 Function (page 437) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 14 Function (page 437) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 14 Function (page 437) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 14 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 440

 Timer 14 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 14 Function (page 437).

Chose one day in month when Timer 14 Function (page 437) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 14 Function (page 437) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 14 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 441

 Timer 14 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 14 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 442

 Timer 14 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 14 Function (page 437). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 14 Repeated (page 440).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 14 Function (page 437),
the Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 14 Function (page
437), the Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 14 Day (page 440).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 14 Function (page
Monthly
437), the Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 14 Repeat Day In Month (page 442) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 14 Day (page 440) and
Timer 14 Repeat Week In Month (page 442).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 14 Function
(page 437), the Timer 14 Function (page 437) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 443

 Timer 14 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 14 Function (page 437)
Description
Behavior of Timer 14 Function (page 437) on weekends.

Timer 14 Function (page 437) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 14
Including
Function (page 437) can be active.
Timer 14 Function (page 437) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 14
Skip
Function (page 437) isn’t active.
Timer 14 Function (page 437) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
14 Function (page 437) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 444

 Subgroup: Timer 15

Timer 15 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15372 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 15. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 15 Setup (page 446).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 15 (PAGE 653) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 445

 Timer 15 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10984 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 15 Function (page 445) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 15. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 15 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 15 Function (page 445).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 15 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 15 Function (page 445).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 446

 Timer 15 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Timer 15 Function (page 445) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 15 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 15 Function (page 445).

Off Timer 15 Function (page 445) will not be activated.

Once Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 447

 Timer 15 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 15 Function (page 445).

Daily Timer 15 Function (page 445) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 15 Function (page 445) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 15 Function (page 445) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 15 Function (page 445) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 15 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 448

 Timer 15 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 15 Function (page 445).

Chose one day in month when Timer 15 Function (page 445) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 15 Function (page 445) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 15 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 449

 Timer 15 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 15 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 450

 Timer 15 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 15 Function (page 445). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 15 Repeated (page 448).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 15 Function (page 445),
the Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 15 Function (page
445), the Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 15 Day (page 448).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 15 Function (page
Monthly
445), the Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 15 Repeat Day In Month (page 450) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 15 Day (page 448) and
Timer 15 Repeat Week In Month (page 450).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 15 Function
(page 445), the Timer 15 Function (page 445) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 451

 Timer 15 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 15 Function (page 445)
Description
Behavior of Timer 15 Function (page 445) on weekends.

Timer 15 Function (page 445) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 15
Including
Function (page 445) can be active.
Timer 15 Function (page 445) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 15
Skip
Function (page 445) isn’t active.
Timer 15 Function (page 445) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
15 Function (page 445) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 452

 Subgroup: Timer 16

Timer 16 Function

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disable / Manual On / No Func/ Rem Start/Stop / Auto Run / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 15373 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines and enables the function of the Timer 16. The functions which are supposed to
change the Controller Mode requires controller running in AUTO mode. The activation condition of the
Timer is configured via setpoint Timer 16 Setup (page 454).
Once the Timer is activated the LBO EXERCISE TIMER 16 (PAGE 653) is closed regardless of chosen timer
function. If the CU is switched off when the Timer should be activated, the Timer will be activated
immediately after the CU is switched on if the Timer condition is still fulfilled.
IMPORTANT: The LBO is activated always when the Timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.

IMPORTANT: In case that Timer 1, Timer 2, etc. should be activated at the same time, the
Timer with selected higher priority function is executed.

Disable The Timer is disabled.

Manual On LBO Timer is active, but the Timer itself is disabled.
Note: This function serves for testing purposes.
No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
the REMOTE OFF (PAGE 626) binary input.
Rem When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to
Start/Stop the REMOTE START/STOP (PAGE 627) binary input.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 453

 Timer 16 Setup

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] N/A [-]
Default value N/A [-] Alternative config NO
Step N/A [-]
Comm object 10985 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if Timer 16 Function (page 453) != Disabled or Manual On
Description
Use this setpoint to setup the exercise Timer 16. See Exercise timers (page 105) for step by step
manual.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 16 First Occur. Date

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 16 Function (page 453).
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 16 First Occur. Time

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 16 Function (page 453).
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 454

 Timer 16 Duration

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Timer 16 Function (page 453) duration time.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 16 Repetition

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 16 Function (page 453).

Off Timer 16 Function (page 453) will not be activated.

Once Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be repeatedly activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 455

 Timer 16 Repeated

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 16 Function (page 453).

Daily Timer 16 Function (page 453) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 16 Function (page 453) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 16 Function (page 453) is repeated in chosen day every month or in
chosen days of chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 16 Function (page 453) is repeated in adjusted period.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 16 Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down
buttons. To change the value of day use Enter button.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 456

 Timer 16 Repeat Day

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 16 Function (page 453).

Chose one day in month when Timer 16 Function (page 453) will
Repeated Day
be activated.
Chose days in one week when Timer 16 Function (page 453) will
Repeated Day In Week
be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 16 Repeated Day In Week

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 457

 Timer 16 Repeat Day In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Default value 0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

Timer 16 Repeat Week In Month

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be activated.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 458

 Timer 16 Refresh Period

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Refresh period of Timer 16 Function (page 453). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 16 Repeated (page 456).

Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer
will be activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second day from first occurrence of Timer 16 Function (page 453),
the Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
Weekly
every second week from first occurrence of Timer 16 Function (page
453), the Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be activated in selected days
adjusted by Timer 16 Day (page 456).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer
will be activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 4, then
every second month from first occurrence of Timer 16 Function (page
Monthly
453), the Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be activated in selected day of
month adjusted by Timer 16 Repeat Day In Month (page 458) or in
selected days of week of month adjusted by Timer 16 Day (page 456) and
Timer 16 Repeat Week In Month (page 458).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer
will be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 4,
then every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 16 Function
(page 453), the Timer 16 Function (page 453) will be activated.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 459

 Timer 16 Weekends

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 0 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 16 Function (page 453)
Description
Behavior of Timer 16 Function (page 453) on weekends.

Timer 16 Function (page 453) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 16
Including
Function (page 453) can be active.
Timer 16 Function (page 453) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 16
Skip
Function (page 453) isn’t active.
Timer 16 Function (page 453) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer
16 Function (page 453) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the
Postpone
weekend, than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is
counted from original date of first occurrence date.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Rental Timers

Rental Timer 1

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 8 760 [h]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14326 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on engine running hours.
The alarm AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed (page 743) will be recorded in alarm list.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 1 (page 460) we have to set up Rental Timer 1 (page
460) again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 1
(page 460). Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter
button again.

When the Rental Timer 1 (page 460) elapsed during engine run the Gen-set will not stop immediately.
The adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 464) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled
and stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 464) time elapsed.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 460

 Image 8.23 Rental Timer 1

The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the
Rental Timer 1 (page 460) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated
the Rental Timer BOC (page 464) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 461

 Rental Timer 1 Wrn

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1.. Rental Timer 1 (page 460) [h]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14332 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 460)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 1 (page 739) comes up after xx running hours from adjusting the Rental Timer
1 (page 460). Hours are adjusted by this setpoint.

Image 8.24 Rental Timer 1 Wrn

6 back to List of setpoints

Rental Timer 2

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 14367 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on date. At the midnight of
the last day the alarm AHI Rental Timer 2 Elapsed (page 743) will be recorded in alarm list.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 462

 IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 2 (page 462) we have to set up Rental Timer 2 (page
462) again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 2
(page 462). Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter
button again.

IMPORTANT: To disable Rental Timer 2 (page 462) set date to 01/01/2015.

When the Rental Timer 2 (page 462) elapsed during engine run the Gen-set will not stop immediately.
The adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 464) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled
and stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 464) time elapsed.

Image 8.25 Rental Timer 2

The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the
Rental Timer 2 (page 462) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated
the Rental Timer BOC (page 464) protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 463

 Rental Timer 2 Wrn

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 01/01/2015 .. Rental Timer 2 (page 462) [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2015 Alternative config NO
Step 1 day
Comm object 14368 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 2 (page 462)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 2 (page 740) comes up xx days before the Rental Timer 2 (page 462). Days
are adjusted by this setpoint.

Image 8.26 Rental Timer 2 Wrn

6 back to List of setpoints

Rental Timer BOC

Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 210 [h]
Default value 24 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Comm object 14334 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Conditioned by the setpoints Rental Timer 1 (page 460) and Rental Timer 2 (page
Setpoint visibility
462)
Description
This timer will start after Rental Timer 1 (page 460) or Rental Timer 2 (page 462) elapsed in case that
the engine is still running. When this timer elapsed the engine is cooled and stopped.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 464

 Group: Geo-Fencing

Subgroup: Geo Fencing

Geo-Fencing

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled / LBI Enable [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11681 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables geo-fencing function.

Fence 1 Protection (page 467) and Fence 2 Protection (page 469) are
Disabled
disabled.
Fence 1 Protection (page 467) and Fence 2 Protection (page 469) are
Enabled
enabled.
Fence 1 Protection (page 467) and Fence 2 Protection (page 469) are
LBI Enable enabled only when logical binary input GEO-FENCING ENABLE (PAGE 621) is
active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Position

Home Latitude

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -90,0000..90,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Comm object 14606 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust latitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Longitude (page 466) are used for counting Fence 1 Radius (page
468) and Fence 2 Radius (page 470).

Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION
(PAGE 620). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 465

 Home Longitude

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] -180,0000..180,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Comm object 14607 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust longitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions
on east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Latitude (page 465) are used for counting Fence 1 Radius (page 468)
and Fence 2 Radius (page 470).

Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION
(PAGE 620). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 466

 Subgroup: Fence 1

Fence 1 Protection

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14610 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 1 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Radius
(page 468). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Delay (page 468).

Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence 1 Radius (page
468).
Wrn Position of Gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 1 Radius (page 468).
Sd Position of Gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 1 Radius (page 468).
BOC Position of Gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Protection is activated when position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 1 Radius
(page 468).

Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 1 Delay (page 468).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 467

 Fence 1 Radius

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Comm object 11677 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Radius for circle area 1. When the Gen-set leaves this area, Fence 1 Protection (page 467) is activated
after Fence 1 Delay (page 468).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position – setpoints Home Longitude (page
466) and Home Latitude (page 465).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fence 1 Delay

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0..3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 11682 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Fence 1 Protection (page 467).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 468

 Subgroup: Fence 2

Fence 2 Protection

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14611 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 2 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Radius
(page 470). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Delay (page 470).

Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence 2 Radius (page
470).
Wrn Position of Gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 2 Radius (page 470).
Sd Position of Gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 2 Radius (page 470).
BOC Position of Gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Protection is activated when position of the Gen-set is out of Fence 2 Radius
(page 470).

Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 2 Delay (page 470).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 469

 Fence 2 Radius

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Comm object 14608 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Radius for circle area 2. When the Gen-set leaves this area, Fence 2 Protection (page 469) is activated
after Fence 2 Delay (page 470).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page
466) and Home Latitude (page 465).

6 back to List of setpoints

Fence 2 Delay

Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0..3600 [s]
Default value 0s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 14609 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Fence 2 Protection (page 469).

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Plug-In Modules

Subgroup: Slot A

Slot A

Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24280 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 470

 Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Slot B

Slot B

Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24279 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot B.
6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-RS232-485

Subgroup: COM1 Setting

COM1 Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24522 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 471

 COM1 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24341 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24477 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
471)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 472

 COM1 Modbus Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Default value 8N1 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23867 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication mode of Modbus-RTU.

Possible options
8N1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
8N2 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
8E1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: COM2 Setting

COM2 Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24451 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.

Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
DualSlave Dual operation protocol – slave function
DualMaster Dual operation protocol – master function

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 473

 Step [-]
Comm object 24340 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
473)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 9600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24420 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM2 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
473)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM2 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.

6 back to List of setpoints

COM2 Modbus Mode

Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 8N1 / 8N2 / 8E1 [-]
Default value 8N1 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23866 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts communication mode of Modbus-RTU.

Possible options
8N1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
8N2 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
8E1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 474

 Group: CM-4G-GPS

Subgroup: Cellular Interface

Internet Connection

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24315 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.

6 back to List of setpoints

Network Mode

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 2G / 3G / 4G / Automatic [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24132 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts preferred connection type of CM2-4G-GPS module.

6 back to List of setpoints

Access Point Name

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value internet Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24363 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the network, provided by GSM operator.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 475

 Connection Check IP1

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23978 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the
connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 476

 Connection Check IP2

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23977 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the
connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 477

 Connection Check IP3

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value "empty" Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23976 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
IP address of reliable server in the internet.
To provide maximal reliability of wireless cellular connection the module is equipped with function that
periodically checks the data connection over the cellular network is working.
This function is based on periodical sending of ICMP messages (known as "ping") to reliable servers in the
internet and checking of their responses. If there is not any response received from any of the servers (at
least one setpoint Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 is filled with IP address) for certain time period, the
cellular connection is considered as non-working and the module will close and reestablish the
connection.
If all three servers are not defined (setpoints Connection Check IP1, IP2, IP3 have empty addresses) then
the cellular connection check is disabled

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 478

 Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings

DNS Mode

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23988 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the Internet Connection (page
475) set to Automatic.

Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 479) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 480) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24314 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If DNS Mode (page 479) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 479) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 479

 DNS IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23986 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If DNS Mode (page 479) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is
needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If DNS Mode (page 479) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is assigned
by the DHCP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

IP Firewall

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23959 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.

DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 480

 Subgroup: AirGate Settings

AirGate Connection

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled/ Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23968 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM2-4G-GPS.

DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the "AirGate" service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used.
The AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page
506).

IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Address

CM-4G-GPS; CM-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free
AirGate server provided by ComAp at [Link].

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 481

 Airgate Port

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 54440 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 24091 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
This port is used for TCP communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 54440 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings

Direct Connection

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23961 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 482

 Direct Connection Port

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23960 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
6 back to List of setpoints

ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-4G-GPS
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 24098 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for this
time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 483

 Subgroup: E-mail Settings

SMTP Server Address

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23962 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. [Link]) or IP address (e.g.
[Link]) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet
provider or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "[Link]" may
be used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with
new public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Sender Address

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23884 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 484

 SMTP User Name

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23883 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Password

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23882 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 485

 SMTP Encryption

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] None / SSL-TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value None Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23965 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
Encryption settings of SMTP communication.

NONE E-SMTP protocol without encryption is used.

Communication is started without encryption and then is switched to TLS
STARTTLS
encryption.
TLS Communication runs in TLS encryption.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 1

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 486

 Email Address 2

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 3

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 487

 Email Address 4

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Message Settings

E-mail/SMS Language

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] Depends on CU languages [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 488

 Event Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18971 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

AHI Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18994 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables AHI Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 489

 ALI Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18993 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables ALI Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU FC Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18723 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables ECU FC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 490

 Hst Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10568 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Hst Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 491

 BOC Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Sd Override Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11413 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Override Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 492

 Sd Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Message.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 1

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24296 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 493

 Telephone Number 2

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24295 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 3

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24143 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 494

 Telephone Number 4

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24142 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 5

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23904 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 495

 Telephone Number 6

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23903 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 7

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23902 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 496

 Telephone Number 8

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23901 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Telephone Number 9

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23900 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 497

 Telephone Number 10

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23899 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call)
or the full international format beginning with a "+" character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: GPS Settings

GPS Tracking

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23975 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
If GPS tracking is enabled the module sends position/speed data to the controller with period 10 s.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 498

 Subgroup: RTC Synchronization

NTP Clock Sync

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23964 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.
The period of synchronization is 1 hour or when the cotnroller is reset or when the setpoint is reset
(Enabled->Disabled->Enabled).

6 back to List of setpoints

NTP Server

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23963 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
NTP server address.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 499

 GPS Clock Sync

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23974 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable synchronization of the controller's time with the exact time from
GPS.
The module sends UTC timestamp to the controller after reset/power on and then in period of 60 minutes.

6 back to List of setpoints

Time Zone

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 500

 Group: CM-Ethernet

Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings

IP Address Mode

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] MANUAL / AUTOMATIC / DISABLED [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23939 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.

MANUAL The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask,
GateIP, DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When
this type of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This
means that it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
AUTOMATIC The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP
server. The obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the
process of obtaining the settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the
value [Link] is copied to the setpoint IP address and the module
continues to try to obtain the settings.
DISABLED The Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 501

 IP Address

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23950 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 501)
Description
The setpoint is used to set the address when you are in static mode .
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet
interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by
the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.
Note: Only valid IP address can be inserted.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subnet Mask

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23949 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 501)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 502

 Gateway IP

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23948 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 501)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS Mode

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23921 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the IP Address Mode (page
501) set to Automatic.

Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 504) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 504) can be
adjusted manually. Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related
Manual
issue, if local DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server
do not work

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 503

 DNS IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23947 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted .
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server
(DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP
addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

DNS IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23946 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is MANUAL this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server
(DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP
addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
If IP Address Mode (page 501) is DISABLED Ethernet terminal is disabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 504

 IP Firewall

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23920 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.

DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others – Firewall)

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: AirGate Settings

AirGate Connection

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23935 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint selects the AirGate connection mode.

DISABLED: This is a standard mode in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and
answers the TCP/IP queries addressed to it. This mode requires the controller to
be accessible from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public
and static IP address if you want to connect to it from the internet.
ENABLED This mode enables the AirGate service. The AirGate server address is adjusted by
the setpoint AirGate Address (page 506). Also the standard TCP/IP is enabled.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 505

 AirGate Address

CM-4G-GPS; CM-
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24364 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free
AirGate server provided by ComAp at [Link].

6 back to List of setpoints

AirGate Port

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 23919 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This port is used for TCP data communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 21, 23 or 6127 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 506

 Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings

Direct Connection

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23917 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.

6 back to List of setpoints

Direct Connection Port

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23918 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 507

 ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

CM-Ethernet
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-4G-GPS
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 24098 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for this
time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: MODBUS Settings

MODBUS Server

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23937 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enable or disable Modbus communication via ethernet interface.

6 back to List of setpoints

MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout

Setpoint group Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Comm object 24097 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Modbus connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a Modbus client does not communicate for this
time.
6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 508

 Subgroup: SNMP Settings

SNMP Agent

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Disabled / SNMP v1/v2c / SNMP v3 [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23936 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoints Enables or disables Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Agent.
Note: SNMP v3 has upgraded encryption, remote configuration, and security (extra setpoints are
available).

Note: It is supported only User-Based security model (USM, RFC-3414). View-based Access Control
Model (VACM, RFC-3415) is not supported.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Trap Format

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] v1Trap / v2Notif / v2Inform [-]
Default value v1Trap Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23922 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint adjusts type of SNMP traps.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 509

 SNMP Traps IP Address 1

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24095 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Traps IP Address 2

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24094 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP RD Community String

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value public Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23941 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
509)
Description
SNMP Community String only for reading.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 510

 SNMP WR Community String

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Default value private Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23940 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
509)
Description
SNMP Community String for writing and reading.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Engine User Name

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value - Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23851 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 509) = SNMP v3
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at SNMP system.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Privacy Protocol

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] DES / 3DES / AES128 / AES256 [-]
Default value AES128 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23853 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 509) = SNMP v3
Description
Selects SNMP v3 Privacy Protocol.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 511

 SNMP Authentication Protocol

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] MD5 / SHA / SHA256[-]
Default value SHA Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23854 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 509) = SNMP v3
Description
Selects SNMP v3 Authentication Protocol.

6 back to List of setpoints

SNMP Security Level

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] NONE/ AUTH-NOPRIV / AUTH-PRIV [-]
Default value NONE Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23852 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if SNMP Agent (page 509) = SNMP v3
Description
Selects SNMP v3 security level. If NONE the agent will work in SNMP v2c mode.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 512

 Subgroup: E-mail Settings

SMTP Server Address

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23942 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. [Link]) or IP address (e.g.
[Link]) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet
provider or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "[Link]" may
be used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with
new public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP Sender Address

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23881 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.

IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 513

 SMTP UserName

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 31 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23880 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

SMTP User Password

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23879 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 514

 SMTP Encryption

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] None / SSL-TLS / STARTTLS [-]
Default value None Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23938 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
Encryption settings of SMTP communication.

NONE E-SMTP protocol without encryption is used.

Communication is started without encryption and then is switched to TLS
STARTTLS
encryption.
TLS Communication runs in TLS encryption.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 1

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24298 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 515

 Email Address 2

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24297 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

Email Address 3

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24145 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 516

 Email Address 4

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0
Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24144 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Messages Settings

BOC Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 517

 E-mail/SMS Language

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] Depends on CU languages [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24299 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

AHI Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18994 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables AHI Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 518

 ALI Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18993 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables ALI Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Hst Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10568 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Hst Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 519

 Event Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18971 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

ECU FC Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 18723 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables ECU FC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 520

 BOC Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10566 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Sd Override Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11413 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Override Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 521

 Sd Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8484 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Message.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

Wrn Message

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8482 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
This setpoint is common for CM3-Ethernet and CM2-4G-GPS modules.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 522

 Subgroup: NTP Settings

NTP Clock Synchronization

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23934 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.

6 back to List of setpoints

NTP Server

Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] [-]
Default value [Link] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 23933 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
NTP server address.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 523

 Time Zone

CM-4G-GPS
Setpoint group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 24366 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information
about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP

Subgroup: EFCP Settings

Earth Fault Current Protection

Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 11631 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
This setpoint can block or allow Earth fault Current protection.

DISABLED Earth fault current protection is blocked.

ENABLED Earth fault current protection is allowed. Behavior of Earth fault current protection
is set by these setpoints: Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 525), Earth Fault
CT Ratio (page 525), Earth Fault Delay (page 525) and Earth Fault Sd (page
526).

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 524

 Earth Fault Delay

Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0.03 .. 5.00 [s]
Default value 0.10 s Alternative config NO
Step 0.01 s
Comm object 11633 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Delay for Earth Fault Current protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Earth Fault CT Input Range

Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 [A] / 5 [A]
Default value 5A Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 14340 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
There are 2 physical inputs for Earth Fault Current Protection (page 524). Value of this setpoint has to
be set on value of physical input which is presently in use.

6 back to List of setpoints

Earth Fault CT Ratio

Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 2000 [1/(1or5) A]
Default value 500 1/(1or5)A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/ 1A; 1 A/5 A
Comm object 14339 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Earth Fault current transformer ratio.
Note: Type of units depends on setpoint Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 525) which have to be
set before this setpoint.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 525

 Earth Fault Sd
Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.6.0
Range [units] 0.03 .. 200.00 [A]
Default value 0.30 A Alternative config NO
Step 0.01 [A]
Comm object 11632 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
Limit value for Earth Fault Current protection.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: Alternate Config

Subgroup: Configuration 1

Nominal RPM 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9915 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 526

 Nominal Frequency 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 30 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 9913 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12052 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12055 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 528).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 527

 Nominal Current 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12049 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current.
Nominal Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection Type 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12058 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 528

 Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
High Leg Delta L2 >=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
3Ph Low Y L2 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
3Ph High Y L2 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L3 L2 <= 20 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L2 L2 >= 100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
Mono Phase L2 <= 20 V
L3 <= 20 V
Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 529

 ECU Speed Adjustment 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14337 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12046 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 210) is adjusted to Monophase or
SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3 or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect
detects connection type as 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 530

 Nominal Power Split Phase 1

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15771 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 210)
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload
BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 210) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3.

Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Configuration 2

Nominal RPM 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 9916 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 531

 Nominal Frequency 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 30 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 9914 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12053 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 533).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12056 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 533).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 532

 Nominal Current 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12050 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current.
Nominal Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection type 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12059 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 533

 Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
High Leg Delta L2 >=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
3Ph Low Y L2 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
3Ph High Y L2 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L3 L2 <= 20 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L2 L2 >= 100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
Mono Phase L2 <= 20 V
L3 <= 20 V
Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 534

 ECU Speed Adjustment 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 14338 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12047 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 533) is adjusted to Monophase
or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3 or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect
detects connection type as 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 535

 Nominal Power Split Phase 2

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15772 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 533)
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload
BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 2 (page 533) is adjusted to Autodetect
and Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Configuration 3

Nominal RPM 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Comm object 15196 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 536

 Nominal Frequency 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 30 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Comm object 15197 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12054 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 538).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Default value 400 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Comm object 12057 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 538).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 537

 Nominal Current 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Comm object 12051 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current.
Nominal Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Connection type 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Mono Phase / SplPhL1L2 / SplPhL1L3 / 3Ph3Wire / 3Ph4Wire / High Leg D /
Range [units]
Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 12060 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L2 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
SplPhL1L3 Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L3 with 180° phase shift
2x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 538

 Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3x CT (Current Transformer)
Autodetect
L1 >=100 V; L1 <=140 V
High Leg Delta L2 >=140 V
L3 >=100 V; L3 <=140 V
L1 <=160 V
3Ph Low Y L2 <=160 V
L3 <=160 V
L1 >160 V
3Ph High Y L2 >160 V
L3 >160 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L3 L2 <= 20 V
L3 >=100 V
L1 >=100 V
SplPhL1L2 L2 >= 100 V
L3 <= 20 V
L1 >=100 V
Mono Phase L2 <= 20 V
L3 <= 20 V
Voltage Autodetect shutdown

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 539

 ECU Speed Adjustment 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Default value 50 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Comm object 15199 Related applications MRS
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. This setpoint
should be used only for Volvo Penta and Scania engines. It has no effect on other engine brands.
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

Nominal Power 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 12048 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 538) is adjusted to Monophase
or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3 or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect
detects connection type as 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 540

 Nominal Power Split Phase 3

Setpoint group Alternate Config Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [kW]
Default value 200 kW Alternative config YES
Step 1 kW
Comm object 15773 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 3 (page 538)
Description
Nominal power of the Gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload
BOC (page 266) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type 3 (page 538) is adjusted to Autodetect
and Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or SplitphaseL1L2 or SplitphaseL1L3.

Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 607) is active.

6 back to List of setpoints

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 541

8.1.3 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups
according to their meaning.
For a full list of values go to the chapter List of values (page 543).

Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor failure has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as "####" in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the
case of unsigned values.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 542

 List of values

Group: AUX Battery 545 Generator Voltage L1-L2 556 Load Current L2 564
AUX Batt Capacity 545 Generator Voltage L1-N 556 Load Current L3 564
AUX Batt Current 545 Generator Voltage L2-L3 556 Group: User Buttons 564
AUX Batt Cycles 546 Generator Voltage L2-N 557 User Buttons 564
AUX Batt Power 546 Generator Voltage L3-L1 557 Group: Dual operation 564
AUX Batt SoC 546 Generator Voltage L3-N 557 Master Running Hours 564
AUX Batt SoH 547 Generator Current Running Hours To Swap 565
AUX Batt State 547 Unbalance 557 Slave Running Hours 565
AUX Batt Temperature 548 Generator V Unbalance Group: Controller I/O 565
AUX Batt Voltage 549 Ph-N 558 Battery Volts 565

AUX Batt Charging Time Generator V Unbalance D+ 565

Remaining 549 Ph-Ph 558 Analog Input 1 566
AUX Batt Remaining Nominal Current 558 Analog Input 2 566
Cycles 549 Nominal Power 559 Analog Input 3 566
Full Charge 550 Nominal Voltage 559 Analog Input 4 566
Group: DC Load 550 Group: Load 559 Binary Inputs 566
Load Current 550 Load P 559
E-Stop 567
Load Voltage 550 Load P L1 559
Binary Outputs 567
Load Power 551 Load P L2 560
Group: Statistics 567
Group: PV 551 Load P L3 560 Genset kWh 567
PV Current 551 Load Q 560 Genset kVArh 567
PV Power 551 Load Q L1 560 Universal Hours Counter 1 568
PV Voltage 552 Load Q L2 560 Universal Hours Counter 2 568
Group: Rectifier 552 Load Q L3 561 AUX Batt Charging Hours 568
Rectifier Current 552 Load S 561 AUX Batt Charging kWh 568
Rectifier Power 552 Load S L1 561 AUX Batt Discharging
Rectifier Voltage 553 Load S L2 561 Hours 569
Group: Engine 554 Load S L3 561 AUX Batt Discharging kWh 569
RPM 554 Load Power Factor 562 Load kWh 569
ECU Frequency Select 554 Load Power Factor L1 562 PV kWh 569
Speed Request 554 Load Power Factor L2 562 Rectifier kWh 569
Requested RPM 555 Load Power Factor L3 562 Maintenance Timer 1
DPF Soot Load 555 Load Character 562 RunHours 570
DPF Ash Load 555 Load Character L1 563 Maintenance Timer 1
DEF Level 555 Load Character L2 563 Interval 570

Group: Generator 556 Load Character L3 563 Maintenance Timer 2

Earth Fault Current 556 RunHours 570
Load Current L1 563
Generator Frequency 556 Maintenance Timer 2 570

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 543

 Interval Log Bout 6 579 Secondary DNS 589
Maintenance Timer 3 Log Bout 7 579 AirGate ID 589
RunHours 571 Log Bout 8 579 AirGate Servicing Node 589
Maintenance Timer 3 Log Bout 9 579 AirGate Status 590
Interval 571
Group: Fixed Protection Last Email Results 591
Rental 1 571 States 580 MAC Address 591
Rental 2 571 Fixed Protections States 1 580 Ethernet PHY Mode 592
Num E-Stops 572 Fixed Protections States 2 580
Group: Date/Time 592
Shutdowns 572 Fixed Protections States 3 580 Subgroup: Time&Date 592
Total Fuel Consumption 572 Fixed Protections States 4 580 Date 592
Time Till Empty 1 573 Fixed Protections States 5 581 Time 592
Time Till Empty 2 573 Group: User Protection Time Mode 593
Time Till Empty 3 573 States 581
Subgroup: Timers 593
Num Starts 573 User Protections States 1 581
Exercise Timer 1 593
Pulse Counter 1 574 Group: CM-4G-GPS 581
Exercise Timer 2 593
Pulse Counter 2 574 Signal Strength 581
Exercise Timer 3 593
Running Hours 574 Network Status 581
Exercise Timer 4 594
Last Email Result 582
Group: Info 574 Exercise Timer 5 594
Active Application 574 Network Name 583
Exercise Timer 6 594
Controller Mode 575 Network Mode 583
Exercise Timer 7 594
Application 575 GPS Status 583
Exercise Timer 8 595
Breaker State 575 Latitude 583
Exercise Timer 9 595
Connection Type 575 Longitude 584
Exercise Timer 10 595
Engine State 575 Active Satellites 584
Exercise Timer 11 595
FW Branch 576 Speed 584
Exercise Timer 12 596
FW Version 576 HomePosDist 584
Exercise Timer 13 596
HW Version 576 AirGate Status 585
Exercise Timer 14 596
ID String 576 AirGate ID 585
Exercise Timer 15 596
Load Shedding Status 576 AirGate Servicing Node 585
Exercise Timer 16 597
SPI Module A 577 Current IP Address 586
Subgroup: Sunrise/Sunset 597
SPI Module B 577 Primary DNS 586
Calculated Sunrise Date 597
SW Key Feature List 577 Secondary DNS 586
Calculated Sunrise Time597
Timer Text 577 Modem Status 586
Calculated Sunset Date 597
Timer Value 577 Modem FW Version 588
Calculated Sunset Time 598
Group: Log Bout 578 Group: CM-Ethernet 588
Real Sunrise Date 598
Log Bout 1 578 ETH Interface Status 588
Real Sunrise Time 598
Log Bout 2 578 Current IP Address 588
Real Sunset Date 598
Log Bout 3 578 Current Subnet Mask 588
Real Sunset Time 599
Log Bout 4 578 Current Gateway 589
Sunrise/Sunset Effective
Log Bout 5 578 Primary DNS 589
Latitude 599

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 544

 Sunrise/Sunset Effective AUX Batt Capacity AUX Batt Current
Longitude 599
Val AU Val AU
Group: Remote Control 599 ue X Relate 1. ue X Relate 1.
RemoteControl2B 1 599 gro Batt d FW 6.0 gro Batt d FW 6.0
RemoteControl2B 2 600 up ery up ery

RemoteControl2B 3 600 Uni Uni

Ah A
ts ts
RemoteControl2B 4 600
Co Relate Co Relate
RemoteControlBin 600
mm 158 d M mm 196 d M
Group: Plug-In I/O 601
obj 69 applica RS obj 18 applica RS
EM BIO A 601
ect tions ect tions
EM BIO B 601
Description Description
Group: PLC 601 Actual value of capacity of Actual value of current of
PLC-BOUT 1 601 AUX Battery . Value is AUX Battery . Value is
PLC-BOUT 2 601 read from LAI AUX BATT read from LAI AUX BATT
PLC-BOUT 3 602 CHARGE LEV (PAGE 686). CURRENT (PAGE 686).

PLC-BOUT 4 602 Note: This function is Note: This function is

PLC-BOUT 5 602 supported only in supported only in
hybrid applications - hybrid applications -
PLC-BOUT 6 602
AMF25 Hybrid and AMF25 Hybrid and
PLC-BOUT 7 602
MRS16 Hybrid. MRS16 Hybrid.
PLC Resource 1 603
PLC Resource 2 603 6 back to List of values 6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 3 603

PLC Resource 4 603
PLC Resource 5 603
PLC Resource 6 604
PLC Resource 7 604
PLC Resource 8 604
6 back to Controller
objects

Group: AUX Battery

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 545

 AUX Batt Cycles AUX Batt Power AUX Batt SoC

Val AU Val AU Val AU

ue X Relate 1. ue X Relate 1. ue X Relate 1.
gro Batt d FW 6.0 gro Batt d FW 6.0 gro Batt d FW 6.0
up ery up ery up ery
Uni Uni Uni
- kW %
ts ts ts
Co Relate Co Relate Co Relate
mm 187 d M mm 158 d M mm 158 d M
obj 22 applica RS obj 52 applica RS obj 57 applica RS
ect tions ect tions ect tions
Description Description Description
Actual number of cycles of Actual value of power of Actual value of State of
AUX Battery . Value is AUX Battery . Value is Charge (SoC) of AUX
read from LAI AUX BATT counted from LAIs AUX Battery . Value is read
CYCLES (PAGE 686) or is BATT CURRENT (PAGE from LAI AUX BATT SOC
counted by controller 686) and AUX BATT (PAGE 686).
when LAI is not VOLTAGE (PAGE 687). Note: This function is
configured. Rule for Note: This function is supported only in
coounting of cycles by supported only in hybrid applications -
controller - each start in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and
AUTO mode when battery AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.
starting conditions are MRS16 Hybrid.
fulfilled and there is Mains 6 back to List of values
Fail (AMF only) and BCB 6 back to List of values
is closed will increase this
value.
Note: This function is
supported only in
hybrid applications -
AMF25 Hybrid and
MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 546

 AUX Batt SoH AUX Batt State
Descrip
State
Val AU Val tion
AUX Rel
ue X Relate 1. ue
Batt ated 1.6.0 AUX
gro Batt d FW 6.0 gro
ery FW battery
up ery up
circuit
Uni Unit breaker
-
ts s (BCB) is
Co Relate Rel closed
Co
mm 190 d M ated and
mm 190
obj 27 applica RS appl MRS AUX
obje 16
ect tions icati BATT
ct
Description ons C
Description URRENT
Actual value of State of
(PAGE
Health (SoH) of AUX Actual state of AUX
545) has
Battery . Value is read battery based on Dischar
discharg
from LAI AUX BATT SOH measured AUX battery ging
ing
(PAGE 687). current.
polarity -
Note: This function is adjusted
supported only in by
hybrid applications - setpoint
AMF25 Hybrid and AUX
MRS16 Hybrid. Batt
Chrg
6 back to List of values
Current
Charact
er
(page
281)
AUX
battery
circuit
breaker
(BCB) is
closed
and
AUX
Chargin BATT
g C
URRENT
(PAGE
545) has
charging
polarity -
adjusted
by

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 547

 AUX Batt Temperature
setpoint LAI AUX
AUX BATT Val AU
Batt C ue X Relate 1.
Chrg URRENT gro Batt d FW 6.0
Current (PAGE up ery
Charact 545) is Uni
er not ts
(page configur Co Relate
281) None ed - mm 158 d M
AUX there is obj 61 applica RS
battery no ect tions
circuit informat
Description
breaker ion
about Actual value of
(BCB) is
Disconn AUX temperature of AUX
open -
ected battery Battery . Value is read
AUX
state from LAI AUX BATT TEMP
battery
(PAGE 687).
is Note: This function is
disconn Note: This function is
supported only in
ected supported only in
hybrid applications -
hybrid applications -
AUX AMF25 Hybrid and
AMF25 Hybrid and
battery MRS16 Hybrid.
MRS16 Hybrid.
circuit
breaker 6 back to List of values
6 back to List of values
(BCB) is
closed
and
AUX
BATT
C
URRENT
(PAGE
545) is
Ready close to
0-
current
is in
window
defined
by 1/200
of AUX
Batt
Nomina
l
Capacit
y (page
281)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 548

 AUX Batt Voltage AUX Batt Charging Time AUX Batt Remaining
Remaining Cycles
Val AU
ue X Relate 1. Val AU Val AU
gro Batt d FW 6.0 ue X Relate 1. ue X Relate 1.
up ery gro Batt d FW 6.0 gro Batt d FW 6.0
Uni up ery up ery
ts Uni Uni
min -
Co Relate ts ts
mm 143 d M Co Relate Co Relate
obj 71 applica RS mm 185 d M mm 190 d M
ect tions obj 77 applica RS obj 09 applica RS
Description ect tions ect tions

Actual value of voltage of Description Description

AUX Battery . Value is Maximal remaining time of Actual value of remaining
read from LAI AUX BATT charging cycle when charging cycles made by
VOLTAGE (PAGE 687). AUX battery is charged by gen-set in actual day
Note: This function is gen-set. Time is adjusted when Max AUX Batt
supported only in in setpoint Max AUX Batt Cycles Per Day (page
hybrid applications - Charging Time (page 289) function is used.
AMF25 Hybrid and 287). When this timer Note: This function is
MRS16 Hybrid. counts down to 0 or when supported only in
stop conditions are met, hybrid applications -
6 back to List of values gen-set is stopped. AMF25 Hybrid and
Note: This function is MRS16 Hybrid.
supported only in
hybrid applications - 6 back to List of values
AMF25 Hybrid and
MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 549

 Full Charge Group: DC Load Load Voltage

Val AU Load Current Val

DC
ue X Relate 1. ue Relate 1.6
Val Loa
gro Batt d FW 6.0 DC gro d FW .0
ue Relate 1.6 d
up ery Loa up
gro d FW .0
Uni d Uni
- up V
ts ts
Uni
Co Relate A Co Relate
ts
mm 189 d M mm 143 d M
obj 82 applica RS Co Relate obj 73 applica RS
ect tions mm 190 d M ect tions
obj 13 applica RS
Description Description
ect tions
This value informs user Actual value of voltage of
Description
about state of Full DC Load . Value is read
Charge Cycle (page 287) Actual value of current of from LAI LOAD VOLTAGE
function. DC Load . Value is read (PAGE 688).
from LAI LOAD CURRENT
YES - full charge Note: This function is
(PAGE 688).
cycle is performed supported only in
NO - standard Note: This function is hybrid applications -
supported only in AMF25 Hybrid and
cycle is performed
hybrid applications - MRS16 Hybrid.
Note: This function is AMF25 Hybrid and
supported only in MRS16 Hybrid. 6 back to List of values
hybrid applications -
AMF25 Hybrid and 6 back to List of values
MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 550

 Load Power Group: PV PV Power

Val PV Current Val

DC
ue Relate 1.6 ue Relate 1.6
Loa Val PV
gro d FW .0 gro d FW .0
d ue Relate 1.6
up PV up
gro d FW .0
Uni Uni
kW up kW
ts ts
Uni
Co Relate A Co Relate
ts
mm 204 d M mm 155 d M
obj 95 applica RS Co Relate obj 94 applica RS
ect tions mm 190 d M ect tions
obj 14 applica RS
Description Description
ect tions
Actual value of power of Actual value of power of
Description
DC Load . Value is PV . Value is counted from
counted from LAIs LOAD Actual value of current of LAIs PV CURRENT (PAGE
VOLTAGE (PAGE 688) and PV . Value is read from 689) and PV VOLTAGE
LOAD CURRENT (PAGE LAI PV CURRENT (PAGE (PAGE 689).
688). 689).
Note: This function is
Note: This function is Note: This function is supported only in
supported only in supported only in hybrid applications -
hybrid applications - hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and
AMF25 Hybrid and AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.
MRS16 Hybrid. MRS16 Hybrid.
6 back to List of values
6 back to List of values 6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 551

 PV Voltage Group: Rectifier Rectifier Power

Val Rectifier Current Val

ue Relate 1.6 ue Rect Relate 1.
PV Val
gro d FW .0 gro ifier d FW 6.0
up ue Rect Relate 1. up
gro ifier d FW 6.0
Uni Uni
V up kW
ts ts
Uni
Co Relate A Co Relate
ts
mm 190 d M mm 190 d M
obj 15 applica RS Co Relate obj 10 applic RS
ect tions mm 190 d M ect ations
obj 11 applic RS
Description Description
ect ations
Actual value of voltage of Actual value of power of
Description
PV . Value is read from rectifier . Value is counted
LAI PV VOLTAGE (PAGE Actual value of current of from LAIs RECTIFIER
689). rectifier . Value is read CURRENT (PAGE 690) and
from LAI RECTIFIER RECTIFIER VOLTAGE (PAGE
Note: This function is
CURRENT (PAGE 690). 690).
supported only in
hybrid applications - Note: This function is Note: This function is
AMF25 Hybrid and supported only in supported only in
MRS16 Hybrid. hybrid applications - hybrid applications -
AMF25 Hybrid and AMF25 Hybrid and
6 back to List of values MRS16 Hybrid. MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of values 6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 552

 Rectifier Voltage

Val
ue Rect Relate 1.
gro ifier d FW 6.0
up
Uni
V
ts
Co Relate
mm 190 d M
obj 12 applic RS
ect ations
Description
Actual value of voltage of
rectifier . Value is read
from LAI RECTIFIER
VOLTAGE (PAGE 690).
Note: This function is
supported only in
hybrid applications -
AMF25 Hybrid and
MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 553

 Group: Engine

RPM

Value group Engine Related FW 1.6.0

Units RPM
Comm object 10123 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains the current engine speed. The value is obtained from one of the following sources:
ECU, if an ECU is configured
Pickup input
Generator frequency

6 back to List of values

ECU Frequency Select

Value group Engine Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 12926 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows selected frequency of ECU. The value is calculated from setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 216)
If is Nominal Frequency (page 216) in range from 45 Hz to 54 Hz, is considered as 50 Hz
application. The value is set to 0.
If is Nominal Frequency (page 216) in range from 55 Hz to 65 Hz, is considered as 60 Hz
application. The value is set to 1.

6 back to List of values

Speed Request

Value group Engine Related FW 1.6.0

Units %
Comm object 10137 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains the speed control signal expressed in %.

Speed request Requested speed Accelerator pedal position

0% 1350 RPM 0%
50% 1500 RPM 50%
100% 1650 RPM 100%

Note: Accelerator pedal position will be 0 if the engine is not running or loaded.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 554

 Requested RPM

Value group Engine Related FW 1.6.0

Units RPM
Comm object 10006 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains the speed which is currently requested by the controller from the attached ECU.
This value is used for digital interfacing (via a communication bus) with ECUs that require the requested
speed directly in RPM.

6 back to List of values

DPF Soot Load

Value group Engine Related FW 1.6.0

Units %
Comm object 12484 Related applications MRS
Description
Indicates the soot load percentage of diesel particulate filter (DPF).

6 back to List of values

DPF Ash Load

Value group Engine Related FW 1.6.0

Units %
Comm object 12483 Related applications MRS
Description
Indicates the ash load percentage of diesel particulate filter (DPF).

6 back to List of values

DEF Level

Value group Engine Related FW 1.6.0

Units %
Comm object 14522 Related applications MRS
Description
The level of diesel exhaust fluid tank.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 555

 Group: Generator

Earth Fault Current

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units A
Comm object 14325 Related applications MRS
Description
Measured value of fault for evaluation of earth fault protection.

6 back to List of values

Generator Frequency

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units Hz
Comm object 8210 Related applications MRS
Description
Frequency of generator.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L1-L2

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 9628 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L1-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 8192 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 1.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L2-L3

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 9629 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L2 and L3 phases.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 556

 Generator Voltage L2-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 8193 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 2.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L3-L1

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 9630 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L3 and L1 phases.

6 back to List of values

Generator Voltage L3-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 8194 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator voltage on phase 3.

6 back to List of values

Generator Current Unbalance

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units A
Comm object 10550 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Load Current L1 (page 563), Load Current L2
(page 564) and Load Current L3 (page 564).
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 210).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 557

 Generator V Unbalance Ph-N

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 10548 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Generator Voltage L1-N (page 556), Generator
Voltage L2-N (page 557), Generator Voltage L3-N (page 557) at a given moment.
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 210).

6 back to List of values

Generator V Unbalance Ph-Ph

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 17336 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains the maximum difference of values Generator Voltage L1-L2 (page 556),
Generator Voltage L2-L3 (page 556), Generator Voltage L3-L1 (page 557) at a given moment.
Note: Difference of the values and the evaluation of the protection is influenced by the setpoint
Connection type (page 210).

6 back to List of values

Nominal Current

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units A
Comm object 9978 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator nominal current.
Calculation of value Nominal Current in Autodetect:
For Connection Type: SplPhL1L2 and SplPhL1L3 power factor 1 is used in the formula of
calculation of value Nominal Current.
For the other types: High Leg Delta, 3Ph Low Y, 3Ph High Y, Mono Phase power factor 0.8 is used.
Note: Visible only when Connection type (page 210) = Autodetect.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 558

 Nominal Power

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 9018 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator nominal power.
Note: Visible only when Connection type (page 210) = Autodetect.

6 back to List of values

Nominal Voltage

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 9917 Related applications MRS
Description
Generator nominal voltage.
Note: Visible only when Connection type (page 210) = Autodetect.

6 back to List of values

Group: Load

Load P

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kW
Comm object 8202 Related applications MRS
Description
Load active power.

6 back to List of values

Load P L1

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kW
Comm object 8524 Related applications MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 559

 Load P L2

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kW
Comm object 8525 Related applications MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

Load P L3

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kW
Comm object 8526 Related applications MRS
Description
Load active power in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Load Q

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 8203 Related applications MRS
Description
Load reactive power.

6 back to List of values

Load Q L1

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 8527 Related applications MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L1.

6 back to List of values

Load Q L2

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 8528 Related applications MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L2.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 560

 Load Q L3

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVAr
Comm object 8529 Related applications MRS
Description
Load reactive power in phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Load S

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8565 Related applications MRS
Description
Load apparent power.

6 back to List of values

Load S L1

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8530 Related applications MRS
Description
Load apparent power L1.

6 back to List of values

Load S L2

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8531 Related applications MRS
Description
Load apparent power L2.

6 back to List of values

Load S L3

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVA
Comm object 8532 Related applications MRS
Description
Load apparent power L3.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 561

 Load Power Factor

Load Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8204 Related applications MRS
Description
Load power factor.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor L1

Load Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8533 Related applications MRS
Description
Load power factor on phase L1.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor L2

Load Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8534 Related applications MRS
Description
Load power factor on phase L2.

6 back to List of values

Load Power Factor L3

Load Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8535 Related applications MRS
Description
Load power factor on phase L3.

6 back to List of values

Load Character

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8395 Related applications MRS
Description
Character of the load. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load (power factor =
1).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 562

 Load Character L1

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8626 Related applications MRS
Description
Character of the load on phase L1. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load
(power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load Character L2

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8627 Related applications MRS
Description
Character of the load on phase L2. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load
(power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load Character L3

Value group Load Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8628 Related applications MRS
Description
Character of the load on phase L3. "L" means inductive load, "C" is capacitive and "R" is resistive load
(power factor = 1).

6 back to List of values

Load Current L1

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units A
Comm object 8198 Related applications MRS
Description
Current phase L1 of Load.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 563

 Load Current L2

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units A
Comm object 8199 Related applications MRS
Description
Current phase L2 of Load.

6 back to List of values

Load Current L3

Value group Generator Related FW 1.6.0

Units A
Comm object 8200 Related applications MRS
Description
Current phase L3 of Load.

6 back to List of values

Group: User Buttons

User Buttons

Value group User Buttons Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 20743 Related applications MRS
Description
States of User Buttons.
Note: For more information see User Buttons on page 158.

6 back to List of values

Group: Dual operation

Master Running Hours

Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Units
Comm object 16044 Related applications MRS
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Master controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 574) + Running Hours Base (page 295)).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 564

 Running Hours To Swap

Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Units
Comm object 16046 Related applications MRS
Description
This value shows how long it will take until the swap between gen-sets will be made.

6 back to List of values

Slave Running Hours

Value group Dual operation Related FW 1.6.0

Units
Comm object 16045 Related applications MRS
Description
This is actual value of running hours of Slave controller used in dual operation function (Running Hours
(page 574) + Running Hours Base (page 295)).

6 back to List of values

Group: Controller I/O

Battery Volts

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 8213 Related applications MRS
Description
Controller supply voltage.

6 back to List of values

D+

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units V
Comm object 10603 Related applications MRS
Description
D+ terminal voltage.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 565

 Analog Input 1

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units Configurable
Comm object 9151 Related applications MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Analog Input 2

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units Configurable
Comm object 9152 Related applications MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 2 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Analog Input 3

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units Configurable
Comm object 9153 Related applications MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 3 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Analog Input 4

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units Configurable
Comm object 9154 Related applications MRS
Description
This is the value of the analog input 4 of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Binary Inputs

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8235 Related applications MRS
Description
State of the binary inputs of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 566

 E-Stop

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units %
Comm object 15780 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows number of E-STOP input – the same principle of visualization like binary inputs.
Principle of value (principle of normally close binary input):
1 – E-STOP has voltage – state is OK
0 – E-STOP has no voltage – protection is active

6 back to List of values

Binary Outputs

Value group Controller I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8239 Related applications MRS
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Group: Statistics

Genset kWh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 8205 Related applications MRS
Description
Counter of Gen-set active power.

6 back to List of values

Genset kVArh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kVArh
Comm object 8539 Related applications MRS
Description
Counter of Gen-set reactive power.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 567

 Universal Hours Counter 1

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units [h]
Comm object 20292 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains counted hours of running the engine while LBI UNIVERSAL HOURS COUNTER 1 (PAGE
631) is active.
Note: The engine has to be also running although it is not required to be excited.

6 back to List of values

Universal Hours Counter 2

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units [h]
Comm object 20293 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains counted hours of running the engine while LBI UNIVERSAL HOURS COUNTER 2 (PAGE
631) is active.
Note: The engine has to be also running although it is not required to be excited.

6 back to List of values

AUX Batt Charging Hours

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 18986 Related applications MRS
Description
Number of hours when AUX battery is in charging state. State of AUX battery is taken from value AUX
Batt State (page 547).

6 back to List of values

AUX Batt Charging kWh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 18990 Related applications MRS
Description
Counter of power of AUX battery used for charging. This value is counted from value AUX Batt Power
(page 546).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 568

 AUX Batt Discharging Hours

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 18988 Related applications MRS
Description
Number of hours when AUX battery is in discharging state. State of AUX battery is taken from value AUX
Batt State (page 547).

6 back to List of values

AUX Batt Discharging kWh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 18991 Related applications MRS
Description
Counter of power of AUX battery used for discharging. This value is counted from value AUX Batt Power
(page 546).

6 back to List of values

Load kWh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 18984 Related applications MRS
Description
Counter of power consumed by DC load. This value is counted from value Load Power (page 551).

6 back to List of values

PV kWh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 18983 Related applications MRS
Description
Counter of power supplied by PV. This value is counted from value PV Power (page 551).

6 back to List of values

Rectifier kWh

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units kWh
Comm object 18985 Related applications MRS
Description
Counter of power supplied by rectifier. This value is counted from value Rectifier Power (page 552).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 569

 Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units hours
Comm object 11616 Related applications MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 1.
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 261).

6 back to List of values

Maintenance Timer 1 Interval

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units days
Comm object 16387 Related applications MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 1.
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 262).

6 back to List of values

Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units hours
Comm object 11617 Related applications MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 2.
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page 263).

6 back to List of values

Maintenance Timer 2 Interval

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units days
Comm object 16388 Related applications MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 2.
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 2 Interval (page 263).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 570

 Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units hours
Comm object 11618 Related applications MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 3.
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page 264).

6 back to List of values

Maintenance Timer 3 Interval

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units days
Comm object 16389 Related applications MRS
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 3.
Statistic value for Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (page 265).

6 back to List of values

Rental 1

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units hours
Comm object 14328 Related applications MRS
Description
Remaining hours of Rental Timer 1 (page 460).

6 back to List of values

Rental 2

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units days
Comm object 14369 Related applications MRS
Description
Remaining days of Rental Timer 2 (page 462).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 571

 Num E-Stops

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11195 Related applications MRS
Description
Emergency stop alarms counter.
Note: This value counts only in case that Gen-set was stopped due to E-Stop or Emergency Stop.

6 back to List of values

Shutdowns

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11196 Related applications MRS
Description
Shutdown alarms counter. This counter counts all occurrences of a shutdown alarm, not only real
shutdowns of the Gen-set, i.e. the counter is increased by 2 if two shutdown alarms appear
simultaneously.

6 back to List of values

Total Fuel Consumption

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units L
Comm object 9040 Related applications MRS
Description
Value containing total amount of consumed fuel by engine. The controller automatically updates this value
every 30 s. The controller can calculate it in three ways:
Direct reading from ECU
Calculation based on actual fuel consumption reading from ECU
Calculation from fuel level drop in tank (using Fuel Level Analog Input + Fuel Tank Volume (page
253) setpoint)
Note: The accuracy of Total Fuel Consumption depends on the precision of ECU values or precision
of Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) and fuel level sensor.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 572

 Time Till Empty 1

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units days
Comm object 13770 Related applications MRS
Description
Assessment in days when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) and value from ECU Fuel Rate.
For correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

6 back to List of values

Time Till Empty 2

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units hours
Comm object 13771 Related applications MRS
Description
Assessment in hours when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) and value from ECU Fuel Rate.
For correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

6 back to List of values

Time Till Empty 3

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units minutes
Comm object 13772 Related applications MRS
Description
Assessment in minutes when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) and value from ECU Fuel Rate.
For correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

6 back to List of values

Num Starts

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8207 Related applications MRS
Description
Engine start commands counter. The counter is increased by 1 even if the particular start command will
take more than one attempt.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 573

 Pulse Counter 1

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 10986 Related applications MRS
Description
This is the value of PULSE COUNTER 1 (PAGE 624) function.
Note: Maximum value is 1000000.

6 back to List of values

Pulse Counter 2

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 10987 Related applications MRS
Description
This is the value of PULSE COUNTER 2 (PAGE 625) function.
Note: Maximum value is 1000000.

6 back to List of values

Running Hours

Value group Statistics Related FW 1.6.0

Units hours
Comm object 8206 Related applications MRS
Description
Engine operation hours counter. The engine hours are incremented in the controller while the engine is
running.
Note: If an ECU is configured and it provides engine hours value, the value is taken from the ECU.

6 back to List of values

Group: Info

Active Application

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14446 Related applications MRS
Description
This Value mirrors the active application in the controller.
Example: AMF or MRS.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 574

 Controller Mode

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9887 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains actual controller mode.

6 back to List of values

Application

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8480 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.
Example: AMF25, AMF20, AMF9, AMF8 or MRS16.

6 back to List of values

Breaker State

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9245 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains actual "breaker state" message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Connection Type

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 12944 Related applications MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the connection type which is adjusted in setpoint Connection type (page
210).

6 back to List of values

Engine State

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9244 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains actual "engine state" message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 575

 FW Branch

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 8707 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.

6 back to List of values

FW Version

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24339 Related applications MRS
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.

6 back to List of values

HW Version

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object Related applications MRS
Description
Major and minor hardware version number.

6 back to List of values

ID String

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24501 Related applications MRS
Description
Name of controller which is used in InteliConfig in command bar.

6 back to List of values

Load Shedding Status

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9591 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains actual "load shedding stage". The Value can get the values of the range 0 to 5, where 0
means no load shedding stage is active and 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 means that the corresponding load shedding
stage is active.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 576

 SPI Module A

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14447 Related applications MRS
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot A.

6 back to List of values

SPI Module B

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14448 Related applications MRS
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot B.

6 back to List of values

SW Key Feature List

Value group IL Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 20591 Related applications MRS
Description
This value shows state of features which are under SW key.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to List of values

Timer Text

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10040 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" text which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Timer Value

Value group Info Related FW 1.6.0

Units [HH:MM:SS]
Comm object 14147 Related applications MRS
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 577

 Group: Log Bout

Log Bout 1

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9143 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 2

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9144 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 3

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9145 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 4

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9146 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 5

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9147 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 578

 Log Bout 6

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9148 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 7

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9149 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 8

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 9150 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

Log Bout 9

Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 11896 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 579

 Group: Fixed Protection States

Fixed Protections States 1

Fixed Protection
Value group Related FW 1.6.0
States
Units [-]
Comm object 20744 Related applications MRS
Description
Values of LBO Fixed Protections State.

6 back to List of values

Fixed Protections States 2

Fixed Protection
Value group Related FW 1.6.0
States
Units [-]
Comm object 20745 Related applications MRS
Description
Values of LBO Fixed Protections State.

6 back to List of values

Fixed Protections States 3

Fixed Protection
Value group Related FW 1.6.0
States
Units [-]
Comm object 20746 Related applications MRS
Description
Values of LBO Fixed Protections State.

6 back to List of values

Fixed Protections States 4

Fixed Protection
Value group Related FW 1.6.0
States
Units [-]
Comm object 20747 Related applications MRS
Description
Values of LBO Fixed Protections State.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 580

 Fixed Protections States 5

Fixed Protection
Value group Related FW 1.6.0
States
Units [-]
Comm object 20748 Related applications MRS
Description
Values of LBO Fixed Protections State.

6 back to List of values

Group: User Protection States

User Protections States 1

Value group User Protection States Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 20759 Related applications MRS
Description
Values of LBO User Protections State.

6 back to List of values

Group: CM-4G-GPS

Signal Strength

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units %
Comm object 24302 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM2-4G-GPS
module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting cases.

6 back to List of values

Network Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24290 Related applications MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

Code Description
Not availab Not available
Available Available
Attached Attached

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 581

 Last Email Result

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24307 Related applications MRS
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
4 Maximum transmitted data length not defined.
5 No response from SMTP server.
6 Command to SMTP server not sent.
7 Did not receive data from SMTP server.
8 HELO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
18 SMTP server rejected email data.
19 SMTP server rejected email data.
20 QUIT command was refused.
22 Process of sending email aborted.
23 Closing connection error.
24 Failed to accept server response after connection is established.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
28 Error during encoding process.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 582

 Network Name

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24147 Related applications MRS
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.

6 back to List of values

Network Mode

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24146 Related applications MRS
Description
The type of data connection.

6 back to List of values

GPS Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 23973 Related applications MRS
Description
Value describing the GPS signal.

Code Description
Undefined GPS signal is not available. Check antenna connection.
Searching Looking up for signal from available satellites.
Fixed GPS signal available.

6 back to List of values

Latitude

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24268 Related applications MRS
Description
Actual GPS latitude. Positions on north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere
have negative value.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 583

 Longitude

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24267 Related applications MRS
Description
Actual GPS longitude. Positions on east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere
have negative value.

6 back to List of values

Active Satellites

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24265 Related applications MRS
Description
Number of available satellites for GPS location.

6 back to List of values

Speed

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24227 Related applications MRS
Description
Actual speed of the controller calculated from the GPS coordinates.

6 back to List of values

HomePosDist

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units km
Comm object 11680 Related applications MRS
Description
Actual distance from home position. Home position is adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 465)
and Home Longitude (page 466) or by binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE 620).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 584

 AirGate Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24308 Related applications MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

AirGate Status
Code Description
Not defined Setpoint AirGate Connection is Disabled
Wait to connect Waiting to connect
Resolving Resolving
Connecting Connecting
Creat sec chan Creating secure channel
Registering Registering
Conn inoperable Connected, inoperable
Conn operable Connected, operable
Susp AGkeyEmpty AirGate is not set in the controller

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24309 Related applications MRS
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

AirGate Servicing Node

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24087 Related applications MRS
Description
IP address of AirGate 2 node to which the module is currently attached.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 585

 Current IP Address

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24184 Related applications MRS
Description
Current IP address of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Primary DNS

CM-Ethernet
Value group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-4G-GPS
Units [-]
Comm object 24181 Related applications MRS
Description
Current domain name server.

6 back to List of values

Secondary DNS

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24100 Related applications MRS
Description
Backup domain name server.

6 back to List of values

Modem Status

Value group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24288 Related applications MRS
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the modem.

Modem Status
Code Description
OK Module successfully initialized and connected to the cellular network
E01 Unsuccessful restore to the factory settings
E02 Modem configuration error
SIM not inserted or locked by PIN.
E SIM Use another device (e.g. mobile phone) to disable the option for
SIM to be locked by PIN

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 586

 It is not possible to set manually chosen network mode
E04
2G/3G/4G/Automatic
It is not possible to register into cellular network. Possible reasons:
E registration No signal (no coverage, broken or unconnected antenna)
Manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G is not available
It is not possible to set PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context for defined
APN (Access Point Name). Possible reasons:
E context
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (format)
Wrong PDP context number
It is not possible to connect to cellular network (ATD*99***context)
E connect Possible reasons:
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (wrong text)
E08 Modem configuration error
E09 It is not possible to get signal strength
E10 It is not possible to get operator name
E11 Loss of registration into cellular network was detected
E12 Data error
E13 Data error
E14 Modem was restarted
It is not possible to send SMS. Possible reasons:
E SMS send Wrong number
SIM doesn’t support SMS
E18 Modem hardware configuration error
E conn lost Loss of connection with cellular network
E19 Modem configuration error
Restart-config Modem was restarted due to the change of controller setpoint
Restart-app Modem was restarted due to the performed cellular connection check

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 587

 Modem FW Version

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.6.0

Range [units] 1 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 54440 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Comm object 24149 Related applications MRS
Config level Standard
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Internet
Setpoint visibility
Connection (page 475)
Description
This value shows FW version of modem on CM2-4G-GPS plug-in card.

6 back to List of setpoints

Group: CM-Ethernet

ETH Interface Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24180 Related applications MRS
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.

6 back to List of values

Current IP Address

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24184 Related applications MRS
Description
Current IP address of the controller.

6 back to List of values

Current Subnet Mask

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24183 Related applications MRS
Description
Current subnet mask.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 588

 Current Gateway

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24182 Related applications MRS
Description
Current gateway address.

6 back to List of values

Primary DNS

CM-Ethernet
Value group Related FW 1.6.0
CM-4G-GPS
Units [-]
Comm object 24181 Related applications MRS
Description
Current domain name server.

6 back to List of values

Secondary DNS

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24100 Related applications MRS
Description
Backup domain name server.

6 back to List of values

AirGate ID

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24345 Related applications MRS
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.

6 back to List of values

AirGate Servicing Node

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24087 Related applications MRS
Description
IP address of AirGate 2 node to which the module is currently attached.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 589

 AirGate Status

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24344 Related applications MRS
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.

Code Description
Not defined Setpoint AirGate Connection is Disabled
Wait to connect Waiting to connect
Resolving Resolving
Connecting Connecting
Creat sec chan Creating secure channel
Registering Registering
Conn inoperable Connected, inoperable
Conn operable Connected, operable

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 590

 Last Email Results

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24332 Related applications MRS
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.

Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Cannot resolve SMTP server's IP address.
32 Error while reading email content data (24327).

6 back to List of values

MAC Address

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24333 Related applications MRS
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 591

 Ethernet PHY Mode

Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 24088 Related applications MRS
Description
Ethernet interface mode:

10- HD 10 Mbit Half-Duplex

10- FD 10 Mbit Full-Duplex
100- HD 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
10- FD 100 Mbit Full-Duplex

6 back to List of values

Group: Date/Time

Subgroup: Time&Date

Date

Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.6.0

Units [Link]
Comm object 24553 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows setup date.

6 back to List of values

Time

Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 24554 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows setup time.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 592

 Time Mode

Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 20252 Related applications MRS
Description
Indicates actual time mode.
STD – Standard zone time (e.g GMT+1 for Prague).
DST – Daylight Saving Time = STD+1 (e.g. GMT+2 for Prague).

6 back to List of values

Subgroup: Timers

Exercise Timer 1

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19664 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 1 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 2

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19665 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 2 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 3

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19666 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 3 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 593

 Exercise Timer 4

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19667 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 4 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 5

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19668 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 5 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 6

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19669 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 6 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 7

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19670 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 7 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 594

 Exercise Timer 8

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19671 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 8 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 9

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19672 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 9 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 10

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19673 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 10 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 11

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19674 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 11 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 595

 Exercise Timer 12

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19675 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 12 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 13

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19676 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 13 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 14

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19677 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 14 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Exercise Timer 15

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19678 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 15 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 596

 Exercise Timer 16

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 19679 Related applications MRS
Description
Shows actual value of exercise timer 16 in format HH:MM:SS.

6 back to List of values

Subgroup: Sunrise/Sunset

Calculated Sunrise Date

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units [Link]
Comm object 20220 Related applications MRS
Description
Date of Calculated Sunrise Time (page 597) calculated by Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330)
based on GPS coordinates.

6 back to List of values

Calculated Sunrise Time

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 20219 Related applications MRS
Description
Sunrise time calculated by Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330) based on GPS coordinates.

6 back to List of values

Calculated Sunset Date

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units [Link]
Comm object 20218 Related applications MRS
Description
Date of Calculated Sunset Time (page 598) calculated by Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330) based
on GPS coordinates.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 597

 Calculated Sunset Time

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 20217 Related applications MRS
Description
Sunset time calculated by Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330) based on GPS coordinates.

6 back to List of values

Real Sunrise Date

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units [Link]
Comm object 20224 Related applications MRS
Description
Date of Real Sunrise Time (page 598).

6 back to List of values

Real Sunrise Time

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 20223 Related applications MRS
Description
Calculated Sunrise Time (page 597) changed by setpoint Sunrise Offset (page 332). This time is used
for activation/deactivation of LBO SUNRISE/SUNSET ACTIVE (PAGE 679).

6 back to List of values

Real Sunset Date

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units [Link]
Comm object 20222 Related applications MRS
Description
Date of Real Sunset Time (page 599).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 598

 Real Sunset Time

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units HH:MM:SS
Comm object 20221 Related applications MRS
Description
Calculated Sunset Time (page 598) changed by setpoint Sunset Offset (page 332). This time is used
for activation/deactivation of LBO SUNRISE/SUNSET ACTIVE (PAGE 679).

6 back to List of values

Sunrise/Sunset Effective Latitude

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units °
Comm object 20212 Related applications MRS
Description
Value of latitude used in Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330). Value can be taken from CM2-4G-GPS
module or from setpoint Sunrise/Sunset Latitude (page 331).
Note: Value from CM2-4G-GPS has higher priority.

6 back to List of values

Sunrise/Sunset Effective Longitude

Value group Scheduler Related FW 1.6.0

Units °
Comm object 20211 Related applications MRS
Description
Value of longitude used in Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330). Value can be taken from CM2-4G-GPS
module or from setpoint Sunrise/Sunset Longitude (page 331).
Note: Value from CM2-4G-GPS has higher priority.

6 back to List of values

Group: Remote Control

RemoteControl2B 1

Value group Remote Control Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 16671 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains user data written over MODBUS-RTU or MODBUS-TCP. Data type of this value is
Int16.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 599

 RemoteControl2B 2

Value group Remote Control Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 16672 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains user data written over MODBUS-RTU or MODBUS-TCP. Data type of this value is
Int16.

6 back to List of values

RemoteControl2B 3

Value group Remote Control Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 16673 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains user data written over MODBUS-RTU or MODBUS-TCP. Data type of this value is
Int16.

6 back to List of values

RemoteControl2B 4

Value group Remote Control Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 16674 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains user data written over MODBUS-RTU or MODBUS-TCP. Data type of this value is
Int16.

6 back to List of values

RemoteControlBin

Value group Remote Control Related FW 1.6.0

Units -
Comm object 16683 Related applications MRS
Description
This value contains user data written over MODBUS-RTU or MODBUS-TCP. Data type of this value is
Binary16.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 600

 Group: Plug-In I/O

EM BIO A

Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14291 Related applications MRS
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot A.

6 back to List of values

EM BIO B

Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 14292 Related applications MRS
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot B.

6 back to List of values

Group: PLC

PLC-BOUT 1

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10424 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 2

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10425 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 601

 PLC-BOUT 3

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10426 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 4

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10427 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 5

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10428 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 6

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10429 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

PLC-BOUT 7

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10430 Related applications MRS
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 602

 PLC Resource 1

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10504 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 2

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10505 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 3

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10506 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 4

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10507 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 5

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10508 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 603

 PLC Resource 6

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10509 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 7

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10510 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

PLC Resource 8

Value group PLC Related FW 1.6.0

Units [-]
Comm object 10511 Related applications MRS
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).

6 back to List of values

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 604

8.1.4 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 607
LBI: B 612
LBI: C 612
LBI: D 613
LBI: E 614
LBI: F 618
LBI: G 619
LBI: H 621
LBI: I 621
LBI: L 622
LBI: M 622
LBI: N 622
LBI: O 623
LBI: P 623
LBI: R 625
LBI: S 627
LBI: T 631
LBI: U 631

For a full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 606).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 605

 Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Access Lock 607 ECU Red Lamp Fast Remote MAN 626
Alternate Config 2 607 Blink 615 Remote OFF 626
Alternate Config 3 607 ECU Red Lamp Solid 615 Remote Start/Stop 627
ATT DEF Level Lamp ECU Speed Down 615 Sd Override 627
Blink 607 ECU Speed Up 616 Start Blocking 627
ATT DEF Level Lamp ECU Wait To Start Blink 616 Start Button 628
Fast Blink 608 ECU Wait To Start Fast Starter 1 Disabled 628
ATT DEF Level Lamp Blink 616
Starter 2 Disabled 628
Solid 608 ECU Wait To Start Solid 616
Starter Priority 628
ATT DPF Lamp Blink 608 ECU Yellow Lamp Blink 616
Stop Button 628
ATT DPF Lamp Fast Blink608 ECU Yellow Lamp Fast
Sunrise/Sunset Home
ATT DPF Lamp Solid 608 Blink 617
Possition 629
ATT Force Regen 609 ECU Yellow Lamp Solid 617
Switch To AUT 629
ATT Force Regen Alt 609 Emergency MAN 617
Switch To MAN 630
ATT HEST Lamp Blink 609 Emergency Stop 617
Switch To OFF 630
ATT HEST Lamp Fast Fault Reset Button 618
Total Emergency Stop 631
Blink 609 Force Idle 618
Universal Hours Counter
ATT HEST Lamp Solid 610 Fuel Pump On/Off 619 1 631
ATT Inhibit Regen 610 GCB Button 619 Universal Hours Counter
ATT Inhibited Lamp Blink 610 GCB Disable 619 2 631
ATT Inhibited Lamp Fast GCB Feedback 620
Blink 610 6 back to Controller
Geo Home Position 620 objects
ATT Inhibited Lamp Solid 610
Geo-Fencing Enable 621
ATT Interlock 611
Horn Reset Button 621
ATT SCR Error Lamp
Idle Bypass 621
Blink 611
Idle Speed 621
ATT SCR Error Lamp
LCB Feedback 622
Fast Blink 611
Manual Load
ATT SCR Error Lamp
Reconnection 622
Solid 611
Neutral Position 622
AUX Batt Force Start 612
Oil Pressure 623
Battery Charger 612
Prestart Bypass 623
BCB Feedback 612
Protection Force Disable 624
Choke Inhibit 612
Pulse Counter 1 624
Dark Mode 613
Pulse Counter 2 625
Dual Swap Gen-sets 613
PVCB Feedback 625
Dual Top Priority 614
Remote AUTO 625
ECU Key Switch 615
Remote Ctrl Lock 626
ECU Red Lamp Blink 615

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 606

 LBI: A
Access Lock
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1
Description
When this input is active, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller's front panel and controller mode
(OFF / MAN / AUTO) cannot be changed. The front panel buttons can not be used as well.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from InteliConfig. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected.
Also the buttons Fault Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and
Stop in MAN mode are not blocked.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is used, change of alternate
configuration can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough
long time.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Alternate Config 3
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).
IMPORTANT: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is used, change of alternate
configuration can be made only in prestart phase. So prestart has to be set up for enough
long time.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT DEF Level Lamp Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1076
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and DEF
Level Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 607

 ATT DEF Level Lamp Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1077
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ATT
DEF Level Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT DEF Level Lamp Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1075
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ATT
DEF Level Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT DPF Lamp Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1067
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DPF Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ECU Filter
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT DPF Lamp Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1068
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DPF Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ATT Filter
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT DPF Lamp Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1066
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT DPF Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ATT DPF
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 608

 ATT Force Regen
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 680
Description
Aftertreatment Regeneration Force Switch
User manually activates regeneration function
Push-button control – function activated by pulse (signals longer than 5 seconds will be carried as
long as the input is active)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT Force Regen Alt
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1229
Description
Aftertreatment Regeneration Force Switch - regeneration without under votage and underfrequency
protections. DPF Regeneration RPM (page 246) are used.
User manually activates regeneration function
Push-button control – function activated by pulse (signals longer than 5 seconds will be carried as
long as the input is active)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT HEST Lamp Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1070
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT HEST Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ECU
HEST Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT HEST Lamp Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1071
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT HEST Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ATT
HEST Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 609

 ATT HEST Lamp Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1069
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT HEST Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and ATT
HEST Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT Inhibit Regen
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 679
Description
Aftertreatment Regeneration Inhibit Switch
User blocks automatic regeneration function
2 state switch control – function activated by still signal

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT Inhibited Lamp Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1079
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp (page 728) in alarmlist and
Inhibited Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT Inhibited Lamp Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1080
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp (page 728) in alarmlist and
Inhibited Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT Inhibited Lamp Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1078
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp (page 728) in alarmlist and ATT
Inhibited Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 610

 ATT Interlock
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 956
Description
ATT Regeneration Interlock
acts as acknowledgment for the ECU that everything is prepared for the DPF regeneration
User manually allows the regeneration (not same as Regen Force)
2-state switch control – function activated by still signal
Interlock activates Regeneration State after set of conditions is met, only after that the signal is
activated

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT SCR Error Lamp Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1073
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and SCR
Error Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT SCR Error Lamp Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1074
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and SCR
Error Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ATT SCR Error Lamp Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1072
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp (page 727) in alarmlist and SCR
Error Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 611

 AUX Batt Force Start
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1318
Description
This LBI can be used for force starting of charging cycle. By this LBI gen-set is started and runs until
stopping conditions is met or until maximal charging time is reach.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: B
Battery Charger
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 623
Description
When binary input is active and its delay Battery Charger Fail Delay (page 258) is out of time then alarm
Wrn Battery Charger Fail (page 739) is activated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

BCB Feedback
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1368
Description
Use this input for indication whether the battery circuit breaker is open or closed.
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: C
Choke Inhibit
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 946
Description
Logical binary input CHOKE INHIBIT prevent Choke functionality when logical binary output CHOKE (PAGE
642) is activated. If CHOKE INHIBIT is activated when CHOKE LBO is active, CHOKE LBO is deactivated
immediately and vice versa if LBI CHOKE INHIBIT is deactivated and LBO CHOKE should be active then is
activated.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 612

 6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: D
Dark Mode
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 930
Description
This binary input activates function of dark mode. It means that backlight of display and LEDs are turn off.
Information on controller screens are not affected. LEDs don’t react on normal condition of their activation
and deactivation.
Note: After deactivation of dark mode, backlight of display is turned on and than behaves normally.

Note: After deactivation of dark mode, Front Face status LEDs are turned on due to current situation
of gen-set.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Dual Swap Gen-sets
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 947
Description
This LBI enables or disables swapping of gen-sets on load in dual operation. This LBI has higher priority
then setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 296). This LBI is accepted only in Master controller.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 613

 Dual Top Priority
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 954
Description
This LBI defines, which gen-set has higher priority in dual operation mode. If this LBI is active on one gen-
set, this gen-set is used in dual operation function (running hours values are not used to decide, which
gen-set should start).
Setpoint Swap Gen-sets (page 296) or LBI DUAL SWAP GEN-SETS (PAGE 613) has higher priority than
this LBI.
Example: Engine 1 is running. LBI Top Priority is activated on engine 2. If swapping of gen-sets is
disabled, nothing happens. If swapping of gen-sets is enabled, engine 2 is started and engine 1 is
stopped.

Note: If this LBI is active on both gen-sets, the behavior is not changed. Decision is based on running
hours values.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: E
ECU Communication Fail Block

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 141
Description
Activation of this binary input blocks all protections (including user protections) for every single configured
ECU.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Communication Fail Block 1

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 1020
Description
Activation of this binary input blocks all protections (including user protections) for ECU configured in ECU
slot 1. Alarm Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail (page 725) is deactivated while this LBI is active.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Communication Fail Block 2

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 1021
Description
Activation of this binary input blocks all protections (including user protections) for ECU configured in ECU
slot 2. Alarm Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail (page 725) is deactivated while this LBI is active.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 614

 ECU Key Switch
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 951
Description
This binary input is used to switch on ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647), when engine start is not requested.
It is intended to enable engine values reading, when engine doesn't run.
When this binary input is active, binary output ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is active too.
When this binary input is inactive, function of ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is not affected.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Red Lamp Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1061
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Red Lamp (page 726) in alarmlist and ECU Red
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Red Lamp Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1062
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Red Lamp (page 726) in alarmlist and ECU Red
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Red Lamp Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1060
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Red Lamp (page 726) in alarmlist and ECU Red
Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Speed Down
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 164
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 260) by binary inputs. When
the LBI is activated the setpoint is decreased by 2 %.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 615

 ECU Speed Up
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 165
Description
This binary input is used to set the setpoint ECU Speed Adjustment (page 260) by binary inputs. When
the LBI is activated the setpoint is increase by 2%.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Wait To Start Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1064
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Wait To Start (page 727) in alarmlist and ECU
Wait To Start Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Wait To Start Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1065
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Wait To Start (page 727) in alarmlist and ECU
Wait To Start Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Wait To Start Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1063
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Wait To Start (page 727) in alarmlist and ECU
Wait to Start Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Yellow Lamp Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1058
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp (page 726) in alarmlist and ECU
Yellow Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 616

 ECU Yellow Lamp Fast Blink
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1059
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp (page 726) in alarmlist and ECU
Yellow Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is blinking fast.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

ECU Yellow Lamp Solid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1057
Description
When this LBI is active, there is active alarm Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp (page 726) in alarmlist and ECU
Yellow Lamp icon in Aftertreatment HMI screen is shown.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Emergency MAN
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the Gen-set system or breakers to be controlled externally, not by the
controller. This feature can be useful in case of some failure, which disables the Gen-set or breakers to be
controlled by the controller, but the Gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the Gen-set or breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is
detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the moment
of deactivation, i.e. the Gen-set remains running loaded if it was running and GCB was closed in the
moment the input was deactivated.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Emergency Stop
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 40
Description
The shutdown procedure will start immediately when this input is activated.
Note: In case of controller hardware or software fail, safe stop of the engine doesn’t have to be
ensured. To back-up the Emergency Stop function it is recommended to connect separate circuit for
disconnection of Fuel Solenoid and Starter signals.

For more detail see chapter Recommended wiring.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 617

 LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 191
Description

Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Force Idle
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 604
Description
This logical binary input can force engine to idle speed in MAN or AUTO mode.
Note: This binary input has no influence on engine cooling speed.

IMPORTANT: GCB has to be open

Activation of LBI:
Following procedure is executed:
Alarm AHI Manual Idle (page 713) is activated
LBO IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) is switched to idle state and value Requested RPM (page 555)
goes to Idle RPM (page 235) value
Underfrequency protection and undervoltage protection are not evaluated
Controller is in Manual Idle state until deactivation of this LBI
Deactivation of LBI
Controller goes to MinStab state
AHI Manual Idle (page 713) is not present in alarm list
LBO IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 663) is switched to nominal state and valueRequested RPM (page 555)
goes to nominal value
Controller goes to Running state

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 618

 Fuel Pump On/Off
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 694
Description
This binary input is used for manual control of binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654). The output is
deactivated automatically as soon as fuel level reaches 100 %.
Note: This binary input is basically designed for ON and OFF switch (switch with arrestment in these
positions) because controller reacts to rising and falling edge of signal in this input.

IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 619) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) is control by this binary input.

IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 688) for proper
function of this binary input.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: G
GCB Button
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 193
Description

Binary input has the same function as the GCB button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

GCB Disable
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 62
Description
When this LBI is active, it is not possible to close GCB – LBO GCB Close/Open, GCB ON Coil cannot be
activated by panel GCB close button, or close command or by auto command.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 619

 GCB Feedback
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 63
Description
Use this input for indication whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed.

Image 8.27 GCB Feedback 1

Image 8.28 GCB Feedback 2

Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Geo Home Position
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 219
Description
This binary input can be used to adjust home position of gen-set. In case that binary input is active,
setpoints Home Latitude (page 465) and Home Longitude (page 466) are adjusted automatically from
actual coordinates from GPS signal.
Note: Input has to be activated for at least 2 seconds.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 620

 Geo-Fencing Enable
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 218
Description
This binary input enables or disables Fence 1 Protection (page 467) and Fence 2 Protection (page
469) if Group: Geo-Fencing (page 465) is adjusted to value "LBI Enable".

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 192
Description

Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliLite 4 front panel.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: I
Idle Bypass
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1216
Description
When this LBI is active, controller will skip Idle phase.
LBI is active before idle time – CU goes directly to min stab time
LBI is activated during idle time – idle time is skipped and CU goes to min stab time

Note: LBI FORCE IDLE (PAGE 618) has higher priority

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Idle Speed
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 624
Description
This binary input changes cooling speed from nominal to idle.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 621

 LBI: L
LCB Feedback
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1370
Description
Use this input for indication whether the load circuit breaker is open or closed.
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: M
Manual Load Reconnection
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 60
Description
This input is used for manual reconnection of the last disconnected part of the load, if the load has dropped
below the setpoint Load Reconnection Level (page 299). This works only if automatic reconnection is
disabled, i.e. the setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 300) = Disabled.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: N
Neutral Position
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1090
Description
In MAN mode this input switches a three position ATS switch to its neutral position – it activates the binary
outputs NEUTRAL CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 668) and NEUTRAL ON COIL (PAGE 668). MCB and GCB are
switched to off.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 622

 LBI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 43
Description
Binary input for Oil Pressure indication.
IMPORTANT: This binary input is also used for evaluating engine running condition.

Example: Normally close connection – when LBI is active then oil pressure is OK and is higher than
starting oil pressure.

Note: In case that you want to use binary input Oil Pressure just for protection please create new
binary input with User protection.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: P
Prestart Bypass
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 42
Description
While this LBI is active, Gen-set skips prestart phase.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 623

 Protection Force Disable
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 16
Description
Activation of this LBI disables selected protections.
Proper history record is written to the history log.
Protection Force Disable active
Protection Force Disable inactive

Note: Some of the fixed protections has possibility to turn off. These protections has dedicated
setpoints located in setpoint group Protections. Setpoints have options: Enabled, Disabled (protection
is turned off), ExtDisabled (protection is turned off by LBI).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Pulse Counter 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 87
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 1 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 1 (page 259) the
counter value Pulse Counter 1 (page 574) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
Note: Recommended length of the pulse is 500 ms.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 624

 Pulse Counter 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 88
Description
This is the input of the Pulse Counter 2 function. The module counts pulses at the input and if the input
pulses counter reaches value given by the setpoint Conversion Coefficient Pulse 2 (page 259) the
counter value Pulse Counter 2 (page 574) is increased by 1 and input pulses counter is reset to 0. Both
counter value and input pulses counter are stored in the nonvolatile memory.
Note: Recommended length of the pulse is 500 ms.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

PVCB Feedback
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1101
Description
Use this input for indication whether the PV circuit breaker is open or closed.
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: R
Remote AUTO
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are three modes OFF / MAN / AUTO) when this binary
input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 625

 Remote Ctrl Lock
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote MAN
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are three modes OFF / MAN / AUTO) when this binary
input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Remote OFF
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are three modes OFF / MAN / AUTO) when this binary
input is active. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 626

 Remote Start/Stop
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the Gen-set in AUTO mode.

Taken action in MRS application (AUTO Mode)

Starts the Gen-set – No delay
Active
Close GCB
Open GCB
Inactive
Stop the Gen-set – No delay

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 44
Description
If this input is active, all alarms except Emergency Stop and Overspeed are suppressed. The suppressed
alarms will be displayed in the alarm list, but they will not take effect regarding the Gen-set control.
Note: Sd Override (page 627) is indicated in the alarm list if Sd Override mode is active to inform the
operator that the engine is not protected.

IMPORTANT: MISUSE OF THIS INPUT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GEN-SET!

Note: User protection Sd Override is not blocked

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Start Blocking
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 68
Description
Start of the Gen-set is blocked if this binary input gets active before Start command is issued. While start is
blocked, alarm ALI Start Blocking is active.
Activation of this LBI while Gen-set is already running (or is about to be started) has no effect.
When LBI is active before Start command, the LBO READY (PAGE 672) is not active.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 627

 Start Button
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 189
Description

Binary input has the same function as Start Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Starter 1 Disabled
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1011
Description
When Gen-set has two starters available this LBI is used to disable starter 1.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Starter 2 Disabled
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1012
Description
When Gen-set has two starters available this LBI is used to disable starter 2.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Starter Priority
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1010
Description
By activating this LBI, STARTER 2 (PAGE 676) has higher priority in dual starter operation.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Stop Button
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 190
Description

Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on the InteliLite 4 front panel. It is evaluated in MAN
Mode only.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 628

 Sunrise/Sunset Home Possition
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1120
Description
This binary input can be used to adjust position of gen-set used for Sunrise/Sunset Function (page
330). In case that binary input is activated (only rising edge of LBI is used), setpoints Sunrise/Sunset
Latitude (page 331) and Sunrise/Sunset Longitude (page 331) are adjusted automatically from actual
coordinates from GPS signal.

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Switch To AUT
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1112
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to AUTO. Falling edge has
no effect and controller stays in AUTO MODE.
There is no blocking between these "Switch To" LBIs.
Example: CU is in OFF mode. LBI Switch To AUTO is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (LBI
stays active). Then LBI SWITCH TO MAN (PAGE 630) is activated – CU goes to MAN Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To OFF and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

When more rising edges from "Switch To" LBIs are detected at the same time, mode is selected according
to priorities in the table below.

"GO to" control priority

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 629

 Switch To MAN
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1111
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to MAN. Falling edge has no
effect and controller stays in MAN MODE.
There is no blocking between these "Switch To" LBIs.
Example: CU is in OFF mode. LBI Switch To MAN is activated – CU goes to MAN Mode (LBI stays
active). Then LBI SWITCH TO AUT (PAGE 629) is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To MAN and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

When more rising edges from "Switch To" LBIs are detected at the same time, mode is selected according
to priorities in the table below.

"GO to" control priority

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Switch To OFF
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1110
Description
When the first rising edge appears on the binary input, the MODE is changed to OFF. Falling edge has no
effect and controller stays in OFF MODE.
There is no blocking between these "Switch To" LBIs.
Example: CU is in MAN mode. LBI Switch To OFF is activated – CU goes to OFF Mode (LBI stays
active). Then LBI SWITCH TO AUT (PAGE 629) is activated – CU goes to AUTO Mode (at this
moment, LBIs Switch To OFF and Switch To AUTO are active – CU reacts only on rising edges).

When more rising edges from "Switch To" LBIs are detected at the same time, mode is selected according
to priorities in the table below.

"GO to" control priority

Highest OFF
MAN
Lowest AUTO

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 630

 LBI: T
Total Emergency Stop
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 995
Description
This binary input is used for stopping the engine and opening all breakers.
Activation of Total Emergency Stop leads to:
Alarm Total Emergency Stop is activated and history record TOTAL EMERGENCY STOP is
created
Controller will open MCB and GCB
Controller will keep MCB and GCB open as long as alarm is present in alarm list
Engine is stopped

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

LBI: U
Universal Hours Counter 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1094
Description
This LBI enables incrementation of statistic value UNIVERSAL HOURS COUNTER 1 (PAGE 568).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

Universal Hours Counter 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1095
Description
This LBI enables incrementation of statistic value UNIVERSAL HOURS COUNTER 2 (PAGE 568).

6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 631

8.1.5 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.

Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 635
LBO: B 641
LBO: C 642
LBO: D 644
LBO: E 645
LBO: F 653
LBO: G 656
LBO: H 662
LBO: I 663
LBO: L 665
LBO: M 667
LBO: N 668
LBO: P 669
LBO: R 672
LBO: S 673
LBO: U 679
LBO: V 682

For a full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 633).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 632

 Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AIN Switch01 635 Common Alarm Level 2 644 Horn 662

AIN Switch02 635 Daily AUX Batt Cycle HornRes Button Echo 662
AIN Switch03 636 Reached 644 HornRes Button State 663
AIN Switch04 636 Dual Operation OK 644 Idle/Nominal 663
Air Valves 637 Dummy Load Stage 1 644 Ignition 663
AL Common BOC 637 Dummy Load Stage 2 645 Ignition On 664
AL Common Sd 637 Dummy Load Stage 3 645 Initialized 665
AL Common Wrn 638 Dummy Load Stage 4 645 LCB Close/Open 665
AL Gen Freq Wrn 638 Dummy Load Stage 5 645 LCB OFF Coil 665
AL Gen Frequency 638 ECU Comm OK 646 LCB ON Coil 665
AL Gen Voltage 638 ECU Comm Error 646 LCB UV Coil 666
AL Gen Voltage Wrn 638 ECU Power Relay 647 Load Shedding Stage 1 666
AL Maintenance 1 639 ECU Red Lamp 647 Load Shedding Stage 2 666
AL Maintenance 2 639 ECU Run Stop 648 Load Shedding Stage 3 667
AL Maintenance 3 639 ECU Wait To Start 648 Load Shedding Stage 4 667
AL Overcurrent 639 ECU Yellow Lamp 648 Load Shedding Stage 5 667
Alarm 639 Electrical Alarm 648 Manual Ready 667
ATT DEF Level Lamp 640 Exercise Timer 1 649 Mode AUTO 668
ATT DPF Lamp 640 Exercise Timer 2 649 Mode MAN 668
ATT HEST Lamp 640 Exercise Timer 3 649 Mode OFF 668
ATT Inhibited Lamp 640 Exercise Timer 4 649 Neutral Close/Open 668
ATT Interlock Status 640 FltRes Button Echo 653 Neutral ON Coil 668
ATT SCR Error Lamp 640 FltRes Button State 653 Not In AUTO 669
ATT Regen ACK Lamp 641 Frequency Select 654 Not Used 669
ATT PCD Lamp 641 Fuel Pump 654 Peripheral Module Comm
AUX Batt Healthy 641 Fuel Solenoid 654 Fail 669

BCB Close/Open 641 GCB Button Echo 656 Prestart 669

BCB OFF Coil 642 GCB Button State 656 PVCB Close/Open 670

BCB ON Coil 642 GCB Close/Open 656 PVCB OFF Coil 671

BCB UV Coil 642 GCB OFF Coil 657 PVCB ON Coil 671

Choke 642 GCB ON Coil 658 PVCB UV Coil 671

Cooling 643 GCB UV Coil 658 Ready 672

Cooling Pump 643 Gen-set Active 659 Ready To Load 672

Common Alarm Active Generator Healthy 660 RegenerationNeeded 672

Level 1 643 Glow Plugs 660 Running 673
Common Alarm Active Heartbeat 662 Sd Override 673
Level 2 643 History Record Indication 662 Start Button Echo 674
Common Alarm Level 1 644

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 633

 Start Button State 674
Starter 1 675
Starter 2 676
Still Log 0 676
Still Log 1 676
Stop Button Echo 677
Stop Button State 677
Stop Pulse 677
Stop Solenoid 677
Supplying Load 679
Sunrise/Sunset Active 679
User button 1 679
User button 2 679
User button 3 679
User button 4 680
User button 5 680
User button 6 680
User button 7 680
User button 8 680
User button 9 680
User button 10 681
User button 11 681
User button 12 681
User button 13 681
User button 14 681
User button 15 681
User button 16 682
Ventilation 682
Ventilation On Pulse 682
Ventilation Off Pulse 682

6 back to Controller
objects

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 634

 LBO: A
AIN Switch01
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1400
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 1 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints AIN Switch01 On (page 319) and AIN Switch01 Off (page 320). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.29 General analog input 1 switch

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AIN Switch02
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1401
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 2 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints AIN Switch02 On (page 321) and AIN Switch02 Off (page 322). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.30 General analog input 2 switch

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 635

 AIN Switch03
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1402
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 3 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints AIN Switch03 On (page 323) and AIN Switch03 Off (page 324). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 03 (PAGE 685) analog input.

Image 8.31 General analog input 3 switch

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AIN Switch04
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1403
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 4 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints AIN Switch04 On (page 325) and AIN Switch04 Off (page 326). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 04 (PAGE 686) analog input.

Image 8.32 General analog input 4 switch

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 636

 Air Valves
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1247
Description
This output is activated together with binary output PRESTART (PAGE 669) and opens after the engine is
stopped or in case that engine is not ready.

Image 8.33 Air Valves

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common BOC
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Output is activated when any BOC alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Common Sd
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 4
Description
Output is activated when any shutdown alarm appears .
The output opens, if:
No shutdown alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 637

 AL Common Wrn
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 3
Description
Output is activated when any warning alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No warning alarm is active and

Fault reset button is pressed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Freq Wrn
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1267
Description
This output is active generator frequency warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Frequency
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one generator frequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Voltage
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Gen Voltage Wrn
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1289
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 638

 AL Maintenance 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2211
Description
Alarm is active when Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page 732) or BOC Maintenance Timer 1
RunHours (page 770) or Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 732) or BOC Maintenance Timer
1 Interval (page 770) is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Maintenance 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2212
Description
Alarm is active when Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page 733) or BOC Maintenance Timer 2
RunHours (page 770) or Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 Interval (page 733) or BOC Maintenance Timer
2 Interval (page 771) is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Maintenance 3
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2213
Description
Alarm is active when Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page 733) or BOC Maintenance Timer 3
RunHours (page 771) or Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (page 733) or BOC Maintenance Timer
3 Interval (page 771) is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AL Overcurrent
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 109
Description
This output is active when the BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 769) or BOC Short Circuit (page 769)
alarm is present in alarmlist or isn't confirm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Alarm
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc.
The output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active
until confirmation of alarm.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 639

 ATT DEF Level Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2154
Description
This output is active when ATT DEF Level Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT DPF Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2152
Description
This output is active when ATT DPF Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT HEST Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1373
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal HEST Lamp. If ECU stop send HEST LAMP signal binary input
will be opened without no matter if alarms in alarmlist are confirmed or not.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT Inhibited Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2155
Description
This output is active when ATT Inhibited Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT Interlock Status
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2233
Description
This output is active when ATT Interlock Status is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT SCR Error Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2153
Description
This output is active when ATT SCR Error Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 640

 ATT Regen ACK Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2231
Description
This LBO is active when the engine requires to confirm the start of aftertreatment regeneration.
Note: LBO is required in Yanmar engine types

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ATT PCD Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2446
Description
This LBO is active when the engine Particulate Control Diagnostic System detects removal of DPF, loss of
DPF function or failure of PCD itself.
Note: LBO is required in Yanmar engine types

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

AUX Batt Healthy
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5991
Description
LBO is active when AUX battery is considered is healthy. AUX battery value (voltage, capacity or SoC)
has to by higher than limits for Low AUX Batt Level Protection (page 280).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: B
BCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5981
Description
The output controls the battery circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued. Actual state of breaker is taken from BCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 612).
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 641

 BCB OFF Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5983
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of battery circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for
5 seconds.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5982
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of battery circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BCB Status
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5985
Description
This output indicates the battery circuit breaker position as it is internally considered by the controller.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

BCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5984
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of battery circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the
moment the breaker has to be switched off.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: C
Choke
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2091

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 642

 Description
Logical binary output for choke valve control. Output CHOKE is activated every time when logical binary
output STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) is activated. Output is deactivated when one of these conditions is fulfilled:
Choke Time is elapsed
Generator voltage is higher than Choke Voltage
Logical binary input Choke Inhibit is activated
Or when some of these situations during start occurs:
Any second level alarm
Emergency stop
Stop command
Cranking pause

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Cooling
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 74
Description
The output is active when Gen-set is in Cooling state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Cooling Pump
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 40
Description
This LBO is used for control of engine cooling. LBO is active when engine is running, when after cooling
time is counting or when LBI Cooling Pump is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Alarm Active Level 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 13
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one Alarms level 1 (page 710) in the alarmlis.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Alarm Active Level 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 15
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one Alarms level 2 (page 746) in the alarmlis.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 643

 Common Alarm Level 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 14
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one unconfirmed Alarms level 1 (page 710) in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Common Alarm Level 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 16
Description
This output is closed when there is at least one unconfirmed Alarms level 2 (page 746) in the alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: D
Daily AUX Batt Cycle Reached
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2704
Description
Output is activated when maximal number of cycles of AUX battery per day was reached. Maximal number
of cycles per day is adjusted in setpoint Max AUX Batt Cycles Per Day (page 289).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Dual Operation OK
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2096
Description
This LBO is active when there is not AHI Dual Operation Fail (page 729) alarm in alarmlist.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Dummy Load Stage 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1439
Description
This LBO is used to activate corresponding stage of external load bank.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 644

 Dummy Load Stage 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1440
Description
This LBO is used to activate corresponding stage of external load bank.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Dummy Load Stage 3
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1441
Description
This LBO is used to activate corresponding stage of external load bank.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Dummy Load Stage 4
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1442
Description
This LBO is used to activate corresponding stage of external load bank.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Dummy Load Stage 5
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1443
Description
This LBO is used to activate corresponding stage of external load bank.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: E
ECU 1 Comm Fail
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1998
Description
This output is closed when there is no communication with ECU configured in ECU slot 1.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU 2 Comm Fail
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1999
Description
This output is closed when there is no communication with ECU configured in ECU slot 2.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 645

 ECU Comm OK
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 347
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the communication with the ECU is
established.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Comm Error
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 114
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the ECU is not established or
has dropped out.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 646

 ECU Power Relay
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 116
Description
This output is to be used for control of "keyswitch" input of an ECU. If the particular ECU does not have
keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for control of DC power for the ECU.
The output is activated together with PRESTART (PAGE 669) and remains active for the entire duration that
the engine is running. It is deactivated at the moment that the engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654)).

Image 8.34 ECU Power Relay

IMPORTANT: This LBO also affects evaluation of Sd ECU Communication Fail (page 757) or
Wrn ECU Communication Fail (page 725) alarms. With configured LBO ECU Power Relay,
these alarms are evaluated only when this LBO is active. Without configured LBO ECU
Power Relay, these alarm are evaluated all the time.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Red Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 350
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active "red lamp" flag, i.e. it has detected a critical
malfunction and the engine should not be operated until a service check is performed. This flag is taken
from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary
frames and some do not provide the flag at all.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 647

 ECU Run Stop
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 958
Description
Signal for starting and stopping of ECU.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Wait To Start
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 959
Description
This output is active when ECU Wait To Start Lamp is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

ECU Yellow Lamp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 349
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active "yellow lamp" flag, i.e. it has detected a non-critical
malfunction. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag
in their own proprietary frames and some do not provide the flag at all.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Electrical Alarm
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2410
Description
LBO Electrical Alarm is active when any of generator protections of any alarm level type (Overload, Short
Circuit, IDMT Overcurrent, Current Unbalance, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Voltage Unbalance,
Overfrequency, Underfrequency, Reverse Power) is active.
LBO Electrical Alarm is deactivated by confirmation of generator protection alarms in alarmlist and
simultaneously generator protections alarms has to be inactive.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 648

 Exercise Timer 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1250
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the Gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 333) subgroup. This output
is active when Timer 1 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 333) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 341).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1251
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 2. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 341) subgroup. This output
is active when Timer 2 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 333) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 341).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 3
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1946
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 3. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the Gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 3 (page 349) subgroup. This output
is active when Timer 3 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 3 (page 349) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 3 (page 349).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 4
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1947
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 4. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the Gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 4 (page 357) subgroup. This output
is active when Timer 4 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 4 (page 357) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 4 (page 357).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 649

 Exercise Timer 5
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1948
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 5 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic tests
of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 5 (page 365) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 6
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1949
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 6 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic tests
of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 6 (page 373) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 7
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1950
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 7 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic tests
of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 7 (page 381) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 8
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1951
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 8 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic tests
of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 8 (page 389) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 650

 Exercise Timer 9

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2630
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 9 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic tests
of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 9 (page 397) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 10

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2631
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 10 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 10 (page 405) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 11

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2632
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 11 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 11 (page 413) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 651

 Exercise Timer 12

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2633
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 12 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 12 (page 421) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 13

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2634
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 13 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 13 (page 429) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 14

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2635
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 14 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 14 (page 437) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 652

 Exercise Timer 15

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2636
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 15 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 15 (page 445) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Exercise Timer 16

Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS

Comm object 2637
Description
This output is closed when the Exercise timer 16 is activated. The output can be used to make periodic
tests of the Gen-set, breakers, any external logic etc. and its activation depends on the setpoints in the
Subgroup: Timer 16 (page 453) subgroup.
Note: If more than one timer is active at the same time, timer with selected higher priority function is
applied.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: F
FltRes Button Echo
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 30
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Fault Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Fault Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Fault Reset command is received via communication line or
The input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 618) is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

FltRes Button State
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2695
Description
LBO is active as long as it's button is pressed or it's LBI is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 653

 Frequency Select
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1815
Description
The Frequency select output is active when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 50 Hz
and is deactivated when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 60 Hz.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Fuel Pump
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1253
Description
Output is activated when the value of Fuel Level lies under the value of setpoint Fuel Pump On (page
255) and is deactivated when value of Fuel Pump Off (page 256) is reached.
This output also can be activated by binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 619). In this case the binary
output is active until the binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 619) is active or until the value of Fuel
Level reaches 100 % or the time set by setpoint Transfer Wrn Delay (page 257) elapsed.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Fuel Solenoid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 22
Description
This output controls the fuel solenoid valve. The Fuel Solenoid output has two different behaviors
depending on engine type – gas or diesel. This setting is done by Fuel Solenoid (page 230) setpoint in
Engine Settings group.
Diesel:
The output is activated before binary output STARTER 1 (PAGE 675).The lead time is adjusted by setpoint
Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 241).

Image 8.35 Fuel Solenoid 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 654

 Image 8.36 Fuel Solenoid 2

The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts
Gas:
The output closes together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 663) when engine RPM exceed 30 RPM (fix
value).

Image 8.37 Fuel Solenoid 3

The output is deactivated when:

Emergency Stop comes
Cooled Gen-set is stopped
In pause between repeated starts

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 655

 LBO: G
GCB Button Echo
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 35
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
GCB button is pressed on the controller front facia or
GCB button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
GCB command is received via communication line or
the input GCB BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB Button State
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2698
Description
LBO is active as long as it's button is pressed or it's LBI is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 41
Description
The output controls the generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by
the controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm
is issued.
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Image 8.38 GCB Close command

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 656

 Image 8.39 GCB Open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB OFF Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.

Image 8.40 GCB OFF Coil command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 657

 GCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5
second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.

Image 8.41 GCB ON Coil close command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB Status
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 84
Description
This output indicates the GCB position as it is internally considered by the controller.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

GCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of generator circuit breaker. The output is active the
whole time when the generator is running. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment
the breaker has to be switched off.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 658

 Image 8.42 GCB UV Coil close command

Image 8.43 GCB UV Coil open command

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Gen-set Active
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 60
Description
The output is closed at the beginning of the Prestart Time period and opens when the Gen-set is fully
stopped.
If the Gen-set fails to start, then this output is opened after last cranking attempt.
The output also closes if the engine begins to rotate spontaneously.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 659

 Generator Healthy
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 77
Description
This output is active when the generator voltage, frequency and voltage unbalance is within limits. It is
deactivated:
immediately when the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance gets out of limits (when GCB is not
closed)
or
with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance has got out of limits (when
GCB is closed)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Glow Plugs
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1252
Description
This output is dedicated for diesel engine only. This output will be active for exact time pre-set by setpoint
Glow Plugs Time (page 234) before every starting attempt. The output is deactivated at the same time
as the STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) output is activated (100 ms after PRESTART (PAGE 669) output is
deactivated).

Image 8.44 Glow Plugs

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 660

 When the Glow Plugs Time (page 234) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 234) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) as long as Cranking Fail Pause (page
232).

Image 8.45 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 1

When the Glow Plugs Time (page 234) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 234) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) as long as the normal Glow Plugs Time
(page 234).

Image 8.46 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 661

 LBO: H
Heartbeat
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

History Record Indication
Related
Related FW 1.6.0 MRS
applications
Comm object 2762
Description
This LBO triggers 1s pulse when new history record is created in history log.
Note: When more history records are created at the same time, only one 1s pulse is created.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Horn
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:

Fault reset is pressed

Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 222) has elapsed

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

HornRes Button Echo
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 31
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Horn Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Horn Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Horn Reset command is received via communication line or
the input HORN RESET BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 662

 HornRes Button State
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2696
Description
LBO is active as long as it's button is pressed or it's LBI is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: I
Idle/Nominal
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 39
Description
This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of the engine during the startup
phase, if this feature (input) is available on the particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the
idle/nominal switching is performed over the communication bus.
The output Idle/Nominal is activated after the timer Idle Time (page 241) elapses. The Idle Time (page
241) starts to countdown when Starting RPM (page 233) reached. The underspeed protection is not
evaluated during fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM (page 233). A Start Fail protection
occurs if the RPM drop below 2RPM during idle.

Image 8.47 Idle/Nominal

Note: Connect binary output Idle/Nominal to speed governor to switch the speed:
opened = Idle
closed = Nominal
(for normally open contact type)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ignition
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 37
Description

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 663

 This output is dedicated to controlling the ignition at a gas engine. the output is active together with binary
output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) in the moment when the timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 245)
elapsed and the Gen-set reaches at least 30 RPM during cranking. The timer Sd Ventilation Time (page
245) become active when the Gen-set has been stopped for any Sd protection or the controller has been
turned on only before first cranking attempt. The output is deactivated 500 ms after all Additional running
engine indications (page 86) will be inactive. the output is deactivated when the Gen-set has to be
stopped or in pause during repeated starts.

Image 8.48 Ignition 1

Image 8.49 Ignition 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ignition On
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1257
Description
This output is on since start button is pressed till the unit is completely stopped (or the engine doesn’t start
or Sd or E-Stop is active)
Note: This function is the same as ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647). Ignition ON stays there from
historical reasons.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 664

 Initialized
Related
Related FW 1.6.0 MRS
applications
Comm object 1222
Description
This output is activated when the engine proceeded through initialization phase. (Initialization phase is
restart or power up of the controller.)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: L
LCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5986
Description
The output controls the load circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued. Actual state of breaker is taken from LCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 622).
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LCB OFF Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5988
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of load circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for
5 seconds.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5987
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of load circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 665

 LCB Status
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5990
Description
This output indicates the load circuit breaker position as it is internally considered by the controller.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 5989
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of load circuit breaker. The output is active the whole
time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 51
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

The load shedding outputs are activated (load is being shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is being reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 52
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

The load shedding outputs are activated (load is being shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is being reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 666

 Load Shedding Stage 3
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 53
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

The load shedding outputs are activated (load is being shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is being reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 4
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 452
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Load Shedding Stage 5
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 453
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality

The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: M
Manual Ready
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1258
Description
This output is active when controller is in MAN mode and the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it
i.e. no red alarm is activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) is active (Output READY (PAGE 672) is active).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 667

 Mode AUTO
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode MAN
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Mode OFF
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: N
Neutral Close/Open
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 50
Description
The output controls the neutral position of the three positions ATS switch. The ATS switch must react
within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is issued.
Note: InteliLite 4 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure
the feedback to binary inputs.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Neutral ON Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2591
Description
The output activates the neutral position coil of the three positions ATS switch. The pulse lasts for
5 seconds.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 668

 Not In AUTO
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1248
Description
This output is active when controller isn’t in AUTO mode.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Not Used
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: P
Peripheral Module Comm Fail
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 115
Description
The LBO is active anytime when at least one CAN module is in comm fail – regardless the protection is set
upon the lost of any specific CAN module.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Prestart
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 36
Description
This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated just before start. the output is
active for time period of Prestart Time (page 233). The output is deactivated 100 ms before the STARTER
1 (PAGE 675) output is activated.

Image 8.50 Engine start

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 669

 When the Prestart Time (page 233) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) then the Prestart
Time (page 233) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) minus
100 ms.

Image 8.51 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 1

When the Prestart Time (page 233) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) then the Prestart
Time (page 233) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 232) is long as normal Prestart Time (page 233).

Image 8.52 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 2

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

PVCB Close/Open
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2685
Description
The output controls the PV circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued. Actual state of breaker is taken from PVCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 625).
Note: InteliLite 4 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the
feedback to binary inputs.

Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 670

 6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically
PVCB OFF Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2687
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of PV circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for
5 seconds.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

PVCB ON Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2686
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of PV circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

PVCB Status
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2689
Description
This output indicates the PV circuit breaker position as it is internally considered by the controller.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

PVCB UV Coil
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2688
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of PV circuit breaker. The output is active the whole
time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 671

 LBO: R
Ready
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 62
Description
The binary output is active when the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it i.e. no red alarm is
activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) is active.
The binary output is switch on when the Ready state occurs.
The binary output is switch off when the Prestart or the Not Ready or the Stop state occurs i.e. always
except Ready state.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ready To Load
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 58
Description
the output is active whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed i.e. the stabilization phase is finished,
the Gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 243) timer has elapsed and the Gen-
set voltage and frequency are within limits.
If GCB is open, then the Gen-set voltage and frequency must be in limits.
If GCB is closed, then the Gen-set voltage and frequency can be out of limits. Protection delay can’t be
count down in this case. When the Gen-set voltage and frequency returns into limits before the delay is
finished, then output is still active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

RegenerationNeeded
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1372
Description
This output is active when DPF lamp from ECU is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 672

 Running
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 67
Description
The output is designed to be used as an indication that the Gen-set is running. The output is activated if
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) is active and STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) and PRESTART (PAGE 669) are
deactivated. The out remains active until engine stop and cooling period elapses.

Image 8.53 Running

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: S
Sd Override
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 962
Description
The output is active if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) input is active and open if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) input
is inactive. This output is usually used to send information about SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) input into ECU.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 673

 Start Button Echo
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 33
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Start button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Start button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Start command is received via communication line or
the input START BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Start Button State
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2693
Description
LBO is active as long as it's button is pressed or it's LBI is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 674

 Starter 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 24
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 231) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 232).

Image 8.54 Starter

The starter output opens when:

Starting RPM are reached
the "firing" speed is reached (gas engines only)
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than D+ Threshold (page 249)
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 234)
Generator voltage >25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 212) (any phase)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 675

 Starter 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2415
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 231) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 232).

Image 8.55 Starter

The starter output opens when:

Starting RPM are reached
the "firing" speed is reached (gas engines only)
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than D+ Threshold (page 249)
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 234)
Generator voltage >25 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 212) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph
(page 212) (any phase)

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Still Log 0
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Still Log 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 676

 Stop Button Echo
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 32
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Stop button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Stop button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Stop command is received via communication line or
the input STOP BUTTON is activated.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Button State
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2694
Description
LBO is active as long as it's button is pressed or it's LBI is active.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Pulse
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 25
Description
Output is active for 1 second after STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 677) output activation. This signal is sent to ECU
in case of engine stop request.

Image 8.56 Stop Pulse

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Stop Solenoid
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 23
Description

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 677

 This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output is activated when an engine stop
command is received and is deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off, i.e. engine is
stopped.

Image 8.57 Stop Solenoid 1

Image 8.58 Stop Solenoid 2

Note: If Additional running engine indications (page 86) went off during 5 s pause than Stop
Solenoid is not activated again otherwise stop solenoid is activated again.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 678

 Supplying Load
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 1249
Description
The binary output depends on measured generator active power. Power is compared with generator
nominal active power with use of hysteresis and with delay of switch 1 s.
When the measured active power is equal to or bigger than 5 % of Nominal Power (page 207) for 1 s
then the binary output is active.
When the measured active power is equal to or lower than 3 % of Nominal Power (page 207) for 1 s then
the binary output is inactive.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Sunrise/Sunset Active
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2705
Description
This output is active during night e.g. from sunset time to sunrise time. Time of sunrise/sunset is calculated
by Sunrise/Sunset Function (page 330).

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: U
User button 1
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 2
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 3
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 679

 User button 4
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 5
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 6
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 7
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 8
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 9
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 680

 User button 10
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 11
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 12
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 13
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 14
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

User button 15
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 681

 User button 16
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object
Description
.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

LBO: V
Ventilation
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 38
Description
This logical binary output is activated at the beginning of start procedure together with PRESTART (PAGE
669) LBO. Ventilation output is deactivated when engine stops revolving.
Ventilation LBO is also deactivated immediately when EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 617) (or E-Stop) is
activated or when controller is switched to OFF mode.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ventilation On Pulse
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2089
Description
This logical binary output is activated on rising edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 682) LBO (at the begining of
prestart period). The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 260) setpoint.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

Ventilation Off Pulse
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 2090
Description
This logical binary output is activated on falling edge of VENTILATION (PAGE 682) LBO (when engine stops).
The pulse duration is adjusted by Ventilation Pulse Time (page 260) setpoint.
Note: The output is intended for control of an engine room ventilation fan, engine container ventilation
fan, container louvres or similar running gen-set technology.

6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 682

8.1.6 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.

Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 685
LAI: C 688
LAI: F 688
LAI: L 688
LAI: N 689
LAI: O 689
LAI: P 689
LAI: R 690

For a full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 684).

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 683

 Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 01 685

AIN Switch 02 685
AIN Switch 03 685
AIN Switch 04 686
AUX Batt Charge Lev 686
AUX Batt Current 686
AUX Batt Cycles 686
AUX Batt SoC 686
AUX Batt SoH 687
AUX Batt Temp 687
AUX Batt Voltage 687
Coolant Temp 688
Fuel Level 688
Load Current 688
Load Voltage 688
Not Used 689
Oil Pressure 689
Oil Temp 689
PV Current 689
PV Voltage 689
RPM pickup 690
Rectifier Current 690
Rectifier Voltage 690

6 back to Controller
objects

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 684

 LAI: A
AIN Switch 01
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 209
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 43. This analog input controls logical binary output
AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 635). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch01 On (page 319) and AIN Switch01 Off (page 320).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 02
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 210
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 43. This analog input controls logical binary output
AIN SWITCH02 (PAGE 635). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch02 On (page 321) and AIN Switch02 Off (page 322).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Switch 03
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 211
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 43. This analog input controls logical binary output
AIN SWITCH03 (PAGE 636). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch03 On (page 323) and AIN Switch03 Off (page 324).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 685

 AIN Switch 04
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 212
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 43. This analog input controls logical binary output
AIN SWITCH04 (PAGE 636). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints AIN
Switch04 On (page 325) and AIN Switch04 Off (page 326).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AUX Batt Charge Lev
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AUX Batt Current
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AUX Batt Cycles
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AUX Batt SoC
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 686

 Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AUX Batt SoH
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AUX Batt Temp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AUX Batt Voltage
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 687

 LAI: C
Coolant Temp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 67
Description
Logical analog input designed for coolant temperature value received from analog sensor.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: F
Fuel Level
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage and setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 253) has to be adjusted correctly.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: L
Load Current
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 640
Description
Logical analog input designed for DC current of Load. Actual value of this LAI is visible in value Load
Current (page 550).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Load Voltage
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 639
Description
Logical analog input designed for DC voltage of Load. Actual value of this LAI is visible in value Load
Voltage (page 550).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 688

 LAI: N
Not Used
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: O
Oil Pressure
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 9
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil pressure value received from analog sensor.
Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case
choose OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 623) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is
adjusted via the same setpoint like for analog function.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Oil Temp
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 77
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil temperature value received from analog sensor.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: P
PV Current
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 572
Description
Logical analog input designed for current of PV. Actual value of this LAI is visible in value PV Current
(page 551).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

PV Voltage
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 571
Description

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 689

 Logical analog input designed for voltage of PV. Actual value of this LAI is visible in value PV Voltage
(page 552).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

LAI: R
RPM pickup
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 8
Description
This LAI selects the source of RPM.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Rectifier Current
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 638
Description
Logical analog input designed for current of rectifier. Actual value of this LAI is visible in value Rectifier
Current (page 552).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

Rectifier Voltage
Related FW 1.6.0 Related applications MRS
Comm object 637
Description
Logical analog input designed for voltage of rectifier. Actual value of this LAI is visible in value Rectifier
Voltage (page 553).
Note: This function is supported only in hybrid applications - AMF25 Hybrid and MRS16 Hybrid.

6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 690

8.1.7 PLC
List of PLC blocks
Group: Basic logical functions
OR/AND 692
Ext. XOR/RS 694

Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis 695
Comparator With Delay 696
Comp Win 697

Group: Math operations

Ext Math Fc. 699
Math AxB/C ±D* 700

Group: Time functions

Timer 701
Delay 702

Group: Other functions

Ana Chng Mon 704
Counter 707
Hold 708
Decomp. 4 709

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 691

 Group: Basic Logical functions

OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions

Related FW 1.6.0

Related applications MRS

Comm object 1

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 .. 8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1 .. 8

Outputs

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 692

 Output Type Negation Range Function
Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation

Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 – 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can
be inverted.

Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1

Function AND
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.

Image 8.59 Configuration of OR/AND block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 693

 Ext. XOR/RS
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.6.0
Related applications MRS
Comm object 39
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 .. 2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1 .. 2
Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block provides logical function of two values - XOR or RS flip-flop. Both inputs and output can be
inverted.

Function XOR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

The block contains a setting for RS dominance. This setting is available in the block dialog window (i.e.
this setting is constantly set by configuration and cannot be changed dynamically in operation).
Function RS
R-latch S-latch E-latch JK-latch
Input 1 (S) Input 2 (R)
Q
-1 -1 -1 -1
0 0 Q Q Q Q
0 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 1
-1 -1
1 1 0 1 Q NOT(Q )

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 694

 Image 8.60 Configuration of XOR/RS block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Comparison of analog inputs

Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.6.0
Related applications MRS
Comm object 63
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off
This input enables/disables output
Enable Binary Yes 0/1
of this block

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output

Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the
ON level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 695

 Image 8.61 Different On and Off levels

Image 8.62 Configuration of Comp Hyst block

Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.

IMPORTANT: In case that the values on inputs have different decimal numbers, then the
values are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use
values with the same decimal numbers.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Comparator With Delay
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.6.0
Related applications MRS
Comm object 4
Inputs

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 696

 Input Type Negation Range Function
Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output

Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output
will switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.

Image 8.63 Principle of delay

Image 8.64 Configuration of Comp Time block

Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Comp Win
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.6.0
Related applications MRS
Comm object 18
Inputs

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 697

 Input Type Negation Range Function
Input Analog No -2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483 647 Compared value
Input HIGH Analog No Same as Input Upper window limit
Input LOW Analog No Same as Input Lower window limit

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output

Description
The block output is switched on whenever the input value is in the range defined by Lo and Hi levels.

Image 8.65 Principle of delay

Image 8.66 Configuration of Comp Time block

Note: All inputs and can be constants or values from controller.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 698

 Group: Math operations
Ext Math Fc.
PLC group Math operations

Related FW 1.6.0

Related applications MRS

Comm object 17

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1 Analog No -2147483647 .. 2147483647 Input 1
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 2
Input 3 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 3
Input 4 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 4
Input 5 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 5
Input 6 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 6
Input 7 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 7
Input 8 Analog No Same as Input 1 Input 8

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

-2147483647 .. Result of the mathematical
Output Analog No
2147483647 operation

Description
This block performs basic mathematical operations of 2 to 8 operands based on selected function.

Function Output
ADD – Addition Input 1 + Input 2 + … + Input N
SUB – Substraction Input 1 - Input 2 - … - Input N
|SUB| – Absolute value of substraction ABS(Input 1 - Input 2 - … - Input N)
AVG – Average Input 1 + Input 2 + … + Input N) / N
MIN –Minimal value MIN(Input 1, Input 2, … ,Input N)
MAX – Maximal value MAX(Input 1, Input 2, … ,Input N)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 699

 Image 8.67 Configuration of Math Fc. block

IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers or dimensions
than the values are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to
use values with the same decimal numbers.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Math AxB/C ±D*
PLC group Math operations

Related FW 1.6.0

Related applications MRS

Comm object 51

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input A Analog No -2 .. 2 First multiplicant
32 32
Input B Analog No -2 .. 2 Second multiplicant
32 32
Input C Analog No -2 .. 2 Divider
32 32
Input D Analog No -2 .. 2 Addend/Subtrahend

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Output Binary No -2 .. 2 Result of the mathematical operation
Data Closed when Output is out of range
Binary No 0/1
invalid or when dividing by zero

Description
The block realizes the mathematical operation AxB/C ±D. In case of any invalid data on any of the inputs,
the Output is set to invalid value and Data Invalid is closed. The Output has resolution and dimension
based on setting of the block.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 700

 Image 8.68 Configuration of Math AxB/C ±D block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Time functions

Timer
PLC group Time functions

Related FW 1.6.0

Related applications MRS

Comm object 38

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0.0..3276.7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output

Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it
reaches zero or it can be reloaded at any other time using the "reload" input. The timer remains at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 701

 Image 8.69 Principle of timer

Image 8.70 Configuration of Timer block

Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.

Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.

IMPORTANT: If the inputs are not connected and First down option is not ticked, then the
output is active.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.6.0
Related applications MRS
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200.0 .. 3200.0
Analog No length generated by rising edge of
up [s, m, h]
the input
Input time Analog No -3200.0 .. 3200.0 Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 702

 length generated by falling edge of
down [s, m, h]
the input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal

Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:
Delay mode – the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode – a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.

Image 8.71 Delay modes principles

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 703

 Image 8.72 Configuration of Delay block

Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.

Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.

Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Group: Other functions

Ana Chng Mon
PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.6.0

Related applications MRS

Comm object 64

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Analog value which is
Input Analog No -2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483 647
checked
Defines if cheking is
Enable Binary Yes 0/1
active or inactive
Time when input analog
value should be
Delay Analog No 1 .. 2 147 483 647 changed by increment or
decrement adjusted in
change parameter
Reset Binary Yes 0/1 Reset of error output
Increment or decrement
Change Analog No -2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483 647
of analog value

Outputs

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 704

 Output Type Negation Range Function
Output is active when required changed is not
Error Binary Yes 0/1
fulfilled in required time
Invalid Binary Yes 0/1 Output is active when input value is not valid

Description
The block is monitor of change of analog value. Change of input value is compared with required
decrement or increment of value.
Example: Example - block can be used for pumps. Block will check if level of fuel is
increasing/decreasing by required rate. If not, error is activated.

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Analog Switch 8

PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.6.0

Related applications MRS

Comm object 45

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

32 32
Input 1 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 1
32 32
Input 2 Analog No -2 .. 2 Input value 2

32 32 Input value 3
Input 3 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 4
Input 4 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 5
Input 5 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 6
Input 6 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 7
Input 7 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)

32 32 Input value 8
Input 8 Analog No -2 .. 2
(optional)
Input SW 1 Binary No 0/1 Switch input 1
Input SW 2 Binary No 0/1 Switch input 2
Input SW 3 Binary No 0/1 Switch input 3

Outputs

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 705

 Output Type Negation Range Function
Switch output
32 32
Output Analog No -2 .. 2 according to the SW 1,
SW 2 and SW 3

Description
The block works as an analog multiplexer. The output value could be selected from up to 8 inputs
according to the 'Input SW 3', 'Input SW 2' and 'Input SW 1' state is appropriate input value copied to the
output, see the table below.

Input SW 3 Input SW 2 Input SW 1 Output

0 0 0 Input 1
0 0 1 Input 2
0 1 0 Input 3
0 1 1 Input 4
1 0 0 Input 5
1 0 1 Input 6
1 1 0 Input 7
1 1 1 Input 8

Image 8.73 Configuration of Analog Switch 8 block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 706

 Counter
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 1.6.0
Related applications MRS
Comm object 13
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

Input Input at which the edges are
Binary No 0/1
Count Up counted
Input
Counter value limit for activation of
Preset Analog No 0 .. 32767 [-]
the output
Limit
Input Clear Binary No 0/1 Reset input

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Output is activated when the counter
Output Binary No 0/1
value exceeds the limit

Description
The block works as a counter of edges (selectable rising, falling or both) with reset input and adjustable
counting limit. The maximal counter value is 32767. The counter value is lost when the controller is
switched off. The output is activated when the counter value is equal or higher than Input Preset Limit and
stays active until the block reset is done using Input Clear. Activating of the Input Clear resets the counter
value to 0 and deactivates the output. Holding the Input Clear active blocks the counting.

Image 8.74 Configuration of the Counter block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 707

 Hold
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 1.6.0
Related applications MRS
Comm object 37
Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

-2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483
Input Analog No Input value
647
Input triggering the
Hold Binary No 0/1
function

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

-2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483
Output Analog No Hold output
647

Description
The block is holding Input value based on value of Hold and selected mode. The Output has resolution
and dimension based on setting of the block.S

Mode Description
The block behaves like analog memory. Input Hold behaves like the reload trigger and
Edge
reacts on rising edge. The initial value of the Output after restart of the controller is 0.
The block is like a mirror of the Input while the Hold is inactive. The value of Output is
Level
latched at the last value while Hold is active.

Image 8.75 Principle of the Hold modes

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 708

 Image 8.76 Configuration of the Hold block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

Decomp. 4
PLC group Other functions

Related FW 1.6.0

Related applications MRS

Comm object 24

Inputs

Input Type Negation Range Function

-2 147 483 647 .. 2 147 483 Value to be
Input Analog No
647 "decomposed" to bits

Outputs

Output Type Negation Range Function

Bit 0,4,8,12,16,20,24,28 - according
Output 1 Binary Yes 0/1
to selected group of bits.
Bit 1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29 - according
Output 2 Binary Yes 0/1
to selected group of bits.
Bit 2,6,10,14,18,22,26,30 -
Output 3 Binary Yes 0/1
according to selected group of bits.
Bit 3,7,11,15,19,23,27,31 -
Output 4 Binary Yes 0/1
according to selected group of bits.

Description
The block converts the input analog value to binary form and provides selected bits as binary outputs.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 709

 Image 8.77 Configuration of Decomp. 4 block

6 back to List of PLC blocks

8.2 Alarms
What alarms are:
The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm management on page 142.

8.2.1 Alarm levels in the controller

8.2.2 Alarms level 1 710
8.2.3 Alarms level 2 746

8.2.2 Alarms level 1

What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 710

 List of alarms level 1

AL Fuel Transfer Failed 713 Wrn Alarm Email 1 Fail 721

AHI Manual Idle 713 Wrn Alarm Email 2 Fail 721
Wrn Module: Slot 1 713 Wrn Alarm Email 3 Fail 721
Wrn Module: Slot 2 714 Wrn Alarm Email 4 Fail 722
Wrn Module: Slot 3 714 Wrn Alarm SMS 1 Fail 722
Wrn Module(slotA) - false module 714 Wrn Alarm SMS 2 Fail 722
Wrn Module(slotB) - false module 714 Wrn Alarm SMS 3 Fail 722
Wrn Module(slotA) - unknown module 714 Wrn Alarm SMS 4 Fail 723
Wrn Module(slotB) - unknown module 715 Wrn Alarm SMS 5 Fail 723
Wrn Module(slotA) - unattended 715 Wrn Alarm SMS 6 Fail 723
Wrn Module(slotB) - unattended 715 Wrn Alarm SMS 7 Fail 723
Wrn Module(slotA) - comm. outage 715 Wrn Alarm SMS 8 Fail 724
Wrn Module(slotB) - comm. outage 715 Wrn Alarm SMS 9 Fail 724
Wrn Module(slotA) - unexpected 716 Wrn Alarm SMS 10 Fail 724
Wrn Module(slotB) - unexpected 716 Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail 724
Wrn EM(A) - a message lost 716 Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail 724
Wrn EM(B) - a message lost 716 Wrn ECUDiagBlocked 725
Wrn EM(A) - configuration mistake 717 Wrn ECU Communication Fail 725
Wrn EM(B) - configuration mistake 717 Wrn Default Password 726
Wrn EM(A) - insufficient 717 Wrn PasswEnterBlock 726
Wrn EM(B) - insufficient 717 Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp 726
Wrn EM(A) - missing or damaged 717 Wrn ECU Red Lamp 726
Wrn EM(B) - missing or damaged 718 Wrn ECU Wait To Start 727
Wrn Event Email 1 Fail 718 Wrn ATT DPF Lamp 727
Wrn Event Email 2 Fail 718 Wrn ATT HEST Lamp 727
Wrn Event Email 3 Fail 718 Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp 727
Wrn Event Email 4 Fail 718 Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp 727
Wrn Event SMS 1 Fail 719 Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp 728
Wrn Event SMS 2 Fail 719 Wrn ATT Interlock Active 728
Wrn Event SMS 3 Fail 719 Hst ATT Force Regen Active 728
Wrn Event SMS 4 Fail 719 Hst ATT Inhib Regen Active 728
Wrn Event SMS 5 Fail 720 AHI Dual Operation Fail 729
Wrn Event SMS 6 Fail 720 ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version 729
Wrn Event SMS 7 Fail 720 Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail 729
Wrn Event SMS 8 Fail 720 Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail 730
Wrn Event SMS 9 Fail 721 AHI Dual Operation Master Fail 730
Wrn Event SMS 10 Fail 721 AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail 730

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 711

 AL Transferring Fuel 730 Wrn Al/[Link]. 5 741
Wrn Coolant Temp 730 Wrn Al/[Link]. 6 741
Wrn Coolant Temp Low 731 Wrn Al/[Link]. 7 741
Wrn Fuel Level 731 Wrn Al/[Link]. 8 741
Wrn Charging Alternator Fail 731 Wrn Al/[Link]. 9 741
Wrn Stop Fail 731 Wrn Al/[Link]. 10 742
Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 732 Wrn Al/[Link]. 11 742
Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 732 Wrn Al/[Link]. 12 742
Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours 733 Wrn Al/[Link]. 13 742
Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 Interval 733 Wrn Al/[Link]. 14 742
Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours 733 Wrn Al/[Link]. 15 742
Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 Interval 733 Wrn Al/[Link]. 16 743
Wrn Generator L1 Overvoltage 734 AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed 743
Wrn Generator L2 Overvoltage 734 AHI Rental Timer 2 Elapsed 743
Wrn Generator L3 Overvoltage 734 ALI Start Blocking 743
Wrn Generator L1L2 Overvoltage 734 ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted 743
Wrn Generator L2L3 Overvoltage 735 ALI Gen Ph L2 Inverted 744
Wrn Generator L3L1 Overvoltage 735 ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted 744
Wrn Generator L1 Undervoltage 735 ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite 744
Wrn Generator L2 Undervoltage 736 Wrn Rental Timer Block Start 744
Wrn Generator L3 Undervoltage 736 Wrn Oil Pressure 744
Wrn Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 736 Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode 745
Wrn Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 736 Wrn Fence 1 Alarm 745
Wrn Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 737 Wrn Fence 2 Alarm 745
Wrn Generator Overfrequency 737 Wrn Fuel Theft 745
Wrn Generator Uderfrequency 737
6 back to Alarms
Wrn Overload 738
Wrn Battery Overvoltage 738
Wrn Battery Undervoltage 738
Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set 738
Wrn Battery Charger Fail 739
Wrn Override All Sd 739
Wrn Production Mode 739
Wrn Brute Force Protection Active 739
Wrn Rental Timer 1 739
Wrn Rental Timer 2 740
Wrn Al/[Link]. 1 740
Wrn Al/[Link]. 2 740
Wrn Al/[Link]. 3 740
Wrn Al/[Link]. 4 740

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 712

 AL Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when Fuel Level, received from ECU or LAI, does not
Description
increase during time Transfer Wrn Delay (page 257).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Manual Idle
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message AHI Manual Idle
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is activated when LBI FORCE IDLE (PAGE 618) is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI GCB Closing Is Blocked

Alarm Type Alarm List Indication

Alarmlist message ALI GCB Closing Is Blocked
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Alarm is active in case the GCB breaker is blocked due to some of the
Generator protections being disabled:
Description
Generator <> Voltage Protection (page 277)
Generator Frequency Protection (page 278)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with
Description
preconfigured module 1.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 713

 Wrn Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with
Description
preconfigured module 2.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with
Description
preconfigured module 3.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotB) - false module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 714

 Wrn Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 715

 Wrn Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 716

 Wrn EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in
Description slot (in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 717

 Wrn EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in
Description slot (if first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 515) and email
wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event Email 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event Email 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 2 (page 516) and email
wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event Email 3 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event Email 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 3 (page 516) and email
wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event Email 4 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event Email 4 Fail

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 718

 Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 4 (page 517) and email
wasn't send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Event SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 493) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event SMS 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 2 (page 494) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event SMS 3 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 3 (page 494) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event SMS 4 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description
number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 4 (page 495) and

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 719

 SMS wasn't send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Event SMS 5 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 5 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 5 (page 495) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event SMS 6 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 6 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 6 (page 496) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event SMS 7 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 7 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 7 (page 496) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event SMS 8 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 8 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 8 (page 497) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 720

 Wrn Event SMS 9 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 9 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 9 (page 497) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Event SMS 10 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Event SMS 10 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 10 (page 498) and
SMS wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 515) and email
wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm Email 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 2 (page 516) and email
wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm Email 3 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 3 Fail

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 721

 Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 3 (page 516) and email
wasn't send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Alarm Email 4 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 4 (page 517) and email
wasn't send.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 493) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 2 (page 494) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 3 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 3 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description
number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 3 (page 494) and

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 722

 SMS wasn't sent.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Alarm SMS 4 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 4 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 4 (page 495) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 5 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 5 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 5 (page 495) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 6 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 6 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 6 (page 496) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 7 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 7 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 7 (page 496) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 723

 Wrn Alarm SMS 8 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 8 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 8 (page 497) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 9 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 9 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 9 (page 497) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Alarm SMS 10 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 10 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 10 (page 498) and
SMS wasn't sent.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn SNMP TRAP 2 Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message SNMP TRAP 2 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 724

 This alarm is issued if TRAP will not be able to reach server, or in case there is no
Description
reply for the server
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn ECUDiagBlocked
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ECUDiagBlocked
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm
Description
automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) – all the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU 1 Comm Fail
Alarm evaluated ECU 1 is configured
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when there is no communication received from ECU
Description
configured in ECU slot 1.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU 2 Comm Fail
Alarm evaluated ECU 2 is configured
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when there is no communication received from ECU
Description
configured in ECU slot 2.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 725

 Wrn Default Password
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Default Password
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is issued if the factory default password and/or access code are used
Description
and engine is running. Factory default password and access code are "0".

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn PasswEnterBlock
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message PasswEnterBlock
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate that user will not be able to type in password for
Description set amount of time.
Note: This is cause by too many invalid attempts.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Yellow Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Yellow lamp is
Description activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ECU Red Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Red Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Red lamp is
activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
Description alarm automatically disappears.
Note: This lamp can be ignored during prestart phase. Use InteliConfig to
enable this function.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 726

 Wrn ECU Wait To Start
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Wait To Start
Alarm evaluated Only when ECU is connected
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Wait To Start lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ATT DPF Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT Filter Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT DPF Lamp is
Description activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ATT HEST Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT HEST Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT Hest Lamp is
Description activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT SCR Error Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT SCR Error
Description Lamp is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of
lamp, alarm automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT DEF Level Lamp

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 727

 Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT DEF Level
Description Lamp is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of
lamp, alarm automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Wrn ATT Inhibited Lamp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU ATT Inhibited Lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn ATT Interlock Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message ATT interlock Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This message is written in the history when LBI ATT INTERLOCK (PAGE 611) is
Description active. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm
automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst ATT Force Regen Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Hst ATT Force Regen Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This message is written in the history when LBI ATT FORCE REGEN (PAGE 609) is
Description active. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm
automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Hst ATT Inhib Regen Active
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Hst ATT Inhib Regen Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This message is written in the history when LBI ATT INHIBIT REGEN (PAGE 610) is

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 728

 active. LBO ALARM (PAGE 639) is not activated, after deactivation of lamp, alarm
automatically disappears.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Dual Operation Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active when there is fail between controllers in dual operation
function.
Example:
No connection – disconnection of cable
No connection – incorrect settings of COM Modes
Description
Controllers not in AUTO mode
Different Operation Modes (AMF controllers only)
Different FW versions in controllers

Note: This alarm is also written to history.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Dual Operation Different FW Version
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Different FW Version
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active when FW version (all numbers are checked) or Branch of
Description
Master and Slave is different.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm Type AHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active when Master is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Master Error Protection (page 296) option:
Wrn is selected .

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 729

 Wrn Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm Type AHI, WRN
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active when Slave is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Slave Error Protection (page 297) option:
Wrn is selected.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Master Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active when Master is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Master Error Protection (page 296) option:
AL Indic is selected.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Dual Operation Slave Fail
Alarm evaluated Only during dual operation
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active when Slave is not able to take the load e.g. there is alarm of
Description 2nd level on Master and setpoint Slave Error Protection (page 297) option: AL
Indic is selected.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AL Transferring Fuel
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message Transferring Fuel
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Coolant Temp
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Coolant Temp
Related applications MRS

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 730

 Description Warning alarm for Coolant Temp user protection.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Coolant Temp Low
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Coolant Temp Low
Related applications MRS
Description Warning alarm for Coolant Temp Low user protection.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fuel Level
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Fuel Level
Related applications MRS
Description Warning alarm for Coolant Temp Low user protection.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 654) is active
Related applications MRS
This alarm will occur when there is no increase of fuel level when FUEL PUMP
Description
(PAGE 654) is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than D+ Threshold (page 249) of the controller supply voltage. This alarm
Description
works similar to the red "battery" alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard. The
setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm evaluated While the engine shall be stopped

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 731

 Related
MRS
applications
This alarm occurs if the Gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates that
it is not stopped. The period when the Gen-set shall be stopped begins after the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) has been switched off and time delay Stop Time (page
247) has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 654) or
STARTER 1 (PAGE 675) are off.

Description

Image 8.78 Stop Fail

Note: Gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page
570) reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page
261) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down in hours while engine is running.
Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page 262) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 570)
Interval reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 262)
Description
(unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter
if engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page
262) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 732

 Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page
570) reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page
263) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down in hours while engine is running.
Setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 Protection (page 264) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 Interval
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 2 Interval
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 2 Interval (page 570)
reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 Interval (page 263)
Description
(unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter
if engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 Protection (page
264) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page
571) reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page
264) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down in hours while engine is running.
Setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 Protection (page 265) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 Interval
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance Timer 3 Interval
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (page 571)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 733

 reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (page 265)
(unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter
if engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 Protection (page
265) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 > Voltage

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 734

 Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1
and 2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2
and 3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3
and 1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 735

 Wrn Generator L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1
and 2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator L2L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2
and 3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 736

 6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Generator L3L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3
and 1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator overfrequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 273)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 274)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Generator Uderfrequency
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator underfrequency in the phase L1. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 273)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 274)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 737

 Wrn Overload
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is issued when the Gen-set power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Overload Wrn (page 266) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload BOC (page 266) Overload Del adjusts the delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Overvoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Battery > Voltage
Related applications MRS
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too high. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Overvoltage (page 258)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 258)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Battery Undervoltage
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery < Voltage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too low. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Undervoltage (page 257)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 258)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Password reset e-mail addr is not set
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active when there is no email address set in the controller and
simultaneously controller administrator password is not the default password.
Description
Note: When default password is changed the Wrn Password reset e-mail
addr is not set will be active after the restart of the controller.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 738

 6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Battery Charger Fail
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Battery Charge Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when logical binary input BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 612)
Description
is active.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Override All Sd
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Override All Sd
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm occurs when binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 627) is activated.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Production Mode
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Production Mode
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Alarm is active when the controller has turned on Productiom mode. In turned on
Description Production mode the user has the highest level 3 access without performing log
in.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Brute Force Protection Active
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when account break protection detects possible attack
Description and at least one account is blocked according to Account break protection
(page 169) rules.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Rental Timer 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 1
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 739

 Related applications MRS
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 1 (page 460) elapsed. Hours
Description
are adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 462).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Rental Timer 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 2 (page 462) elapsed. Hours
Description
are adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 464).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 1
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 1 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 2
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 2 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 3
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 3 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 4
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 4
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 740

 Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 4 will trigger.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Al/[Link]. 5
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 5
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 5 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 6
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 6
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 6 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 7
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 7
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 7 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 8
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 8
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 8 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 9
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 9
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 9 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 741

 Wrn Al/[Link]. 10
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 10
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 10 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 11
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 11
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 11 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 12
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 12
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 12 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 13
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 13
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 13 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 14
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 14
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 14 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Al/[Link]. 15
Alarm Type WRN

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 742

 Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 15 will trigger.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Al/[Link]. 16
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Al/[Link]. 16
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued when history event 16 will trigger.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 1 (page 460) elapses.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

AHI Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Alarm Type AHI
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 2 (page 462) elapses.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Start Blocking
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is active if LBI START BLOCKING (PAGE 627) is closed before Gen-set
Description
is started.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph L1 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 743

 Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if generator phase L1 is inverted.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Gen Ph L2 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph L2 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if generator phase L2 is inverted.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph L3 Inverted
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if generator phase L3 is inverted.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm Type ALI
Alarmlist message ALI Gen Ph Rotation Opposite
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if generator phases are wired in wrong order.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Rental Timer Block Start
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Rental Timer Block Start
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Alarm is active when there is start command and Rental Timer 1 (page 460) or
Description
Rental Timer 2 (page 462) elapsed.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Oil Pressure
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lower than the pressure set in the

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 744

 setpoint.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Wrong GCB Control Mode
Alarm evaluated all the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued when GCB Control Mode is selected to option No Button
Description
and simultaneously the controller is in AMF mode.

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 465)
Fence 1 Protection (page 467)
Fence 1 Radius (page 468)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 465)
Fence 2 Protection (page 469)
Fence 2 Radius (page 470)

6 back to List of alarms level 1

Wrn Fuel Theft
Alarm Type WRN
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Theft
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm occurs when the fuel level value measured at relevant AI (Fuel Level)
Description
drops faster than is the limit adjusted by setpoint Maximal Fuel Drop (page

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 745

 253).

6 back to List of alarms level 1

8.2.3 Alarms level 2

What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 746

 List of alarms level 2

BCBT BCB Fail To Close 748 Sd Underspeed 759

BCBT BCB Fail To Open 748 Sd RPM Measurement Fail 759
BCBT BCB Fail 748 Sd Battery Flat 759
PVCBT PVCB Fail To Close 749 Sd Start Fail 759
PVCBT PVCB Fail To Open 749 Sd GCB Fail 760
PVCBT PVCB Fail 750 Sd GCB Fail To Close 760
LCBT LCB Fail To Close 750 Sd GCB Fail To Open 760
LCBT LCB Fail To Open 750 Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage 760
LCBT LCB Fail 751 Sd Generator L2 Overvoltage 761
Sd Module(slotA) - false module 752 Sd Generator L3 Overvoltage 761
Sd Module: Slot 1 753 Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage 761
Sd Module: Slot 2 753 Sd Generator L2L3 Overvoltage 761
Sd Module: Slot 3 753 Sd Generator L3L1 Overvoltage 762
Sd Module(slotB) - false module 753 BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage 762
Sd Module(slotA) - unknown module 753 BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage 762
Sd Module(slotB) - unknown module 754 BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage 762
Sd Module(slotA) - unattended 754 BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 763
Sd Module(slotB) - unattended 754 BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 763
Sd Module(slotA) - comm. outage 754 BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 763
Sd Module(slotB) - comm. outage 754 Sd Current Unbalance 764
Sd Module(slotA) - unexpected 755 BOC Generator Overfrequency 764
Sd Module(slotB) - unexpected 755 Generator Underfrequency 764
Sd EM(A) - a message lost 755 Sd Overload 764
Sd EM(B) - a message lost 755 Sd Oil Pressure 765
Sd EM(A) - configuration mistake 756 BOC Coolant Temp 765
Sd EM(B) - configuration mistake 756 BOC Fuel Level 765
Sd EM(A) - insufficient 756 BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage 765
Sd EM(B) - insufficient 756 BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage 765
Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged 756 BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage 766
Sd EM(B) - missing or damaged 757 BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage 766
Sd ECU Communication Fail 757 BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage 766
Sd ECU 1 Communication Fail 757 BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage 766
Sd ECU 2 Communication Fail 757 BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph 767
Sd Emergency Stop 757 BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N 767
Sd E-Stop 758 BOC Generator Overfrequency 767
Sd Charging Alternator Fail 758 BOC Generator Underfrequency 768
Sd Overspeed 758 BOC Reverse Power 768

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 747

 BOC Current Unbalance 768
Note: This
BOC Overload 768 function is
BOC Short Circuit 769 supported only in
Sd Earth Fault Current 769 hybrid
applications -
BOC Overcurrent IDMT 769
AMF25 Hybrid
BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded 770
and MRS16
BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded 770 Hybrid.
BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours 770
6 back to List of alarms level 2
BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval 770
BOC Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours 770 BCBT BCB Fail To Open
BOC Maintenance Timer 2 Interval 771 Alarm Type BCBT

BOC Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours 771 BCBT BCB Fail To

Alarmlist message
Open
BOC Maintenance Timer 3 Interval 771
Alarm evaluated All the time
Sd Fence 1 Alarm 772
Related applications MRS
BOC Fence 1 Alarm 772
This alarm is
Sd Fence 2 Alarm 772
activated when there
BOC Fence 2 Alarm 773
is a problem with
circuit breaker
6 back to Alarms
position while
BCBT BCB Fail To Close
opening.
Alarm Type BCBT LBO BCB
BCBT BCB Fail To CLOSE/OPEN
Alarmlist message
Close (PAGE 641)
Alarm evaluated All the time opened but
LBI BCB
Related applications MRS
FEEDBACK
This alarm is Description
(PAGE 612)
activated when there
did not
is a problem with
opened in 5
circuit breaker
seconds.
position while
closing. Note: This
function is
LBO BCB
supported only in
Description CLOSE/OPEN
hybrid
(PAGE 641)
applications -
opened but
AMF25 Hybrid
LBI BCB
and MRS16
FEEDBACK
Hybrid.
(PAGE 612)
did not closed 6 back to List of alarms level 2
in 5 seconds.
BCBT BCB Fail
Alarm Type BCBT
Alarmlist message BCBT BCB Fail

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 748

 Alarm evaluated All the time circuit breaker
Related applications MRS position while
closing.
This alarm will occur
when the BCB LBO PVCB
FEEDBACK (PAGE CLOSE/OPEN
612) input does not (PAGE 670)
match the expected opened but
position given by the LBI PVCB
BCB CLOSE/OPEN FEEDBACK
(PAGE 641) output. It (PAGE 625)
stays active until the did not closed
mismatch between in 5 seconds.
the output and Note: This
feedback persists. function is
If there was no supported only in
command hybrid
issued by the applications -
controller and AMF25 Hybrid
Description and MRS16
the breaker
(feedback) Hybrid.
changes
suddenly the 6 back to List of alarms level 2
position itself, PVCBT PVCB Fail To Open
the alarm will Alarm Type PVCBT
be issued
PVCBT PVCB Fail
immediately. Alarmlist message
To Open
Note: This
Alarm evaluated All the time
function is
Related applications MRS
supported only in
hybrid This alarm is
applications - activated when there
AMF25 Hybrid is a problem with
and MRS16 circuit breaker
Hybrid. position while
opening.
6 back to List of alarms level 2 LBO PVCB
PVCBT PVCB Fail To Close Description
CLOSE/OPEN
(PAGE 670)
Alarm Type PVCBT
opened but
PVCBT PVCB Fail
Alarmlist message LBI PVCB
To Close
FEEDBACK
Alarm evaluated All the time (PAGE 625)
Related applications MRS did not
This alarm is opened in 5
Description activated when there seconds.
is a problem with

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 749

 Note: This Note: This
function is function is
supported only in supported only in
hybrid hybrid
applications - applications -
AMF25 Hybrid AMF25 Hybrid
and MRS16 and MRS16
Hybrid. Hybrid.

6 back to List of alarms level 2 6 back to List of alarms level 2

PVCBT PVCB Fail LCBT LCB Fail To Close
Alarm Type PVCBT Alarm Type LCBT
Alarmlist message PVCBT PVCB Fail LCBT LCB Fail To
Alarmlist message
Alarm evaluated All the time Close

Related applications MRS Alarm evaluated All the time

This alarm will occur Related applications MRS

when the PVCB This alarm is
FEEDBACK (PAGE activated when there
625) input does not is a problem with
match the expected circuit breaker
position given by the position while
PVCB CLOSE/OPEN closing.
(PAGE 670) output. It LBO LCB
stays active until the CLOSE/OPEN
mismatch between (PAGE 665)
the output and opened but
feedback persists. LBI LCB
Description
If there was no Description FEEDBACK
command (PAGE 622)
issued by the did not closed
controller and in 5 seconds.
the breaker Note: This
(feedback) function is
changes supported only in
suddenly the hybrid
position itself, applications -
the alarm will AMF25 Hybrid
be issued and MRS16
immediately. Hybrid.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

LCBT LCB Fail To Open
Alarm Type LCBT
LCBT LCB Fail To
Alarmlist message
Open

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 750

 Alarm evaluated All the time If there was no
Related applications MRS command
issued by the
This alarm is
controller and
activated when there
the breaker
is a problem with
(feedback)
circuit breaker
changes
position while
suddenly the
opening.
position itself,
LBO LCB
the alarm will
CLOSE/OPEN
be issued
(PAGE 665)
immediately.
opened but
LBI LCB Note: This
FEEDBACK function is
Description supported only in
(PAGE 622)
did not hybrid
opened in 5 applications -
seconds. AMF25 Hybrid
and MRS16
Note: This
Hybrid.
function is
supported only in 6 back to List of alarms level 2
hybrid
applications -
AMF25 Hybrid
and MRS16
Hybrid.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

LCBT LCB Fail
Alarm Type LCBT
Alarmlist message LCBT LCB Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm will occur
when the LCB
FEEDBACK (PAGE
622) input does not
match the expected
position given by the
Description
LCB CLOSE/OPEN
(PAGE 665) output. It
stays active until the
mismatch between
the output and
feedback persists.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 751

 Sd Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 752

 Sd Module: Slot 1
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 1
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with
Description
preconfigured module 1.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module: Slot 2
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 2
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with
Description
preconfigured module 2.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module: Slot 3
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module: Slot 3
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if controller will not be able to communicate with
Description
preconfigured module 3.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotB) - false module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 753

 Sd Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 754

 Sd Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between
Description
controller and module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 755

 Sd EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in
Description slot (in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 756

 Sd EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in
Description slot (if first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in
slot).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message ECU Communication Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if ECU is configured but the communication with ECU is not
Description
established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd ECU 1 Communication Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU 1 Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) – all the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU 1 is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU 1 is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd ECU 2 Communication Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU 2 Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) – only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 647) – all the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm occurs when an ECU 2 is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU 2 is not established or has dropped out.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Emergency Stop
Alarm Type SD

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 757

 Alarmlist message Sd Emergency Stop
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Alarm is activated when binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 617) is activated.
The Gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.
Description Note: Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and
connect it to a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function
Emergency Stop to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of
the button.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd E-Stop
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd E-Stop
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Alarm is activated when dedicated E-Stop input is activated. The Gen-set shuts
Description down in the moment the input is activated and starting is blocked until the input is
deactivated and fault reset is pressed.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than 80%D+ Threshold (page 249) of the controller supply voltage. This
Description
alarm works similar to the red "battery" alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Overspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit.
Description The behavior of the overspeed alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Overspeed Sd (page 250) adjust the overspeed limit

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 758

 Sd Underspeed
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
Related applications MRS
This alarm will be issued when the Gen-set is running and then stops by itself, i.e.
the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Underspeed Sd (page 253).
Description
The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated after successful Gen-set start and
is being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications MRS
The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM
Description (page 233) within the Maximum Cranking Time (page 232), although some of
additional running engine indication sources indicate that the engine has started.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Battery Flat
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
Related applications MRS
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the gen-set.
If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so
Description
exhausted that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized that it
causes controller reset.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Start Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
Related applications MRS
This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set have run out but
Description the Gen-set did not start. The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
Cranking Attempts (page 231) adjust the number of attempts

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 759

 Sd GCB Fail
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message SD GCB Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 620) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 656) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
Description
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an open
or close command within 5 seconds.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd GCB Fail To Close
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail To Close
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with circuit breaker position while
closing.
Description
LBO GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 656) opened but LBI GCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 620) did not closed in 5 seconds.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd GCB Fail To Open
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail To Open
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is activated when there is a problem with circuit breaker position while
opening.
Description
LBO GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 656) opened but LBI GCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 620) did not opened in 5 seconds.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 760

 setpoints are related to it:
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L1L2 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1
and 2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L2L3 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 761

 Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2
and 3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Generator L3L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3
and 1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 270)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 762

 Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1
and 2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2
and 3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3
and 1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 763

 Sd Current Unbalance
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Current Unbalance
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued to indicate if Current Unbalance BOC (page 269) timer
Description
elapses.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 273)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 274)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Generator Underfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 274)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 274)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Overload
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is issued when the Gen-setmains power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the
Description following setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 266) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 267) adjusts the delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 764

 Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm Type BOCSD
Alarmlist message Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description Shutdown alarm for Oil Pressure user protection.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Coolant Temp
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Coolant Temp
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description Breaker Open and Stop alarm for Coolant Temp user protection.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Fuel Level
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fuel Level
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description Breaker Open and Stop alarm for Fuel Level user protection.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 2. The following
Description
setpoints are related to it:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 765

 Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 3. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L1L2 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1
and 2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L2L3 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L2L3 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 2
and 3. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator L3L1 Undervoltage
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L3L1 < Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 766

 This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 3
and 1. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 271)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-ph
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase to phase voltages, i.e. the
difference between highest and lowest phase to phase voltage at any given time.
The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 272) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given
time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 272) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-n
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltages, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 272) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given
time.
Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 272) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Generator Overfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator > Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 273)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 274)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 767

 6 back to List of alarms level 2
BOC Generator Underfrequency
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator < Frequency
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 274)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 272)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Reverse Power
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Reverse Power
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
Related applications MRS
The alarm is issued when the level of active power (-kW) gets under limit given by
Description setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 275) for time longer than the value of
setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 275).

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Current Unbalance
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description Current Unbalance BOC (page 269) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase current at any given
time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 269) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Overload
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Overload
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period
Description
longer than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 768

 following setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 266) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 267) adjusts the delay

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Short Circuit
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Short Circuit
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 267) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC Delay (page 267) adjusts the delay in fine steps

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Earth Fault Current
Alarm Type SD
Alarmlist message Sd Earth Fault Current
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm indicates that the value of earth fault current is higher than adjusted
limit. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Earth Fault Sd (page 526) adjusts the maximum allowed earth fault
current.
Earth Fault Delay (page 525) adjusts the alarm delay.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Overcurrent IDMT
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
Related applications MRS
This alarm is issued if IDMT protection is activated due to over-crossing the IDMT
curve set by setpoints IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 268).
The behaviour of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Description IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 268) defines the reaction time of the
protection when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
Nominal Current (page 208) set the nominal current level, where the
alarm starts to be evaluated. The reaction time is infinite at this point.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 769

 BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer 1 Exceeded
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if Rental Timer 1 BOC will timer elapse.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer 2 Exceeded
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
Description This alarm is issued if Rental Timer 2 BOC will timer elapse.

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page
570) reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page
261) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down while engine is running. Setpoint
Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page 262) has to be set to: BOC

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 1 Interval
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 1 RunHours (page
570) reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Interval (page 262)
Description
(unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter
if engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 Protection (page
262) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours
Alarm Type BOC

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 770

 Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page
570) reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page
263) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down while engine is running. Setpoint
Maintenance Timer 2 Protection (page 264) has to be set to: BOC

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Maintenance Timer 2 Interval
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 2 Interval
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 2 RunHours (page
570) reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 Interval (page 263)
Description
(unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter
if engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 2 Protection (page
264) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page
571) reaches 0.
Description The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page
264) (unit is hours-h) and it counts down while engine is running. Setpoint
Maintenance Timer 3 Protection (page 265) has to be set to: BOC

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Maintenance Timer 3 Interval
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Maintenance Timer 3 Interval
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
The alarm is active when the value Maintenance Timer 3 RunHours (page
Description 571) reaches 0.
The value is adjustable by setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 Interval (page 265)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 771

 (unit is in months-m) and it counts down in days based on actual date (No matter
if engine is running or not). Setpoint Maintenance Timer 3 Protection (page
265) has to be set to: Warning

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 465)
Fence 1 Protection (page 467)
Fence 1 Radius (page 468)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

BOC Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 465)
Fence 1 Protection (page 467)
Fence 1 Radius (page 468)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 465)
Fence 1 Protection (page 467)
Fence 1 Radius (page 468)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 772

 BOC Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MRS
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of Gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 465)
Fence 1 Protection (page 467)
Fence 1 Radius (page 468)

6 back to List of alarms level 2

8.3 Modules
8.3.1 Plug-in modules
The available communication plug-in modules are:
CM-RS232-485 – communication module for monitoring via RS232 or RS485 line
CM2-4G-GPS – communication module for monitoring via 4G
CM3-Ethernet – communication module for internet monitoring via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP – extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs and with earth fault current protection

Note: Controller has 2 plug-in module slots.

Supported combinations of plug-in modules

Module CM3-Ethernet CM2-4G-GPS CM-RS232-485 EM-BIO8-EFCP

CM3-Ethernet

CM2-4G-GPS

CM-RS232-485

EM-BIO8-EFCP

Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 774
CM3-Ethernet 776
CM2-4G-GPS 778

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 773

 CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite 4 the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or Modbus connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and
RS485 interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.

Image 8.79 CM-RS232-485 interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

Image 8.80 Pinout of RS232 line

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 774

 Image 8.81 Pinout of RS485 line

Image 8.82 Jumpers description

Note: Balancing resistors should both be closed at only one device in the whole RS485 network.

Maximal distance of line is 10 m for RS232 line and 1200 m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120 Ω
Balancing resistor +5 V

Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC
Isolation Galvanic separation

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Install package to computer or open PSI to install it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 775

 firmware you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is re-established again automatically when the
update process is finished.

CM3-Ethernet
CM3-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface
for connecting a PC through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the
controller into a building management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols).

Image 8.83 CM3-Ethernet interface

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The
module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.

Image 8.84 Cross-wired cable

Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 21

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 776

 Weight ~30 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1W
Peak power consumption 2W
Operating temperature -40 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C
Ethernet port
100 Mbit/s, full duplex
RJ45 socket

Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint Group: CM-Ethernet (page 501).
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as
well.

Status LED
Blinking frequency Color
Green – everything is OK
Red – some of following errors occurred:
1 Hz unplugged Ethernet cable
module cannot connect to AirGate
module can not obtain IP address from DHCP
Green – firmware is currently being programmed
10 Hz
Red – no firmware present in the module

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Install package to computer or open PSI to install it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate
firmware you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is re-established again automatically when the
update process is finished.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 777

 CM2-4G-GPS
CM2-4G-GPS plug-in module containing a GPS receiver and GSM/WCDMA/LTE modem which can work in
two modes of operation based on the settings in the setpoint Internet Connection (page 475).

Image 8.85 CM2-4G-GPS module

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30 °C to +75 °C.

Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful
operation.

CM2-4G-GPS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
CM2-4G-GPS module also works like GPS locator. Geo-fencing function can be used with this module.

4G module types

If the anthenna is CELLULAR only and has 1 cable (OT1A4GXXMCX), it is connected to the 4G-MAIN
connector.
If the anthenna is CELLULAR only and has 2 cables, cables are connected to the 4G-MAIN or 4G-DIV
connectors (does not matter which cable to which connector).
If the anthenna is a combination of CELLULAR/GPS and has 2 cables (OT1A4GGPSCX), then cable
"4G/LTE" needs to be connected to the 4G-MAIN connector and "GPS" cable to the GPS connector.
If the anthenna is a combination of CELLULAR/GPS and has 3 cables (OT2A4GGPSCX), then cables
"4G/LTE" need to be connected to the 4G-MAIN and 4G-DIV connectors (does not matter which cable to
which connector) and "GPS" cable to the GPS connector.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 778

 Note: Type of the cable is labeled on its side.

Technical data
General
Width × Height × Depth 73.8 × 50.3 × 15
Weight ~35 g
Power supply 8-36 V DC
Power consumption 1.7 W
Peak power consumption 10 W
Operating temperature -30 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Storage temperature -40 ˚C to +80 ˚C

GNSS
Antenna interface SMA female, 2.8 V / 20 mA
Antenna type Active

Cellular
2G (GSM/GPRS/EDGE) Quad band,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
3G (UMTS/HSPA+) Seven band, 800
(BdXIX) / 850 (BdV) / 900 (BdVIII) / AWS
(BdIV) / 1800 (BdIX) / 1900 (BdII) /
Supported networks and frequency bands
2100MHz (BdI)
4G (LTE) Twelve band, 700 (Bd12 <MFBI
Bd17>, Bd28) 800 (Bd18, Bd19, Bd20) 850
(Bd5) / 900 (Bd8) / AWS (Bd4) / 1800 (Bd3)
/ 1900 (Bd2) / 2100 (Bd1) / 2600MHz (Bd7)
Antenna interface 2x SMA female (Main and Diversity)

SIM card settings

SIM card must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 779

 How to start using CM2-4G-GPS module
You will need a controller, CM2-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data
service.
Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. – i.e. if you want to
use the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card
supports 4G network.

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM2-4G-GPS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
If you want to use the built-in GPS receiver, also connect an active GPS antenna to the GPS antenna
connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM2-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Activate CM2-4G-GPS module by switching the setpoint Internet Connection (page 475) to enabled
Enter correct Access Point Name (this information is provided by Mobile Operator). Setpoint can be set
on controller's front panel or by InteliConfig.
Wait for approx 2 – 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will automatically
generate the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal strength
bar and AirGate ID identifier.

Image 8.86 Main screen of CM2-4G-GPS module

Image 8.87 Screen of AirGate

Modem Status
Code Description
OK Module successfully initialized and connected to the cellular network
E01 Unsuccessful restore to the factory settings

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 780

 E02 Modem configuration error
SIM not inserted or locked by PIN.
E SIM Use another device (e.g. mobile phone) to disable the option for SIM to be
locked by PIN
E04 It is not possible to set manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G/Automatic
It is not possible to register into cellular network. Possible reasons:
E registration No signal (no coverage, broken or unconnected antenna)
Manually chosen network mode 2G/3G/4G is not available
It is not possible to set PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context for defined APN
(Access Point Name). Possible reasons:
E context
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (format)
Wrong PDP context number
It is not possible to connect to cellular network (ATD*99***context) Possible
E connect reasons:
Setpoint Access Point Name is not correctly set (wrong text)
E08 Modem configuration error
E09 It is not possible to get signal strength
E10 It is not possible to get operator name
E11 Loss of registration into cellular network was detected
E12 Data error
E13 Data error
E14 Modem was restarted
It is not possible to send SMS. Possible reasons:
E SMS send Wrong number
SIM doesn’t support SMS
E18 Modem hardware configuration error
E conn lost Loss of connection with cellular network
E19 Modem configuration error
Restart-config Modem was restarted due to the change of controller setpoint
Restart-app Modem was restarted due to the performed cellular connection check

AirGate Status
Code Description
Not defined Setpoint AirGate Connection is Disabled
Wait to connect Waiting to connect
Resolving Resolving
Connecting Connecting
Creat sec chan Creating secure channel
Registering Registering
Conn inoperable Connected, inoperable

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 781

 Conn operable Connected, operable
Susp AGkeyEmpty AirGate is not set in the controller

Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Install package to computer or open PSI to install it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate
firmware you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is re-established again automatically when the
update process is finished.

Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 782

EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card, the controller can accommodate one AC current
(CT) measuring input (1A or 5A input) and up to 8 binary inputs or outputs. In InteliConfig PC configuration
tool it is possible to easily choose whether particular I/O will be binary input or output.

Image 8.88 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface

Note: This protection is active ONLY when Engine is running.

IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.

IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is supported by controller only in slot A.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 782

 Image 8.89 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP

Image 8.90 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring

IMPORTANT: Current inputs are supported only in MRS 16 and AMF 25 and AMF9 controllers.

EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data

Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
40 mA / 8 VDC
27 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
22 mA / 24 VDC
19 mA / 36 VDC

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 783

 Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
Close/Open 0-2 VDC close contact
indication >6 VDC open contact

Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated
Max. current 0,5A
Switching to positive supply terminal

Current measuring input

Number of inputs 2
Nominal input current 1A/5A
Load (CT output impedance) < 0,1
Max measured current from CT 10 A
Current measurement
2% from Nominal current
tolerance
Max peak current from CT 150 A / 1 s
Max continuous current 10 A

Earth fault current measurement

The Earth Fault protection is done by the extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP.
When the measured current exceeds the set value, which indicates that part of the current is dispersed to
earth, and when the set Earth Fault Delay (page 525) time elapses, the Earth Fault Current Protection
(page 524), Sd Earth Fault Current (page 769) alarms activate. Earth Fault protection is not active when
Gen-set does not run and when the Earth Fault Current Protection (page 524) is disabled.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is not intended to protect human health, but the
device!

Image 8.91 Earth fault current protection

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 784

 Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Install package to computer or open PSI to install it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate
firmware you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is re-established again automatically when the
update process is finished.

8.3.2 CAN modules

Supported combinations of modules 785

The available extension CAN modules are:

Inteli AIN8 – extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 – extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO16/0 – extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs

Supported combinations of modules

Inteli Inteli Inteli Inteli
Slot Inteli AIN8 IGL-RA15 IGS-PTM
AIN8TC IO8/8 IO16/0 AIO9/1

IMPORTANT: In slot 3, 4 and 5 CAN modules Inteli IO8/8 and Inteli IO16/0 are supported without
analog outputs. Analog outputs of these CAN modules are supported only in slot 1 and 2.

It is possible to add up to 80 binary inputs or up to 68 binary outputs or up to 32 analog inputs on CAN

modules.

Supported combinations of modules

The maximal number of CAN modules is limited by the number of the controller's generic modules. Once the
physical module is configured, it allocates necessary generic modules. So, it is possible to configure as many
CAN modules as many generic modules are available. The maximum number of CAN modules is also limited

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 785

 by the number of addresses (indexes) that can be configured for each type of the generic module. CAN
modules and generic modules share indexes.
Example: If you configure Inteli IO8/8 module which is using 1x BI, BO, and AO generic module with index
(address) 1, any other module using same generic modules will not be able to be configured with index
(address) 1 (IGS-PTM, Inteli AIO9/1).

Each generic module has 8 "terminals" (inputs/outputs) and the InteliLite 4 has the following amount of the
generic modules:
AI generic: 16
AO generic: 8
BI generic: 16
BO generic: 16
AI32 generic: 2
In the table below, you can see how many generic modules are necessary for each CAN module and how
many indexes are available for each type of CAN module in the InteliLite 4.

Max number of
CAN Module AI generic AO generic BI generic BO generic
indexes
Inteli AIN8 10 1 0 0 0
Inteli IO 8/8 12 0 1 1 1
Inteli IO 16/0 8 0 1 2 0
IGL-RA15 4 0 0 0 2
IGS-PTM 4 1 1 1 1
Inteli AIO9/1 5 2 1 0 0
Inteli AIN8TC 10 1 0 0 0
I-AOUT8 4 0 1 0 0
IS-AIN8 10 1 0 0 0
IS-AIN8TC 10 1 0 0 0
IS-BIN16/8 7 0 0 2 1

Note: When configuring modules do not forget to let first 4 indexes free for modules which can't use high
addresses such as IGL-RA15, IGS-PTM, AIO9/1, I-AOUT8.

Note: Module Inteli IO8/8 has available AOUT only if it is configured with index number below 9 and Inteli
AIO9/1 has available AOUT only if it is configured with index number below 5.

Note: Module Inteli IO8/8 with older FW than [Link] has available AOUT only if it is configured with index
number below 5.

Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 787
Inteli IO8/8 792
IGS-PTM 799
Inteli AIN8TC 805
Inteli AIO9/1 809

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 786

 IGL-RA15 814

Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is an extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.

Image 8.92 Inteli AIN8

Image 8.93 Inteli AIN8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 787

 Terminals

Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON" – switch both switches)

Note: Impulse input is not supported.

Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported in controller.

Supported sensors

Sensors
User curves NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5 V
PT100 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10 V
PT1000 [°C] (fix) 4-20 mA passive
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-2400 Ω 4-20 mA active

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 788

 Sensors
NI1000 [°C] (fix) 0-10 kΩ 0-20 mA passive
PT100 [°F] (fix) ±1 V ±20 mA active
PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4 V

CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.

Note: When setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Remove the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on pins
4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch [Link] PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press the Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process does not start – after 60 seconds the "Timeout" will be evaluated.
In this case please check:

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 789

 You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blink)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn't communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Terminator

Resistance sensor - 3 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 790

 Resistance sensor – 2 wires

Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0-2400 Ω, 0-10 kΩ

Current sensor - active

Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Current sensor - passive

Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 791

 Voltage sensor

Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3" × 4.3" × 1.8")
Weight 221.5 grams

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±25 mV
Range: ±20 mA
Current
Accuracy: ±0.25 % of actual value + ±50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ±0.5 % of actual value + ±2 Ω

Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 – 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO16/0 – 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
The detection of communication speed is indicated by rapid flashing of status LED. Once the speed is
detected the module remains set for this speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of
communication speed detection is done by resetting of the module.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 792

 Image 8.94 Inteli IO8/8

Image 8.95 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions

Note: All dimensions are in mm.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 793

 Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Binary outputs 8 binary outputs (8 binary inputs)
Analog outputs 2 analog outputs
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
Binary inputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary input indication
Binary outputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary output indication
CAN LED Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON" – switch both switches)

Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Binary outputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
High side switch
Low side switch

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 794

 All 8 inputs are always configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by
switch on the PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
can be configured as:
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5 V, with adjustable frequency from 200 Hz to 2400 Hz, with step 1 Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In
case of failure (a difference between the required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued
(type of the alarm is set by "Protection upon module failure" – (No protection / Warning / Shutdown)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.

CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary
output and analog outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has
address A, second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.

Note: When setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Remove the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on pins

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 795

 4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv

5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch [Link] PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press the Start button
9. Wait till process is done (if the process does not start – after 60 seconds the "Timeout" will be evaluated).
In this case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blink)
12. Module FW is upgraded

LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has an LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has an LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary
output is set. When this LED is shining, then the module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.
When this LED is dark, the module is configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector – status LED

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 796

 LED status Description
Dark FW in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs – pull up

There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see example of binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the GND (-) – dashed line).
In lower picture is an example of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.
Binary inputs – pull down

There are two options of wiring. In the upper picture you can see an example of binary input connected
between BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) – dashed line).
In the lower picture is an example of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 797

 Binary outputs – high side

When high side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the negative potential
directly Terminal VHS (voltage High side) must be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of
each binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs – low side

When low side setting of outputs is chosen – binary output must be connected to the positive potential of
power supply directly. Negative potential is connected internally – dashed line.
Analog outputs

Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100 mA.

IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 798

 Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3" × 4.3" × 1.8")
Weight 240 grams

Analog outputs
Number of channels 2
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ±20 mV + ±0.5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ±100 µA + ±0.5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency – adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA

Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for close contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for open contact
6 to 36 V DC
indication

Note: Signals and communications can't be connected as long distance lines (not to be connected outside of
the building or longer than 30 m).

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC

IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog
output. IGS-PTM module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 799

 Image 8.96 IGS-PTM

Image 8.97 IGS-PTM dimensions

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 800

 Terminals

Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply

Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog input is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.

RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring

Supported sensors

Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 Ω
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 801

 CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the
lower PCB.

IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliLite 4

Address configuration
If InteliLite 4 controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers
labeled ADR1 and ADR2.

BOUT
ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module AIN module
module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4

Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade is available via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper BOOT.
RESET jumper is used to reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming FlashProg PC
tool should be used.

LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has an LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has an LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary
output is set.
LED at power connector – status LED

LED status Description

Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and
Lights
controller properly works.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 802

 Wiring
Binary inputs

Binary outputs

Resistance sensor

Note: Range: 0-2400 Ω

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.

Voltage sensor

Note: Range 0-100 mV

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 803

 Current sensor – passive

Note: Range: ±0-20 mA

IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20 mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is
necessary to chose ±20 mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.

Analog outputs

Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ±0.33 mA

Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95 × 96 × 43 mm (3.7" × 3.8" × 1.7")

Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ±0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 804

 Analog outputs
Number of channels 1
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0.33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit

Binary inputs
Number of channels 8
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for close contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for open contact
8 to 36 V DC
indication

Note: Signals and communications can't be connected as long distance lines (not to be connected outside of
the building or longer than 30 m).

Binary outputs
Number of channels 8
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Number of channels 8
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1.5 % ±.1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0.5 Ω out of measured value
Range: 0-250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ±2 Ω out of measured value

Inteli AIN8TC
Inteli AIN8TC module is an extension module equipped with 8 analog inputs dedicated for thermocouple
sensors only.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by rapid flashing of status LED. Once the speed is
detected the module remains set for this speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of
communication speed detection is done by resetting of the module.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 805

 Image 8.98 Inteli AIN8TC

Image 8.99 Inteli AIN8TC dimensions

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 806

 Terminals

ANALOG INPUT 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK

Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as thermocouple sensors only

Supported sensors

Sensors
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 807

 Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Note: "nc" means not cold junction compensation (by external sensor). In this case is used internal
temperature sensor on the PCB

Address and DIP switch setting

Address configuration
DIP switch determines CAN address for analog inputs.

Programming Firmware
Firmware is upgraded via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST.
For programming FlashProg PC tool version 4.2 or higher must be used.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark FW in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn't communicate with the controller)

Wiring
Analog inputs

Terminator

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 808

 Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3" × 4.3" × 1.8")

Weight 237.5 grams
Interface to controller CAN1

Analog inputs (not electric separated) 8, no galvanic separated

Measuring ±100 mV
Accuracy ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
Internal sensor for measuring cold junction -
±1 °C in temperature range -20 °C ÷ +70 °C
Accuracy
CANbus is galvanic separated from the
measurement and power supply.
All analog inputs are galvanic separated
Galvanic separation
from power supply.
Analog inputs are not galvanic separated
between channels

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Protection IP20
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Heat radiation 2W

Thermocouples which are galvanically separated and galvanically non-separated are supported.

Inteli AIO9/1
Inteli AIO9/1 module is an extension module equipped with analog inputs and outputs – designed for DC
measurement.
The detection of communication speed is indicated by rapid flashing of status LED. Once the speed is
detected the module remains set for this speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of
communication speed detection is done by resetting of the module.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 809

 Image 8.100 Inteli AIO9/1

Image 8.101 Inteli AIO9/1 dimensions

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 810

 Terminals

ANALOG INPUT 9 channels

ANALOG OUTPUTS 1 channel
CAN CAN1 line
POWER Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position "ON")
TEST jumper Upgrade of SW
AT-LINK Connector for AT-LINK (Upgrade of SW)

Analog inputs
4 channels AIN1 – AIN4 can be configured as:
Sensor ±65V (determined for measurement of battery voltage)
4 channels AIN5 – AIN8 can be configured as:
Thermocouples – type J,K or L (in °C or °F)
Sensor ±75mV DC – (for connecting current shunts)
1 channel AIN9 can be configured as:
RTD (Pt1000, Ni1000)
Common resistance 0-2400Ω

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 811

 Analog outputs
1 channel AOUT1. Type of output:
0-10V DC
0-20mA
PWM (5 V, freq 2.4 Hz ÷2.4 kHz)
Analog output has 4-pins connector – GND and one pin for each type of output.
All analog inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.

Supported sensors

Sensors
User curves
PT1000 [°C] (fix)
NI1000 [°C] (fix)
PT1000 [°F] (fix)
NI1000 [°F] (fix)
0-2400 Ω (fix linear)
±65 V DC (fix linear)
±75 mV (fix linear)
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Address and DIP switch setting

Address configuration
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs and outputs.
Programming Firmware
Firmware upgrade is available via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST and
switch OFF and ON the power supply.
For programming use FlashProg PC tool version 4.4 or higher.

LED indication

LED status Description

Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 812

 Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn’t communicate with the controller)

Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.

Measuring resistance – AIN9

2 – wire measurement

Ranges: Pt1000, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω.

Analog input 9 is determined for measuring resistance only.

Technical data

Dimension (W × H × D) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3" × 4.3" × 1.8")

Weight 248 grams
CAN1 – galvanic separated from power supply
Interface to controller
and measurement,

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 813

 Analog inputs (not electric separated) 9 channels
0-65 V ± 0.25 % of actual value + ± 120 mV
Measurement is not galvanic separated from
Range
power supply, but IN- is not interconnected with
AIN1-AIN4 – Voltage inputs
GND – there is floating measurement.
Accuracy of
± 0,1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV (± 3 °C)
measurement
Range ± 75 mV (nominal) (measurement up to ±80 mV)
AIN5-AIN8 – Voltage inputs Accuracy of ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 75 µV
measurement Galvanic separated from power supply
Range 0- 2400 Ω
± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 4 Ω Pt1000, Ni1000 ±
AIN9 resistance input Accuracy of
2,5 °C
measurement
It is not galvanic separated from power supply.

Analog output
I 0-20mA /500Rmax. ± 1 % of actual value + ± 200 uA
U 0-10V ± 0.5 % of actual value + ± 50 mV
PWM – 5 V, 200 Hz-2.4kHz 15 mA max.
Galvanic separated from power supply

Galvanic
CAN bus is galvanic separated from the measurement and power supply
separation

Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Protection IP20
Current consumption 150 mA at 24 V ÷ 400 mA at 8 V
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 80 °C

The product is fully supported in firmware IGS-NT 3.1.1 or higher.

For information about support of this module in IGS-NT fw branches and ID-DCU – please read New Feature
Lists.

IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator (IGL-RA15) is designed as an extension signalling unit.
The unit is equipped with a fully configurable tricolor (red, orange, green) LED for intuitive operation
together with high functionality.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 814

 Image 8.102 IGL-RA15

Image 8.103 IGL-RA15 dimensions

Terminals

Horn Horn
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply

CAN address

Address Jumper A Jumper B

1 OPEN OPEN
5+6 CLOSED OPEN
Customer defined CLOSED CLOSED

SW changing of CAN1 address is enabled only when both jumpers are closed. Any one of these addresses
(1+2 or 3+4 or 5+6 or 7+8) can be set via the following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 815

 Press Lamp test sixteen times
Set the address up by pressing Horn reset.
The number of red luminous LEDs means the CAN1 addresses (two for addresses 1+2, four for
addresses 3+4, six for addresses 5+6 and eight for addresses 7+8)
Press Lamp test

LED indication
Each LED color is adjusted independently of controller output settings. If controller output 1 is set as
"Common Shutdown" it does not mean red LED1 color for iGL-RA15. The LEDs color can be adjusted by
following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow
Press Horn reset to change the LED1 color (green, yellow, red)
Press Lamp test to switch to the next LED color adjusting
Continue to adjust all LEDs color
After LED15 color adjusting press Lamp test three times

Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns
to normal operation without changes saving.

Status LED
The signals LEDs are handled like binary outputs. This means everything that can be configured to binary
outputs can be also configured to the LEDs of IGL-RA15.

LED status Description

Lights Configured logical output is active on the controller
Dark green LED Configured logical output is not active on the controller
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was
Dark yellow or red LED
pressed.
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was still
Yellow or red LED blinks
not pressed.

Power LED

LED status Description

Blinking green The unit is OK and the communication to the master controller is OK.
Blinking red The unit is OK, but the communication to the master controller is not running.
Blinking yellow EEPROM check not passed OK after power on
Yellow Horn timeout or controller address adjustment

Horn setting
The horn output is activated if any of red or yellow LED is on. Output is on until pressing Horn reset or horn
timeout counts down. The timeout can be set via the following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow
Press Lamp test fifteen times

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 816

 Set the horn timeout by pressing Horn reset.
The number of green luminous LEDs means timeout in 10 s (any for disabling horn output, 1 for 10s
timeout, 2 for 10s timeout, 15 for disabling horn timeout).
Press Lamp test two times

Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns
to normal operation without changes saving.

The horn is activated:

If any red or yellow LED lights up or
At the end of the extended lamp test. See chapter Lamp and horn test (page 817)
The horn can be silenced:
By pressing horn reset button or
It silences automatically after adjusted time

Lamp and horn test

Pressing and holding lamp test button for less than 2 s executes the basic lamp test. All LEDs light up with the
configured color. If the button is held longer than 2 s, an extended test is started. Every LED is tested step-by-
step in green color and then in red color. The horn is activated at the end of the test. Afterwards, that the unit
returns to normal operation. The horn can be silenced with horn reset.

Wiring

* terminator resistor only when iGL-RA 15 is the last unit on the CAN1 bus.
Note: The shielding of the CAN bus cable must be grounded at one point only!

Note: See the section Technical data (page 195) for recommended CAN bus cable type.

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 817

 Technical data

General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
0.35-0.1A (+1Amax horn output) depends on supply
Current consumption
voltage
Protection IP65
Humidity 85%
Storage temperature -30 °C to +80 °C
Operating temperature -20 °C to +70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 180 × 120 × 55 mm
Weight 950 g

Horn output
Maximum current 1.0 A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC

CAN bus interface

Galvanic separated
Maximal CAN bus length 200 m
Speed 250 kBd
Nominal impedance 120 Ω
Cable type twisted pair (shielded)
Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length
Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75 % (max. 4.4 ns/m)
2
Wire crosscut min.0.25 mm
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB / 100 m
Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3083A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
BELDEN ([Link]) 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3084A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3085A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
LAPP CABLE ([Link])
Unitronic BUS CAN
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA

6 back to Appendix

InteliLite4 MRS16 Global Guide 818